summaryrefslogtreecommitdiff
path: root/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/aastex/aasclass.dtx
diff options
context:
space:
mode:
Diffstat (limited to 'Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/aastex/aasclass.dtx')
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/aastex/aasclass.dtx12782
1 files changed, 0 insertions, 12782 deletions
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/aastex/aasclass.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/aastex/aasclass.dtx
deleted file mode 100644
index 9dbf142a2c0..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/aastex/aasclass.dtx
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,12782 +0,0 @@
-% \iffalse ltxdoc klootch
-% AASTeX.dtx: document class for AAS journal.
-% Copyright(C) 2003 American Astronomical Society.
-%
-% Disclaimer:
-% This file is distributed WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY;
-% without even the implied warranty of
-% MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
-%
-% ReadMe:
-% For the documentation and more detailed instructions for
-% installation, typeset this document with \LaTeX.
-%
-% \fi
-% \CheckSum{5961}
-%% \CharacterTable
-%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z
-%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z
-%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9
-%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \#
-%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \&
-%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \)
-%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \,
-%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/
-%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \<
-%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \?
-%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\
-%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_
-%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \|
-%% Right brace \} Tilde \~}%
-%
-% \iffalse ltxdoc klootch
-%%% @LaTeX-file{
-%%% filename = "aastex.dtx",
-%%% version = "5.2",
-%%% date = "2005/06/22",
-%%% time = "16:23:00 GMT",
-%%% checksum = "5964",
-%%% author = "Arthur Ogawa (mailto:ogawa@teleport.com)",
-%%% revised by = "SR Nova Private Ltd."
-%%% copyright = "Copyright (C) 2003 American Astronomical Society
-%%%
-%%% This work may be distributed and/or modified under the
-%%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-%%% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-%%% The latest version of this license is in
-%%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-%%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-%%% version 2003/12/01 or later.
-%%%
-%%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
-%%%
-%%% The Current Maintainer of this work is the American Astronomical Society.
-%%%
-%%% This work consists of all files listed in the document README.
-%%%
-%%% address = "American Astronomical Society
-%%% USA",
-%%% telephone = "+1 ???",
-%%% FAX = "",
-%%% email = "aastex-help@aas.org",
-%%% codetable = "ISO/ASCII",
-%%% keywords = "latex, AAS, journal",
-%%% supported = "yes",
-%%% abstract = "formatter for AAS journal submissions",
-%%% docstring = "The checksum field above generated by ltxdoc",
-%%% }
-% \fi
-%
-% \iffalse ltxdoc klootch
-% The following references the \file{Read.Me} file,
-% which contains basic information about this document class.
-% The contents of this file are generated when
-% you typeset the programmer's documentation.
-% Search on "{filecontents*}{Read.Me}" to locate it.
-% \fi\input{Read.Me}%
-%
-% \subsection{Bill of Materials}
-%
-% Following is a list of the files in this distribution arranged
-% according to provenance.
-%
-% \subsubsection{Primary Source}%
-% One single file generates all macro files and documentation.
-% \begin{verbatim}
-%aasclass.dtx
-% \end{verbatim}
-%
-% \subsubsection{Generated by \texttt{latex aasclass.dtx}}%
-% Typesetting the source file under \LaTeX\
-% generates the readme, the installer, and a configuration file for
-% this run.
-% \begin{verbatim}
-%Read.Me aasclass.ins ltxdoc.cfg
-% \end{verbatim}
-%
-% \subsubsection{Generated by \texttt{tex aasclass.ins}}%
-% Typesetting the installer generates
-% the class file, style file, user guide, and sample documents,
-% \begin{verbatim}
-%aastex.cls aastex.sty aasclass.tex aasguide.tex
-%sample.tex table.tex
-%
-% \end{verbatim}
-%
-% \subsubsection{Documentation}%
-% The following are the online documentation:
-% \begin{verbatim}
-%aasclass.dvi aasguide.dvi
-%sample.dvi table.dvi
-% \end{verbatim}
-%
-% \subsubsection{Auxiliary}%
-% The following are auxiliary files generated
-% in the course of running \LaTeX:
-% \begin{verbatim}
-%aasclass.aux aasclass.toc
-%aasclass.idx aasclass.ilg aasclass.ind
-%aasguide.aux aasguide.toc
-%aasguide.idx aasguide.ilg aasguide.ind
-% \end{verbatim}
-%
-% \subsubsection{Font files}%
-% In support of the |astro| font, certain files are provided.
-%
-% For those running Metafont, the primary source for the |astro| font is
-% at |CTAN://tex-archive/fonts/astro| and consists of:
-% \begin{verbatim}
-%astrosym.doc
-%astrosym.mf
-%astrosym.uni
-%astrosym.mac
-%astrosym.com
-%astrosym.tex
-% \end{verbatim}
-% with the first-mentioned file representing the documentation.
-%
-% Metrics for the font are provided as:
-% \begin{verbatim}
-%astrosym.tfm
-%astrosym.pl
-% \end{verbatim}
-%
-% For those with PostScript-capable previewers and printers,
-% we provide the font in an ATM-compatible PostScript Type~1 format.
-%
-% For MacOS with ATM,
-% \begin{verbatim}
-%Astrosym.sit.bin
-% metrics
-% astrosym metrics % For Textures
-% font
-% Astro
-% Astrosym.bmap
-% \end{verbatim}
-%
-% For MacOS with ATM,
-% \begin{verbatim}
-%ASTROSYM.72
-%ASTROSYM.FON
-%ASTROSYM.INF
-%ASTROSYM.PFB
-%ASTROSYM.PFM
-% \end{verbatim}
-%
-% For UNIX,
-% \begin{verbatim}
-%72.Astrosym
-%Astrosym.afm
-%Astrosym.pfa
-% \end{verbatim}
-%
-%
-% \section{The {\sc docstrip} modules}
-%
-% \subsection{Code common to all modules}%
-% The following may look a bit klootchy, but we
-% want to require only one place in this file
-% where the version number is stated,
-% and we also want to ensure that the version
-% number is embedded into every generated file.
-%
-% Here is some code for the document style,
-% which can be run under both \LaTeX2.09 or
-% \LaTeXe.
-% If the latter, we terminate reading of the
-% style file and
-% simply load the document class instead.
-% If the former, we provide dummy
-% definitions for the \LaTeXe\ commands
-% appearing in the style file.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<style>\ifx\ProvidesFile\undefined
-%<style> \def\next{}%
-%<style>\else
-%<style> \def\next{%
-%<style> \endinput
-%<style> \@obsoletefile{aastex.cls}{aastex.sty}\LoadClass{aastex}%
-%<style> }%
-%<style>\fi\next
-%<style>\def\ProvidesFile#1[#2]{\message{File: #1 #2}}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% To start with, we declare that
-% this file can only be used with \LaTeXe.
-% An appropriate message is displayed if
-% a different \TeX{} format is used.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*doc|class|guide|sample|table>
-\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}[1995/12/01]%
-%</doc|class|guide|sample|table>
-% \end{macrocode}
-% As desired, the following modules all
-% take common version information:
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<class>\ProvidesClass{aastex}%
-%<style>\ProvidesFile{aastex.sty}%
-%<guide>\ProvidesFile{aasguide.tex}%
-%<symbols>\ProvidesFile{aassymbols.tex}%
-%<sample>\ProvidesFile{sample.tex}%
-%<table>\ProvidesFile{table1.tex}%
-%<*doc>
-\expandafter\ProvidesFile\expandafter{\jobname.dtx}%
-%</doc>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \subsection{Version and Date}%
-%
-% The following line contains, for once and for all,
-% the version and date information.
-% By various means, this information is reproduced
-% consistently in all generated files and in the
-% typeset documentation.
-% \begin{macrocode}
- [2005/06/22 5.2/AAS markup document class]%
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \subsection{The driver module \texttt{doc}}
-%
-% Because the only uncommented-out lines of code at the beginning of
-% this file constitute the \file{doc} module itself,
-% we can simply typeset the |.dtx| file directly,
-% and there is thus rarely any need to
-% generate the ``doc'' {\sc docstrip} module.
-% Module delimiters are nonetheless required so that
-% this code does not find its way into the other modules.
-%
-% The |\end{document}| command concludes the typesetting run.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*doc>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \subsection{The ltxdoc configuration file}
-%
-% This {\sc docstrip} module generates a local file \file{ltxdoc.cfg},
-% which contains customizing commands for
-% when the programmer documentation \file{aasclass.dtx} is typeset.
-%
-% In particular, we request the production of an index of macros.
-%
-% For more information on such proccessing options,
-% see the standard \LaTeX\ file \file{ltxdoc.dtx}.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\begin{filecontents}{ltxdoc.cfg}
-% ltxdoc.cfg - local copy for aasclass directory
-\AtBeginDocument{\CodelineIndex\EnableCrossrefs}
-\AtEndDocument{\PrintIndex}
-\end{filecontents}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \subsection{The Document Class Statement}
-% The programmers documentation is formatted
-% with the |ltxdoc| class.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\documentclass[draft]{ltxdoc}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \subsubsection{Indexing directives}
-% We don't want everything to appear in the index
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\DoNotIndex{\',\.,\@M,\@@input,\@Alph,\@alph,\@addtoreset,\@arabic}
-\DoNotIndex{\@badmath,\@centercr,\@cite}
-\DoNotIndex{\@dotsep,\@empty,\@float,\@gobble,\@gobbletwo,\@ignoretrue}
-\DoNotIndex{\@input,\@ixpt,\@m,\@minus,\@mkboth}
-\DoNotIndex{\@ne,\@nil,\@nomath,\@plus,\roman,\@set@topoint}
-\DoNotIndex{\@tempboxa,\@tempcnta,\@tempdima,\@tempdimb}
-\DoNotIndex{\@tempswafalse,\@tempswatrue,\@viipt,\@viiipt,\@vipt}
-\DoNotIndex{\@vpt,\@warning,\@xiipt,\@xipt,\@xivpt,\@xpt,\@xviipt}
-\DoNotIndex{\@xxpt,\@xxvpt,\\,\ ,\addpenalty,\addtolength,\addvspace}
-\DoNotIndex{\advance,\ast,\begin,\begingroup,\bfseries,\bgroup,\box}
-\DoNotIndex{\bullet}
-\DoNotIndex{\cdot,\cite,\CodelineIndex,\cr,\day,\DeclareOption}
-\DoNotIndex{\def,\DisableCrossrefs,\divide,\DocInput,\documentclass}
-\DoNotIndex{\DoNotIndex,\egroup,\ifdim,\else,\fi,\em,\endtrivlist}
-\DoNotIndex{\EnableCrossrefs,\end,\end@dblfloat,\end@float,\endgroup}
-\DoNotIndex{\endlist,\everycr,\everypar,\ExecuteOptions,\expandafter}
-\DoNotIndex{\fbox}
-\DoNotIndex{\filedate,\filename,\fileversion,\fontsize,\framebox,\gdef}
-\DoNotIndex{\global,\halign,\hangindent,\hbox,\hfil,\hfill,\hrule}
-\DoNotIndex{\hsize,\hskip,\hspace,\hss,\if@tempswa,\ifcase,\or,\fi,\fi}
-\DoNotIndex{\ifhmode,\ifvmode,\ifnum,\iftrue,\ifx,\fi,\fi,\fi,\fi,\fi}
-\DoNotIndex{\input}
-\DoNotIndex{\jobname,\kern,\leavevmode,\let,\leftmark}
-\DoNotIndex{\list,\llap,\long,\m@ne,\m@th,\mark,\markboth,\markright}
-\DoNotIndex{\month,\newcommand,\newcounter,\newenvironment}
-\DoNotIndex{\NeedsTeXFormat,\newdimen}
-\DoNotIndex{\newlength,\newpage,\nobreak,\noindent,\null,\number}
-\DoNotIndex{\numberline,\OldMakeindex,\OnlyDescription,\p@}
-\DoNotIndex{\pagestyle,\par,\paragraph,\paragraphmark,\parfillskip}
-\DoNotIndex{\penalty,\PrintChanges,\PrintIndex,\ProcessOptions}
-\DoNotIndex{\protect,\ProvidesClass,\raggedbottom,\raggedright}
-\DoNotIndex{\refstepcounter,\relax,\renewcommand}
-\DoNotIndex{\rightmargin,\rightmark,\rightskip,\rlap,\rmfamily}
-\DoNotIndex{\secdef,\selectfont,\setbox,\setcounter,\setlength}
-\DoNotIndex{\settowidth,\sfcode,\skip,\sloppy,\slshape,\space}
-\DoNotIndex{\symbol,\the,\trivlist,\typeout,\tw@,\undefined,\uppercase}
-\DoNotIndex{\usecounter,\usefont,\usepackage,\vfil,\vfill,\viiipt}
-\DoNotIndex{\viipt,\vipt,\vskip,\vspace}
-\DoNotIndex{\wd,\xiipt,\year,\z@}
-\DoNotIndex{\next}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% We \emph{do} want an index, using linenumbers
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\EnableCrossrefs
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \subsubsection{Docstrip and info directives}
-% We use so many {\sc docstrip} modules that we set the
-% \texttt{StandardModuleDepth} counter to 1.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\setcounter{StandardModuleDepth}{1}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% The following command retrieves the date and version information
-% from this file.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\expandafter\GetFileInfo\expandafter{\jobname.dtx}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% Direct \file{ltxdoc} to produce an index and cross references.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\CodelineIndex\EnableCrossrefs
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \subsubsection{Macros}
-% Some commonly used abbreviations
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand*{\Lopt}[1]{\textsf {#1}}%
-%\newcommand*{\file}[1]{\texttt {#1}}%
-\newcommand*{\Lcount}[1]{\textsl {\small#1}}%
-\newcommand*{\pstyle}[1]{\textsl {#1}}%
-\newcommand\aastex{AAS\TeX}%
-\setlength\arraycolsep{0pt}%
-\let\oarg\undefined
-% \end{macrocode}
-% Modify |theindex| environment so that it produces a TOC entry
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\makeatletter
-\renewenvironment{theindex}
- {\if@twocolumn
- \@restonecolfalse
- \else
- \@restonecoltrue
- \fi
- \columnseprule \z@
- \columnsep 35\p@
- \twocolumn[\section{\indexname}]%
-% \@mkboth{\MakeUppercase\indexname}%
-% {\MakeUppercase\indexname}%
- \thispagestyle{plain}\parindent\z@
- \parskip\z@ \@plus .3\p@\relax
- \let\item\@idxitem}
- {\if@restonecol\onecolumn\else\clearpage\fi}
-\makeatother
-% \end{macrocode}
-% Look out! We are about to reach deep.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\makeatletter
-% \end{macrocode}
-% We paste in a bit of very useful code extracted from
-% \file{ltxguide.cls}, by Alan Jeffrey.
-% \begin{macrocode}
- % This code stolen from ltxguide.cls:
-% Some hacks with verbatim... NB: this would be better done with the
-% verbatim package, but this document has to run on any LaTeX
-% installation.
-
-\let\o@verbatim\verbatim
-\def\verbatim{%
- \ifhmode\unskip\par\fi
-% \nopagebreak % Overridden by list penalty
- \ifx\@currsize\normalsize
- \small
- \fi
- \o@verbatim
-}
-
-% Here we extend the font-setting command to include making <> active
-% (ie adjusting the input encoding).
-\renewcommand \verbatim@font {%
- \normalfont \ttfamily
- \catcode`\<=\active
- \catcode`\>=\active
-}
-
-% Make |...| a synonym for \verb|...|.
-\RequirePackage{shortvrb}
-\MakeShortVerb{\|}
-
-
-% Make active <...> produce italics surrounded by angle brackets
-% (used in verbatim and \verb).
-% << produces a less-than, and >> produces a greater-than.
-
-\begingroup
- \catcode`\<=\active
- \catcode`\>=\active
- \gdef<{\@ifnextchar<\@lt\@meta}
- \gdef>{\@ifnextchar>\@gt\@gtr@err}
- \gdef\@meta#1>{\m{#1}}
- \gdef\@lt<{\char`\<}
- \gdef\@gt>{\char`\>}
-\endgroup
-\def\@gtr@err{%
- \ClassError{ltxguide}{%
- Isolated \protect>%
- }{%
- In this document class, \protect<...\protect>
- is used to indicate a parameter.\MessageBreak
- I've just found a \protect> on its own.
- Perhaps you meant to type \protect>\protect>?
- }%
-}
-\def\verbatim@nolig@list{\do\`\do\,\do\'\do\-}
-
-% Various forms of argument:
-
-\newcommand{\m}[1]{\mbox{$\langle$\it #1\/$\rangle$}}
-\renewcommand{\arg}[1]{{\tt\string{}\m{#1}{\tt\string}}}
-\newcommand{\oarg}[1]{{\tt[%]
-}\m{#1}{\tt%[
-]}}
-\def\cmd#1{\cs{\expandafter\cmd@to@cs\string#1}}
-\def\cmd@to@cs#1#2{\char\number`#2\relax}
-\DeclareRobustCommand\cs[1]{\texttt{\char`\\#1}}
-\newcommand*{\file}[1]{\texttt{#1}}%
- % end of code stolen from ltxguide.cls. Thanks, Alan.
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% Define sectioning command below |\subsubsection|
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand\subsubsubsection{%
- \@startsection{subsubsection}{4}%
- {\z@}{-15\p@\@plus-5\p@\@minus-2\p@}%
- {5\p@}{\normalfont\normalsize\itshape}%
-}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% Coax the version number into |filecontents|-generated files.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\endfilecontents{%
- \immediate\write\reserved@c{%
- \string\iffalse\space ltxdoc klootch^^J%
- This file has version number \fileversion, last revised \filedate.%
- \string\fi
- }%
- \immediate\closeout\reserved@c
- \def\T##1##2##3{%
- \ifx##1\@undefined\else
- \@latex@warning@no@line{##2 has been converted to Blank ##3e}%
- \fi
- }%
- \T\L{Form Feed}{Lin}%
- \T\I{Tab}{Spac}%
- \immediate\write\@unused{}%
-}%
-\expandafter\let\csname endfilecontents*\endcsname\endfilecontents
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% OK, an end to the hacking!
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\makeatother
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \subsubsection{The installer file}
-%
-% The installer \file{aasclass.ins} appears here.
-% If you have retrieved the standard distribution of this class,
-% the installer file is already on your filesystem.
-% If you are bootstrapping,
-% the first typesetting of the \file{.dtx} file
-% will cause the installer to be generated.
-%
-% The following modules are used to direct
-% {\sc docstrip} in generating the external files:
-% \begin{center}
-% \begin{tabular}{lll}
-% \textbf{Module}&\textbf{File}&\textbf{Description}\\
-% class &\file{aastex.cls} &document class\\
-% style &\file{aastex.sty} &document style\\
-% doc &\file{aasclass.tex}&driver for programmer's documantation\\
-% guide &\file{aasguide.tex}&user guide\\
-% symbols &\file{aassymbols.tex}&AAS and AMS symbols crib sheet\\
-% sample &\file{sample.tex} &sample\\
-% table &\file{table.tex}&complex table\\
-% \end{tabular}
-% \end{center}
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\begin{filecontents}{aasclass.ins}
-%% This file will generate documentation and runtime files
-%% from aasclass.dtx when run through LaTeX or TeX.
-\input docstrip
-\preamble
-
-This is a generated file;
-altering it directly is inadvisable;
-instead, modify the original source file.
-%See the URL in the file Read.Me.
-
-Copyright notice.
-
- These files are distributed
- WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
- MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
-
-\endpreamble
-\keepsilent
-\generate{%
- \file{aastex.cls}{\from{aasclass.dtx}{class}}%
- \file{aastex.sty}{\from{aasclass.dtx}{style}}%
- \file{aasclass.tex}{\from{aasclass.dtx}{doc}}%
- \file{aasguide.tex}{\from{aasclass.dtx}{guide}}%
- \file{aassymbols.tex}{\from{aasclass.dtx}{symbols}}%
- \file{sample.tex}{\from{aasclass.dtx}{sample}}%
- \file{table.tex}{\from{aasclass.dtx}{table}}%
-}%
-\ifToplevel{
-\Msg{***********************************************************}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{* To finish the installation, please move the following}
-\Msg{* files into a directory searched by TeX:}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{* \space\space aastex.cls}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{* To produce the user documentation,
- run aasguide.tex through LaTeX.}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{* To produce the AAS and AMS symbols crib sheet,
- run aassymbols.tex through LaTeX.}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{* To typeset the aastex sample document,
- run sample.tex and table.tex
- through LaTeX.}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{* To produce the programmer documentation,
- run aasclass.dtx through LaTeX.}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{* Happy TeXing}
-\Msg{***********************************************************}
-}
-\endbatchfile
-\end{filecontents}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% Note that, because all of the files generated by the installer
-% are part of the standard distribution, it will
-% be necessary to run the installer only when bootstrapping
-% (or, of course, during development).
-% Note, too, that it is rare to generate the |doc|
-% module because it suffices to simply typeset the |.dtx| file itself.
-%
-% \subsubsection{The \file{Read.Me} File}
-% As promised above, here is the contents of the
-% readme file. That file serves a double purpose,
-% since it also constitutes the beginining of the
-% programmer's documentation. What better thing, after
-% all, to have appear at the beginning of the
-% typeset documentation?
-%
-% A good discussion of how to write a ReadMe file can be found in
-% Engst, Tonya, ``Writing a ReadMe File? Read This''
-% \emph{MacTech} October 1998, p. 58.
-%
-% Note the appearance of the
-% |\StopEventually| command, which marks the
-% dividing line between the user documentation
-% and the programmer documentation.
-% The former simply summarize the installation
-% instructions and refers the reader to
-% the user guide \file{awljavgd}.
-%
-% The usual user will not be asked to
-% do a full build, not to speak
-% of the bootstrap.
-% Instructions for carrying these processes
-% begin the programmer's manual.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\begin{filecontents*}{Read.Me}
-\title{%
- The \aastex\ Document Class For \LaTeXe\\
- Programmer's Manual%
- \thanks{%
- This file has version number \fileversion, last revised \filedate.%
- % For version number and date, search on "\fileversion" in the .dtx file,
- % or see the end of the Read.Me file.
- }%
-}%
-
-\author{%
-Chris Biemesderfer (\texttt{mailto:chris@seagoat.com}), v4\\
-Arthur Ogawa (\texttt{mailto:ogawa@teleport.com}), v\fileversion\\
-Copyright (C) 1998 AAS
-}%
-\maketitle
-
-\aastex\ provides a markup system and formatter for authoring
-papers to be submitted electronically to a number of
-astonomy journals.
-This file embodies the document class,
-the implementation, and the user documentation.
-
-The distribution point for \aastex\ is
-\file{ftp://ftp.aas.org/pubs/aastex50.zip}, which contains
-fully unpacked, prebuilt runtime files and documentation.
-
-To use this document class, you must have a working
-\TeX\ installation equipped with \LaTeXe.
-Certain features of \aastex\ (such as landscape tables)
-require a PostScript printer.
-
-To install, retrieve the distribution,
-unpack it into a directory on the target computer,
-and move the file \file{aastex.cls}
-into a location in your filesystem where it will be found by \LaTeX.
-
-If you will be using the |astro| font in your \aastex\ documents,
-put the file \file{Astrosym.tfm} where \TeX\ can find it
-(Textures users will put \file{Astrosym metrics} into their \file{TeX fonts} folder).
-Now either install the (ATM-compatible) PostScript Type~1 fonts
-appropriate to your operating system and \TeX\ implementation,
-or install the MetaFont source (both provided with \aastex).
-In any case, you are responsible for properly installing the
-|astro| font on your system.
-
-Then print out the user guide \file{aasguide.dvi} and
-the two sample documents, \file{sample.dvi} and \file{table.dvi}.
-If need be, print the programmer's manual \file{aasclass.dvi}.
-
-\StopEventually{}\tableofcontents
-
-\section{Processing Instructions}
-
-The document class \file{aastex.cls} (plus other macro files),
-the user documentation \file{aasguide.tex},
-and the sample documents
-are generated from this file, \file{aasclass.dtx},
-via the {\sc docstrip} facility of \LaTeX.
-The documentation that you are now reading is generated from
-the same file by simply typesetting it with \LaTeX.
-
-\subsection{Build Instructions for V5.0}
-
-You may bootstrap \aastex\ solely from \file{aasclass.dtx}.
-Prepare by installing \LaTeXe\ on your computer,
-then carry out the following steps:
-\begin{enumerate}
-
-\item
-Within an otherwise empty directory,
-typeset \file{aasclass.dtx} with \LaTeX;
-you will obtain the typeset documentation you are now reading,
-along with the installer \file{aasclass.ins} and the file \file{Read.Me}.
-
-Note that you will have to run MakeIndex (using the \LaTeX\ standard
-\file{gind.ist}) and retypeset with \LaTeX\ as appropriate.
-
-\item
-Now typeset \file{aasclass.ins}, thereby generating
-macro files \file{aastex.cls}, and \file{aastex.sty}, user documentation \file{aasguide.tex}, \file{aassymbols.tex},
-the sample file \file{sample.tex} and the sample table
-\file{table.tex}.
-
-\item
-Install \file{aastex.cls} and \file{aastex.sty}:
-move them to a location
-in your file system where they will be found by \LaTeX.
-
-\item
-Typeset \file{aasguide.tex} to obtain the user documentation
-(you will have to run MakeIndex and retypeset as needed),
-
-\item
-Typeset the sample file \file{sample.tex}.
-\end{enumerate}
-
-For your reference,
-there are six \TeX\ log files appended to this file
-(locate them by searching on |preloaded format=|).
-They result respectively from typesetting
-\file{aasclass.dtx}, \file{aasclass.ins}, \file{aasguide.tex},
-\file{aassymbols.tex},
-\file{sample.tex}, \file{table.tex}.
-
-\subsection{Build Instructions for V4.1}
-
-When you bootstrap V5.0, you automatically create the files rquired for the
-V4.1 distribution, which consists of a number of the documents for V4.0
-along with style files to patch it, plus revised sample documents.
-The user guide for V5.0 is also the guide for 4.1; relevant differences
-appear in an appendix.
-
-The files for version~4.1 are located in a separate part of the distribution tree,
-a directory called \file{./V4.1/}.
-
-To build, simply copy the file
-\file{aastex.sty} into the 4.1 directory.
-Then copy
-the sample files \file{sample.tex}, \file{sample2.tex}, and \file{samptbls.tex},
-and the sample tables
-\file{table1.tex}, \file{table2.tex}, \file{table3.tex}, and \file{complext.tex}
-into the same directory.
-Finally, copy
-\file{aasguide.dvi} and \file{aasguide.ps} into the same directory.
-
-\end{filecontents*}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \subsubsection{The Body of the Programmers Documentation}
-% Here is the document body, containing only a
-% |\DocInput| directive---referring to this very file.
-% This very cute self-reference is a common |ltxdoc| idiom.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\begin{document}%
-\expandafter\DocInput\expandafter{\jobname.dtx}%
-\setcounter{secnumdepth}{0}%
-\PrintIndex
-% ^^A\PrintChanges
-\end{document}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% End of the |doc| module:
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%</doc>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-%
-%
-% \section{Common to Document Style and Class}%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*class|style>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\substitute@option}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\substitute@option#1#2{%
- \ClassWarning{aastex}{%
- Substyle #1 is deprecated in aastex.
- Using #2 instead (please fix your document).
- }\@nameuse{ds@#2}%
-}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%</class|style>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \section{Document Style Module}%
-%
-% The document style is provided for compatibility sake.
-% If the user's document has
-% \begin{verbatim}
-%\documentstyle[<options>]{aastex}%
-% \end{verbatim}
-% and it is run under \LaTeXe, then this style file will be called,
-% but the document class will be loaded instead.
-% A warning message is given admonishing the user to switch to
-% using |\documentclass|.
-%
-% If the same document is run under \LaTeX 2.09, \aastex\ will run
-% version 4.1 (which is an updated version~4.0).
-%
-% Here begins the style file:
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*style>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \subsection{Document Style Options}%
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\ClassWarning}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\ClassWarning#1#2{\@warning{Style #1: #2}}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{ds@manuscript}
-% \begin{macro}{ds@preprint}
-% \begin{macro}{ds@preprint2}
-% The substyle options are defined here.
-% As in the document class, exactly one substyle will be in effect;
-% the default being the |manuscript| substyle.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\ds@manuscript{\def\aastex@substyle{aasms4}}%
-\def\aastex@substyle{aasms4}%
-\def\ds@preprint{\def\aastex@substyle{aaspp4}}%
-\@namedef{ds@preprint2}{\def\aastex@substyle{aas2pp4}}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-%
-% \begin{macro}{ds@aasms4}
-% \begin{macro}{ds@aaspp4}
-% \begin{macro}{ds@aas2pp4}
-% \begin{macro}{ds@ajpt4}
-% \begin{macro}{ds@apjpt4}
-% For backward compatibility, we declare options corresponding to V4.0
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\@namedef{ds@aasms4}{\substitute@option{aasms4}{manuscript}}%
-\@namedef{ds@aaspp4}{\substitute@option{aaspp4}{preprint}}%
-\@namedef{ds@aas2pp4}{\substitute@option{aas2pp4}{preprint2}}%
-\@namedef{ds@aj_pt4}{\substitute@option{aj_pt4}{preprint}}%
-\@namedef{ds@apjpt4}{\substitute@option{apjpt4}{preprint}}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-%
-% \begin{macro}{ds@eqsecnum}
-% \begin{macro}{ds@tighten}
-% \begin{macro}{ds@flushrt}
-% The remaining document style options are defined here.
-% They have the same significance as those of the
-% document class.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\ds@eqsecnum{\AtEndOfClass{\eqsecnum}}%
-\def\ds@tighten{\AtEndOfClass{\tightenlines}}%
-\def\ds@flushrt{%
- \AtEndOfClass{%
- \@rightskip=\z@\rightskip\@rightskip % Flush right
- \pretolerance=100\relax % Enable hyphenation
- }%
-}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \subsection{\LaTeXe\ Equipment Needed}%
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\@testopt}
-% The following is snitched from \LaTeX2e.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\@testopt#1#2{%
- \@ifnextchar[{#1}{#1[#2]}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% The remaining definitions merely provide for
-% a bare emulation of \LaTeXe.
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\AtEndOfClass}
-% \begin{macro}{\AtBeginDocument}
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\appdef#1#2{%
- \toks@\expandafter{#1}\toks\@ne{#2}\edef#1{\the\toks@\the\toks\@ne}%
-}%
-\def\AtEndOfClass{\appdef\@styleh@@k}%
-\def\@styleh@@k{}%
-\def\AtBeginDocument{\appdef\@begindocumenthook}%
-\def\@begindocumenthook{}%
-\appdef\document{\@begindocumenthook}%
-\def\@latex@warning{\@warning}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% Some low-level macros.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\protected@edef{\edef}%
-\def\@finalstrut#1{\strut}%
-\let\color@begingroup\begingroup
-\let\color@endgroup\endgroup
-\def\G@refundefinedtrue{}%
-\long\def\@firstofone#1{#1}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% Font-oriented macros.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\rmfamily{\rm}%
-\def\itshape{\it}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \subsection{Base Document Style and Packages}%
-%
-% Read in the base document style, the \LaTeX\ standard
-% article style.
-% It will execute the document style options.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\@@input article.sty\relax
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% Add in the |natbib| package for \LaTeX2.09
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\@@input natbib209.sty\relax
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% Most of the remainder of the document style
-% is drawn from the code going into \file{aastex.cls}.
-%
-% We first read in the kernel modifications,
-% then read in the selected V4.0 substyle,
-% insert our V4.1 overrides,
-% then act on the document style options.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%</style>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-%
-% \section{Document Class Module}
-% The document class module comprises this and the next
-% five sections.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*class>
-\ClassInfo{aastex}{%
- Original \protect\LaTeX2.09 style
- by Chris Biemesderfer (chris@seagoat.com).
- Adapted to \protect\LaTeXe\space
- by A. Ogawa (ogawa@teleport.com)%
-}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \subsection{Type Size}
-% \begin{macro}{\aas@ptsize}
-% The macro |\aas@ptsize| works very much like
-% the |\@ptsize| macro of \file{classes.dtx},
-% but in this class.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\newif\iflong@abstract
-\global\long@abstractfalse
-\DeclareOption{10pt}{\newcommand\aas@ptsize{0}}%
-\DeclareOption{11pt}{\newcommand\aas@ptsize{1}}%
-\DeclareOption{12pt}{\newcommand\aas@ptsize{2}}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \subsection{Landscape Orientation}
-% The option \Lopt{landscape} is disabled in this document class.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\DeclareOption{landscape}{\OptionNotUsed}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \subsection{Equations Numbered by Section}
-%
-% The option \Lopt{eqsecnum} invokes |\eqsecnum|, q.v.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\DeclareOption{eqsecnum}{\AtEndOfClass{\eqsecnum}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \subsection{Longabstract}
-% The option \Lopt{longabstract} cause the long abstract text to break into
-% next page within preprint2. Using this option has no effect with other styles.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\DeclareOption{longabstract}{\global\long@abstracttrue}
-% use when abstract exceed title page
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \subsection{Set Text Justified Rather Than Ragged Right}
-%
-% The option \Lopt{flushrt} causes the text to set
-% justified, hyphenated rather than ragged right, nohyphens
-% as is normal in the |manuscript| substyle.
-%
-% Asserting this option presently has no effect in
-% the other substyles because they make no changes
-% to the justification. If this situation changes,
-% be careful to supply the appropriate hook as needed.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\DeclareOption{flushrt}{\let\opt@just\just@just}%
-\let\opt@just\@empty
-\def\just@just{%
- \@rightskip\z@skip
- \rightskip\@rightskip
- \pretolerance=100\relax
-}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \subsection{Use Tight Leading Rather Than Doublespace}
-%
-% The option \Lopt{tighten} causes the text to set
-% with tight leading rather than double spacing
-% as is normal in the |manuscript| substyle.
-%
-% Asserting this option presently has no effect in
-% the other substyles because they make no changes
-% to the justification. If this situation changes,
-% be careful to supply the appropriate hook as needed.
-%
-% Not! In the manuscript substyle, leading is doubled and
-% the |\tightenlines| command is effectively disabled.
-% So, what gives?
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\DeclareOption{tighten}{\def\opt@tighten{\tightenlines}}%
-\let\opt@tighten\@empty
-% \end{macrocode}
-
-% \subsection{Summary}%
-% The following are local options to this document class.
-%
-% \begin{center}
-% \begin{tabular}{ll}
-% |eqsecnum|&equations numbered by section\\
-% |flushrt|&set text justified\\
-% |tighten|&use tight leading\\
-% \end{tabular}
-% \end{center}
-%
-% \subsection{Substyle Options}%
-% An \aastex\ document must have exactly one class option selected from
-% the following list; the default is |manuscript|.
-% This option determines the substyle, signifying the
-% basic formatting choice for the document.
-% \begin{center}
-% \begin{tabular}{ll}
-% \bfseries Class Option&\bfseries Purpose\\
-% |manuscript|&Manuscript (the default)\\
-% |preprint|&Preprint\\
-% |preprint2|&Preprint in two columns
-% \end{tabular}
-% \end{center}
-% Note that in the case of |preprint2|, we immediately signal
-% the base document class that the two-column grid will be used.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\DeclareOption{manuscript}{\def\aas@substyle{manuscript}\long@abstractfalse}
-\DeclareOption{preprint}{\def\aas@substyle{preprint}\long@abstractfalse}
-\DeclareOption{preprint2}{\def\aas@substyle{preprint2}\@twocolumntrue}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% For backward compatibility, we declare options corresponding to V4.0
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\DeclareOption{aasms4}{\substitute@option{aasms4}{manuscript}}%
-\DeclareOption{aaspp4}{\substitute@option{aaspp4}{preprint}}%
-\DeclareOption{aas2pp4}{\substitute@option{aas2pp4}{preprint2}}%
-\DeclareOption{aj_pt4}{\substitute@option{aj_pt4}{preprint}}%
-\DeclareOption{apjpt4}{\substitute@option{apjpt4}{preprint}}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\aas@substyle}
-% At the end of package processing, we invoke the selected
-% substyle.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\aas@substyle{manuscript}%
-\AtEndOfPackage{%
- \@nameuse{aas@\aas@substyle}%
-}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \subsection{Font Complement}
-% \begin{macro}{astro}
-% Invoking the |astro| class option causes the
-% astro font to be loaded at the appropriate size.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\DeclareOption{astro}{\AtBeginDocument{\load@astro}}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \subsection{Default Option}%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\DeclareOption*{\PassOptionsToClass{\CurrentOption}{article}}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \subsection{Executing Options}
-%
-% Here we execute the default options to initialize certain
-% variables.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\ExecuteOptions{letterpaper,oneside,onecolumn,final}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% The |\ProcessOptions| command causes the execution of the code
-% for every option \Lopt{FOO}
-% which is declared and for which the user typed
-% the \Lopt{FOO} option in his
-% |\documentclass| command. For every option \Lopt{BAR} he typed,
-% which is not declared, the option is assumed to be a global option.
-% All options will be passed as document options to any
-% |\usepackage| command in the document preamble.
-%
-% Note that |\ProcessOptions| is followed by |\relax| in order to
-% signal conclusively that the *-form has not been used.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\ProcessOptions\relax
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{aas@size@manuscript}
-% \begin{macro}{aas@size@preprint}
-% \begin{macro}{aas@size@preprint2}
-% Now that local options have been processed, we know what substyle to use.
-% We execute a procedure to pass the proper type size option to
-% the base class.
-% Note that the macro |\aas@ptsize| acquires a value as a side effect of this
-% processing.
-%
-% As should be evident, the manuscript substyle mandates 12point, the default
-% size for preprint is 11 point, and that for two-column preprint is 10 point.
-%
-% Implementation note: here we must use \LaTeXe's cumbersome methods because we
-% have not yet defined the Boolean control macros.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\@namedef{aas@size@manuscript}{%
- \def\aas@ptsize{2}%
- \pass@aassize
-}%
-\@namedef{aas@size@preprint}{%
- \ifx\undefined\aas@ptsize\expandafter\@firstoftwo\else\expandafter\@secondoftwo\fi
- {\def\aas@ptsize{1}}{}%
- \pass@aassize
-}%
-\@namedef{aas@size@preprint2}{%
- \ifx\undefined\aas@ptsize\expandafter\@firstoftwo\else\expandafter\@secondoftwo\fi
- {\def\aas@ptsize{0}}{}%
- \pass@aassize
-}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\pass@aassize}
-% The procedure |\pass@aassize| is the bottleproc for passing the size option
-% down to the base class, which is taken to be the |article| class.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\pass@aassize{%
- \expandafter\PassOptionsToClass\expandafter{\expandafter1\aas@ptsize pt}{article}%
-}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% Now exercise the selected substyle option.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\@nameuse{aas@size@\aas@substyle}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-%
-%
-% \section{Loading the Base Document Class and Packages}
-%\aastex\ is a variant of the standard \LaTeX\ article class:
-% |CTAN://macros/latex/unpacked|.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\LoadClass{article}[1995/12/01]%
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% We always load the standard \LaTeX\ symbol package:
-% |CTAN://macros/latex/base|.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\RequirePackage{latexsym}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% We always load the standard \LaTeX\ extended graphics package:
-% |CTAN://macros/latex/packages/graphics|.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\RequirePackage{graphicx}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% The AMS |amssym| package provides access to symbols in the AMS fonts:
-% |CTAN://macros/latex/packages/amslatex|.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\RequirePackage{amssymb}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% The contributed \LaTeX\ |natbib| package:
-% |CTAN://macros/latex/contrib/supported/natbib|.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\RequirePackage{natbib}%
-\newcommand{\bibstyle@aas}{\bibpunct{(}{)}{;}{a}{}{,}}
-\@citestyle{aas}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% The standard \LaTeX\ verbatim package may not be really necessary, but
-% this code may serve as a model for loading other classes:
-% |CTAN://macros/latex/packages/tools|.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\RequirePackage{verbatim}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% Here ends the code for the document class.
-% The next section provides code that is common to
-% the document class and document style.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%</class>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-%
-% \section{Extensions to the \LaTeX\ Kernel}%
-% We extend and modify \LaTeX.
-% Most of these tools are to help make the job of the
-% class file writer easier; some correct errors introduced
-% in \LaTeXe.
-%
-% All of the kernel extensions are incorporated into
-% the document style.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*class|style>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \subsection{New Tools}%
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\@to}
-% \begin{macro}{\ulap}
-% \begin{macro}{\dlap}
-%
-% The macro |\@to| is simple shorthand for |to|;
-% the user commands |\ulap| and |\dlap| augment |\llap| and |\rlap|.
-% \begin{verbatim}
-% \ulap{<vertical mode material>} % Will protrude upward
-% \dlap{<vertical mode material>} % Will protrude downward
-% \end{verbatim}
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\@to{to}%
-\newcommand\ulap[1]{\vbox\@to\z@{{\vss#1}}}%
-\newcommand\dlap[1]{\vbox\@to\z@{{#1\vss}}}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\let@environment}
-% The directive |\let@environment| takes care of a common programming
-% idiom whereby one environment is made a synonym for another.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand\let@environment[2]{%
- \expandafter\let
- \csname#1\expandafter\endcsname\csname#2\endcsname
- \expandafter\let
- \csname end#1\expandafter\endcsname\csname end#2\endcsname
- }%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\say}
-% \begin{macro}{\sayythe}
-% The commands |\say| and |\saythe| cause diagnostic messages in the
-% \TeX\ log that give the value of a control sequence name or a register
-% respectively.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand\say[1]{\typeout{<\noexpand#1=\meaning#1>}}%
-\newcommand\saythe[1]{\typeout{<\noexpand#1=\the#1>}}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\tracingplain}
-% The command |\tracingplain| causes \TeX's tracing parameters to
-% return to the values set by default. This command is sometimes
-% useful when you have said |\tracingall| somewhere and want to
-% restore.
-% The |\traceoutput| command causes |\tracingoutput| diagnostics
-% upon |\shipout|.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand\tracingplain{%
- \tracingonline\z@\tracingcommands\z@\tracingstats\z@
- \tracingpages\z@\tracingoutput\z@\tracinglostchars\@ne
- \tracingmacros\z@\tracingparagraphs\z@\tracingrestores\z@
- \showboxbreadth5\showboxdepth3\relax %\errorstopmode
- }%
-\newcommand\traceoutput{%
- \appdef\@resetactivechars{\showoutput}%
-}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\nohyphenation}
-% \begin{macro}{\offhyphenation}
-% The command |\nohyphenation| immediately preceding a word will
-% prevent \TeX\ from hyphenating that word;
-% the |\offhyphenation| command causes \TeX\ to not hyphenate within its
-% scope.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand\nohyphenation{\kern\z@}%
-\newcommand\offhyphenation{%
- \lefthyphenmin\maxdimen\emergencystretch8\p@
-}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\substitute@command}
-% \begin{macro}{\remove@command}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\substitute@command#1#2{%
- \ClassWarning{aastex}{%
- Command \protect#1\space is deprecated in aastex.
- Using \protect#2\space instead (please fix your document).
- }%
- #2%
-}%
-\def\remove@command#1{%
- \ClassWarning{aastex}{%
- Command \protect#1\space is deprecated in aastex.
- Please remove it from your document%
- }%
-}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-%
-% \subsection{Boolean Control}%
-% \begin{macro}{\prepdef}
-% \begin{macro}{\appdef}
-%
-% Provide the capability of performing head- and tail patches.
-% The procedure |\prepdef| prepends to the given macro
-% the tokens specified in its second argument.
-% Likewise for |\appdef|, except that it appends.
-% Note that the first 10 toks registers are utility registers,
-% and we simply make a control sequence name, |\toks@ii|, for one of
-% them.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\@provide#1{%Implicit #2
- \@ifxundefined#1{\def#1}{\def\@tempa}%
-}%
-\def\prepdef#1#2{%
- \@ifxundefined#1{\toks@{}}{\toks@\expandafter{#1}}%
- \toks@ii{#2}%
- \edef#1{\the\toks@ii\the\toks@}%
-}%
-\def\appdef#1#2{%
- \@ifxundefined#1{\toks@{}}{\toks@\expandafter{#1}}%
- \toks@ii{#2}%
- \edef#1{\the\toks@\the\toks@ii}%
-}%
-\def\appgdef#1#2{%
- \@ifxundefined#1{\toks@{}}{\toks@\expandafter{#1}}%
- \toks@ii{#2}%
- \xdef#1{\the\toks@\the\toks@ii}%
-}%
-\toksdef\toks@ii=\tw@
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\@ifxundefined}
-% We introduce just enough of the Boolean calculus for \TeX.
-% Alan Jeffrey was the pioneer here, with an article in TUGboat
-% (Vol. 11, No. 2, page 237).
-% This implementation owes a debt to
-% William Baxter (web@superscript.com).
-% See articles by Baxter and Ogawa in the proceedings of the
-% 1994 TUG meeting.
-%
-% Other utility procedures used |\@ifxundefined|,
-% which is defined here in terms of |\@ifx|.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\long\def\@ifxundefined#1{\@ifx{\undefined#1}}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\@boolean}
-% \begin{macro}{\@boole@def}
-% In order to define |\@ifx|, we first must create the
-% ``defining word'' (term taken form our Forth vocabulary)
-% |\@boole@def|, which employs |\@boolean| to do its job.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\@boolean#1#2{%
- \long\def#1{%
- #2% \if<something>
- \expandafter\boolean@true
- \else
- \expandafter\boolean@false
- \fi
- }%
-}%
-\def\@boole@def#1#{\@boolean{#1}}% Implicit #2
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\@ifx}
-% \begin{macro}{\@ifx@empty}
-% We can now invoke the defining word to create
-% the procedure |\@ifx|.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\@boole@def\@ifx#1{\ifx#1}%
-\@boole@def\@ifx@empty#1{\ifx\@empty#1}%
-\@boole@def\@ifnum#1{\ifnum#1}%
-\@boole@def\@ifdim#1{\ifdim#1}%
-\@boole@def\@ifvoid#1{\ifvoid#1}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\boolean@true}
-% \begin{macro}{\boolean@false}
-%
-% Note that when a Boolean operator expands, it
-% employs two macros that act as selectors, defined here.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\long\def\boolean@true#1#2{#1}%
-\long\def\boolean@false#1#2{#2}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \subsection{Damage Control}%
-%
-% \subsubsection{Vertical Stuff}%
-% \begin{macro}{\addpenalty}
-% \begin{macro}{\addvspace}
-% Repair some \LaTeX\ damage.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\renewcommand\addpenalty[1]{%
- \ifvmode
- \if@minipage
- \else
- \if@nobreak
- \else
- \ifinner
- \@tempskipa\lastskip \unskip
- \@tempcnta\lastpenalty \unpenalty
- \ifnum#1<\@tempcnta
- \penalty#1\relax
- \else
- \penalty\@tempcnta
- \fi
- \vskip\@tempskipa
- \else
- \ifdim\lastskip=\z@
- \penalty#1\relax
- \else
- \@tempskipb\lastskip
- \vskip-\lastskip
- \penalty#1%
- \vskip\@tempskipb
- \fi
- \fi
- \fi
- \fi
- \else
- \@noitemerr
- \fi
-}%
-%
-\renewcommand\addvspace[1]{%
- \ifvmode
- \if@minipage
- \else
- \ifinner
- \@tempskipa\lastskip \unskip
- \ifdim\@tempskipa=\z@
- \vskip#1\relax
- \else
- \@tempskipb#1\relax
- \ifdim\@tempskipa<\@tempskipb
- \vskip\@tempskipb
- \else
- \ifdim\@tempskipb<\z@
- \ifdim\@tempskipa<\z@
- \vskip\@tempskipa
- \else
- \advance\@tempskipb\@tempskipa
- \vskip\@tempskipb
- \fi
- \else
- \vskip\@tempskipa
- \fi
- \fi
- \fi
- \else
- \ifdim\lastskip=\z@
- \vskip#1\relax
- \else
- \@tempskipb#1\relax
- \@xaddvskip
- \fi
- \fi
- \fi
- \else
- \@noitemerr
- \fi
-}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \subsubsection{Title Page Formatting}%
-% \begin{macro}{\maketitle@page}
-% The |\maketitle| (for a title page) of \file{classes.dtx}.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand\maketitle@page{%
- \maketitle@disarm
- \begin{titlepage}%
- \let\footnotesize\small
- \let\footnoterule\relax
- \let \footnote \thanks
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \@maketitle
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \@thanks
- \vfil\null
- \end{titlepage}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \after@maketitle
-}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \begin{macro}{\maketitle@runin}
-% The |\maketitle| (for a run-in title page) of \file{classes.dtx}
-% appears to be broken.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand\maketitle@runin{%
- \par
- \maketitle@disarm
- \begingroup
- %%%%\renewcommand\thefootnote{\@fnsymbol\c@footnote}%
- \def\@makefnmark{\rlap{\@textsuperscript{\normalfont\@thefnmark}}}%
- \long\def\@makefntext##1{%
- \parindent 1em\noindent
- \hb@xt@1.8em{%
- \hss\@textsuperscript{\normalfont\@thefnmark}%
- }%
- ##1%
- }%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% Here, we swap the two predicates:
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \if@twocolumn
- \@ifnum{\col@number=\@ne}{%
- \global\let\@title@footnote@text\@empty%
- \twocolumn[\let\@footnotetext\@title@footnotetext\@maketitle]%
- \@title@footnote@text%
- }{%
- \@maketitle
- }%
- \else
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \newpage
- \global\@topnum\z@ % Prevents figures from going at top of page.
- \@maketitle
- \fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
- %\thispagestyle{plain}%
- \@thanks
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \endgroup
- \after@maketitle
-}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \begin{macro}{\after@maketitle}
-% Common processing for title whether run-in or page. And switching from one-column
-% to two-column mode if \Lopt{longabstract} option is used.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\after@maketitle{%
- \iflong@abstract %
- \let\@makecol\@makecol@pptt
- \let\@outputdblcol\@outputdblcol@pptt
- \global\columnwidth\textwidth%
- \global\advance\columnwidth-\columnsep
- \global\divide\columnwidth\tw@
- \global\hsize\columnwidth
- \global\linewidth\columnwidth
- \global\@twocolumntrue
- \global\@firstcolumntrue
- \col@number \tw@
- \@ifnextchar [\@topnewpage\@floatplacement
- \begin{strip}% separate the abstract text from two-column text
- \end{strip}
- \fi
- %%%\setcounter{footnote}{0}%
- \global\let\thanks\@gobble
- \global\let\maketitle\relax
- \global\let\@maketitle\relax
- \global\let\@thanks\@empty
- \global\let\@author\@empty
- \global\let\@date\@empty
- \global\let\@title\@empty
- \global\let\title\relax
- \global\let\author\relax
- \global\let\date\relax
- \global\let\and\relax
- \global\let\email\@text@email
- \global\firsttabskip\z@
-}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% Defer until the end of the processing for the document class
-% the decision between the two formatting procedures.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\AtEndOfClass{%
- \if@titlepage
- \let\maketitle\maketitle@page
- \else
- \let\maketitle\maketitle@runin
- \fi
-}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-%
-% \subsubsection{Repairing Footnotes}%
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\@mpfootnotetext}
-% \begin{macro}{\@footnotetext}
-% Reparametrize so that |\footnotesize| (a user-level command)
-% is not invoked---use |\footnote@size| instead.
-% In general, user-level commands should not be invoked by
-% low-level formatting procedures.
-%
-% Also, factor out the shared code into a procedure called |\set@footnotetext|.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%
-\def\open@footnotetext{%
- \insert\footins\bgroup % \egroup in \close@footnotetext
- \interlinepenalty\interfootnotelinepenalty
- \splittopskip\footnotesep
- \splitmaxdepth\dp\strutbox
- \floatingpenalty \@MM
- \reset@font\footnote@size
- \hsize\columnwidth
- \@parboxrestore
-}%
-\def\close@footnotetext#1{%
- \color@begingroup
- \@makefntext{%
- \rule\z@\footnotesep\ignorespaces
- #1\@finalstrut\strutbox
- }%
- \color@endgroup
- \egroup
-}%
-\def\@footnotetext{% Implict #1
- \open@footnotetext
- \set@footnotetext{p@footnote}%
-}%
-%
-\def\@mpfootnotetext{% Implict #1
- \global\setbox\@mpfootins\vbox\bgroup % \egroup in \set@footnotetext
- \unvbox\@mpfootins
- \set@footnotetext{p@mpfootnote}%
-}%
-\long\def\set@footnotetext#1{%Implicit #2
- \protected@edef\@currentlabel{%
- \csname #1\endcsname\@thefnmark
- }%
- \close@footnotetext
-}%
-\def\@title@footnotetext#1{%
- \protected@edef\@tempa{\csname p@footnote\endcsname\@thefnmark}%
- \expandafter\appgdef
- \expandafter\@title@footnote@text
- \expandafter{%
- \expandafter\insert@footnotetext
- \expandafter{\@tempa}{#1}}%
-}%
-\def\insert@footnotetext#1{%Implicit #2
- \open@footnotetext
- \def\@thefnmark{#1}%
- \def\@currentlabel{#1}%
- \close@footnotetext
-}%
-%
-\AtBeginDocument{%
- \ifx\footnote@size\undefined
- \let\footnote@size\footnotesize
- \fi
-}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-%
-% \subsection{Eqnarray Correction}%
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\eqnarray@broken}
-% \begin{macro}{\eqnarray@fleqn@fixed}
-% Team \LaTeX\ still hasn't repaired Leslie's broken
-% definition of |eqnarray|.
-% Let us be bold\dots.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\long\def\eqnarray@broken{%
- \stepcounter{equation}\def\@currentlabel{\p@equation\theequation}%
- \global\@eqnswtrue\m@th\global\@eqcnt\z@
- \tabskip\mathindent
- \let\\=\@eqncr
- \setlength\abovedisplayskip{\topsep}%
- \ifvmode\addtolength\abovedisplayskip{\partopsep}\fi
- \addtolength\abovedisplayskip{\parskip}%
- \setlength\belowdisplayskip{\abovedisplayskip}%
- \setlength\belowdisplayshortskip{\abovedisplayskip}%
- \setlength\abovedisplayshortskip{\abovedisplayskip}%
- $$%
- \everycr{}%
- \halign to\linewidth\bgroup
- \hskip\@centering$\displaystyle\tabskip\z@skip{##}$\@eqnsel
- &\global\@eqcnt\@ne
- \hskip\tw@\arraycolsep
- \hfil${##}$\hfil
- &\global\@eqcnt\tw@
- \hskip\tw@\arraycolsep
- $\displaystyle{##}$\hfil\tabskip\@centering
- &\global\@eqcnt\thr@@\hb@xt@\z@\bgroup\hss##\egroup
- \tabskip\z@skip
- \cr
-}%
-\long\def\eqnarray@fleqn@fixed{%
- \stepcounter{equation}\def\@currentlabel{\p@equation\theequation}%
- \global\@eqnswtrue\m@th\global\@eqcnt\z@
- \tabskip\mathindent
- \let\\=\@eqncr
- \setlength\abovedisplayskip{\topsep}%
- \ifvmode\addtolength\abovedisplayskip{\partopsep}\fi
- \addtolength\abovedisplayskip{\parskip}%
- \setlength\belowdisplayskip{\abovedisplayskip}%
- \setlength\belowdisplayshortskip{\abovedisplayskip}%
- \setlength\abovedisplayshortskip{\abovedisplayskip}%
- $$%
- \everycr{}%
- \halign\@to\linewidth\bgroup
- \hskip\@centering$\displaystyle\tabskip\z@skip{##}$\@eqnsel
- &\global\@eqcnt\@ne
- \hskip\tw@\eqncolsep
- \hfil${{}##{}}$\hfil
- &\global\@eqcnt\tw@
- \hskip\tw@\eqncolsep
- $\displaystyle{##}$\hfil\tabskip\@centering
- &\global\@eqcnt\thr@@\hb@xt@\z@\bgroup\hss##\egroup
- \tabskip\z@skip
- \cr
-}%
-\ifx\eqnarray\eqnarray@broken
- \ClassWarningNoLine{aastex}{Repairing broken {eqnarray} definition}%
- \let\eqnarray\eqnarray@fleqn@fixed
-\fi
-\let\eqnarray@broken\relax
-\let\eqnarray@fleqn@fixed\relax
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \subsection{Customization of Sections}%
-% \begin{macro}{\@startsection}
-% Patch a head hook into the basic sectioning command.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\@startsection#1#2#3#4#5#6{%
- \@startsection@hook
- \if@noskipsec \leavevmode \fi
- \par
- \@tempskipa #4\relax
- \@afterindenttrue
- \ifdim \@tempskipa <\z@
- \@tempskipa -\@tempskipa \@afterindentfalse
- \fi
- \if@nobreak
- \everypar{}%
- \else
- \addpenalty\@secpenalty\addvspace\@tempskipa
- \fi
- \@ifstar
- {\@ssect{#3}{#4}{#5}{#6}}%
- {\@dblarg{\@sect{#1}{#2}{#3}{#4}{#5}{#6}}}%
-}%
-\def\@startsection@hook{}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\@sect}
-% \begin{macro}{\@ssect}
-% Adjust section heading typography slightly. The manuscript editors
-% seem to like the idea that the heads will be centered, and that there
-% will be a |.| trailing the section number. This requires hacking
-% below the normal \LaTeX\ programming interface (|\@startsection|),
-% since the centering has to be turned on and off again before the
-% section starts.
-%
-% FIXME: cf \LaTeX\ standard definitions. Hooks for |\sec@upcase| and
-% centering.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\@sect#1#2#3#4#5#6[#7]#8{%
- \ifnum #2>\c@secnumdepth
- \let\@svsec\@empty
- \else
- \refstepcounter{#1}\protected@edef\@svsec{\@seccntformat{#1}\relax}
- \fi
- \@tempskipa #5\relax
- \ifdim \@tempskipa>\z@
- \begingroup \section@centering#6{%
- \@hangfrom{\hskip #3\relax\@svsec}\interlinepenalty \@M\sec@upcase{#8}\@@par}%
- \endgroup
- \csname #1mark\endcsname{#7}\addcontentsline
- {toc}{#1}{\ifnum #2>\c@secnumdepth \else
- \protect\numberline{\csname the#1\endcsname}\fi
- #7}\else
- \def\@svsechd{%
- #6{\hskip#3\relax\@svsec
- \sec@upcase{#8}}%
- \csname #1mark\endcsname
- {#7}\addcontentsline{toc}{#1}{%
- \ifnum #2>\c@secnumdepth
- \else
- \protect\numberline{\csname the#1\endcsname}%
- \fi
- #7}}\fi
- \@xsect{#5}%
-}%
-%
-\def\@ssect#1#2#3#4#5{\@tempskipa #3\relax
- \ifdim \@tempskipa>\z@
- \begingroup
- \section@centering
- #4{%
- \@hangfrom{\hskip #1}\interlinepenalty \@M
- \sec@upcase{#5}\@@par}\endgroup
- \else
- \def\@svsechd{#4{\hskip #1\relax \sec@upcase{#5}}}\fi
- \@xsect{#3}}%
-\def\@seccntformat#1{\csname the#1\endcsname.\quad}
-\def\section@centering{\centering}%
-\def\sec@upcase#1{\relax{#1}}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \subsection{Customization of Citations}%
-% \begin{macro}{\@citex}
-% Modify |\@citex| so that individual citation texts are {\em not}
-% |\hbox|ed.
-%
-% This allows \TeX\ to break lines at spaces between words in citations.
-% Remove the obnoxious |{\bf ?}| that was inserted in the text when
-% undefined citations are encountered; here, the warning message is
-% printed only on the terminal.
-%
-% FIXME: doublecheck compatibility with natbib!
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\@citex[#1]#2{%
- \let\@citea\@empty
- \@cite{%
- \@for\@citeb:=#2\do{%
- \@citea
- \def\@citea{,\penalty\@m\ }%
- \edef\@citeb{\expandafter\@firstofone\@citeb\@empty}%
- \if@filesw\immediate\write\@auxout{\string\citation{\@citeb}}\fi
- \@ifundefined{b@\@citeb}{%
-% \mbox{\reset@font\bfseries ?}%
- \G@refundefinedtrue
- \@latex@warning{%
- Citation `\@citeb' on page \thepage \space undefined%
- }%
- }{%
-% \hbox{%
- \csname b@\@citeb\endcsname
-% }%
- }%
- }%
- }{#1}%
-}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% All of the kernel extensions have been incorporated into
-% the document class and document style.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%</class|style>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-%
-% \section{More of the Document Style Module}%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*style>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% Now that kernel modifications are complete, read in the selected substyle.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\expandafter\@@input\aastex@substyle.sty\relax
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% And begin patching the code.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\revtex@ver{4.1}%
-\def\revtex@date{25 Jan 99}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% Undefine commands that we are about to override.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\let\lefthead\undefined
-\let\righthead\undefined
-\let\references\undefined
-\let\reference\undefined
-\let\markcite\undefined
-\let\colhead\undefined
-\let\tablecolumns\undefined
-\let\tablecaption\undefined
-\let\tablehead\undefined
-\let\tabletail\undefined
-\let\tablewidth\undefined
-\let\tableheadfrac\undefined
-\let\deluxetable\undefined
-\let\startdata\undefined
-\let\tablevspace\undefined
-\let\tablebreak\undefined
-\let\cutinhead\undefined
-\let\sidehead\undefined
-\let\tablerefs\undefined
-\let\tablecomments\undefined
-\let\phn\undefined
-\let\phd\undefined
-\let\phs\undefined
-\let\phm\undefined
-\let\sq\undefined
-\let\arcdeg\undefined
-\let\arcmin\undefined
-\let\arcsec\undefined
-\let\fd\undefined
-\let\fh\undefined
-\let\fm\undefined
-\let\fs\undefined
-\let\fdg\undefined
-\let\fp\undefined
-\let\micron\undefined
-\let\case\undefined
-\let\slantfrac\undefined
-\let\onehalf\undefined
-\let\onethird\undefined
-\let\twothirds\undefined
-\let\onequarter\undefined
-\let\threequarters\undefined
-\let\ubvr\undefined
-\let\ub\undefined
-\let\bv\undefined
-\let\vr\undefined
-\let\ur\undefined
-\let\ion\undefined
-\let\nodata\undefined
-\let\sun\undefined
-\let\earth\undefined
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% The overrides and additions to the V4.0
-% document style are drawn from the same code that goes into
-% the document class.
-%
-% Once those emendments have been read in,
-% we will return to the document style to finish things off.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%</style>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-%
-% \section{\aastex\ Additions and Amendments}
-% This section presents commands that are specific to the \aastex\
-% macro package.
-%
-% All of the \aastex\ emendments are incorporated into the document class.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*class>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \subsection{A Special Note on the Two-Column Preprint Style}%
-%
-% It is not the objective of the \aastex\ project to develop \LaTeX\
-% styles that produce pages that mimic the appearance of specific AAS
-% journals.
-% However, it would be nice to offer format options within the preprint
-% styles so that output format can be changed.
-% (Within the ``manuscript''
-% style, |\tighten| is available, and this effectively turns off the
-% doublespacing.) The primary motivation behind this idea is to provide
-% some definitions that permit institutions to distribute ``pretty''
-% preprints with this package.
-% (Of course, I make the glaring assumption that I
-% can determine what someone else will think is pretty.)
-%
-% This style has the principle function of setting up two-column output.
-% Although it should be painfully obvious, it is important to remember
-% that text lines are considerably shorter when two of them are typeset
-% side by side on a page. Long equations, wide tables and figures, and
-% the like, may not slide into this format without some adjustments.
-% It is our opinion that great effort to adapt copy and markup for
-% two-column pages is counterproductive; remember that the main goals
-% of this package are to enable comprehensive tagging of the article
-% and, secondarily, to produce ``correct'' draft (or referee) format
-% pages.
-%
-% I elect not to impose a format for the front matter, although I feel
-% it looks best if the title, author, abstract, and keyword material is
-% typeset on its own page at full text width. The author may supply the
-% |\twocolumn| command wherever desired, and, for that matter, is free
-% to switch between |\onecolumn| and |\twocolumn| modes.
-% (However, this is bad form.)
-% \begin{verbatim}
-% \twocolumn % Enter two-column page grid
-% \onecolumn % Enter one-column page grid
-% \end{verbatim}
-% Note that the two-column page grid begins at the point |\twocolumn|
-% appears in the text, and if that point is before the frontmatter,
-% the latter will get typeset in two-column mode
-% along with the rest of it.
-% For purposes of producing ``pretty'' output,
-% it is probably desirable to
-% put this command after the abstract and keywords, just before the body
-% of the paper.
-% If the command is not specified explicitly,
-% the document class will automatically switch between the one-column
-% and two-column page grid as needed.
-%
-% \subsection{Configuration Information}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\revtex@ver}
-% \begin{macro}{\revtex@date}
-% \begin{macro}{\revtex@org}
-% \begin{macro}{\revtex@jnl}
-% \begin{macro}{\revtex@genre}
-% \begin{macro}{\revtex@pageid}
-% My convention for identifying configuration information is for styles
-% to define the following five parameters:
-% |\revtex@ver| is the version number of this file;
-% |\revtex@date| signifies the revision date;
-% |\revtex@org| is the sponsoring organization;
-% and
-% |\revtex@genre| gives the applicable journal, if specified.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\revtex@ver{5.2}%
-\def\revtex@date{12 Dec 2003}%
-\def\revtex@org{AAS}%
-\def\revtex@jnl{AAS}%
-\def\revtex@genre{manuscript}%
-%\def\revtex@genre{preprint}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% Display identifying message on screen and in logfile.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\class@typeout{%
- \typeout{%
- \revtex@org\space
-% \revtex@jnl\space
- \revtex@genre\space substyle, v\revtex@ver\space <\revtex@date>.%
- }%
-}%
-\def\class@typeout@jnl{%
- \typeout{%
- \revtex@org\space
- \revtex@jnl\space
- \revtex@genre\space substyle, v\revtex@ver\space <\revtex@date>.%
- }%
-}%
-\AtBeginDocument{%
- \class@typeout
-}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% The following mini-colophon identifies the article as having been
-% prepared with this macro package. The |\revtex@pageid| command only
-% defines the formatting of this colophon; its existence and placement
-% within the printed article is controlled by the use of this command
-% in the style file.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\revtex@pageid{%
- \xdef\@thefnmark{\null}%
- \@footnotetext{%
- This \revtex@genre\space was prepared with the
- \revtex@org\space \LaTeX\ macros v\revtex@ver.%
- }%
-}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \subsection{Page Style}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\ps@plaintop}
-% Create |plaintop| page style that has folios at top of page,
-% and use |plaintop| pagestyle by default.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\ps@plaintop{%
- \let\@mkboth\@gobbletwo
- \def\@oddfoot{}%
- \def\@oddhead{\rmfamily\hfil--\space\thepage\space--\hfil}%
- \def\@evenfoot{}%
- \let\@evenhead\@oddhead
-}%
-\def\ps@msstitle{% mss ID on title page
- \let\@mkboth\@gobbletwo
- \def\@oddfoot{}%
- \def\@oddhead{\rmfamily\hfil\ms@id}%
- \def\@evenfoot{}%
- \let\@evenhead\@oddhead
-}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \subsection{Page Layout}
-%
-% \subsubsection{The pica area}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\textwidth}
-% Set the text width
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\setlength\textwidth{6.5in}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\textheight}
-% The |\textheight| is the height of text
-% (including footnotes and figures, excluding running head and
-% foot).
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\setlength\textheight{8.4in}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \subsubsection{Vertical spacing}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\headheight}
-% \begin{macro}{\headsep}
-% \begin{macro}{\topskip}
-% The |\headheight| is the height of the box that will contain the
-% running head. The |\headsep| is the distance between the bottom
-% of the running head and the top of the text. The |\topskip| is
-% the |\baselineskip| for the first line on a page; \LaTeX's output
-% routine will not work properly if it has the value 0pt, so do not
-% do that!
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\setlength\headheight{.15in}%
-%\setlength\headsep {.35in}%
-%\setlength\topskip {10\p@}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \subsubsection{Margins}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\marginparsep}
-% \begin{macro}{\marginparpush}
-% The horizontal space between the main text and marginal notes is
-% determined by |\marginparsep|, the minimum vertical separation
-% between two marginal notes is controlled by |\marginparpush|.
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \setlength\marginparsep {10\p@}%
- \setlength\marginparpush{5\p@}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% Now we can give the values for the other margin parameters. For
-% native \LaTeXe, these are calculated.
-% \begin{macro}{\oddsidemargin}
-% \begin{macro}{\evensidemargin}
-% \begin{macro}{\marginparwidth}
-%
-% Values for two-sided printing:
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \setlength\oddsidemargin {0in}%
- \setlength\evensidemargin {0in}%
- \setlength\marginparwidth {0in}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\topmargin}
-% The |\topmargin| is the distance between the top of `the
-% printable area'---which is 1 inch below the top of the
-% paper--and the top of the box which contains the running head.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \setlength\topmargin{0in}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \subsection{Paragraphing}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\lineskip}
-% \begin{macro}{\normallineskip}
-% These parameters control \TeX's behavior when two lines tend to
-% come too close together.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\setlength\lineskip{1\p@}%
-\setlength\normallineskip{1\p@}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\@doubleleading}
-% \begin{macro}{\@tightleading}
-% The two alternatives for leading are defined here.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\@doubleleading{1.6}%
-\def\@tightleading{1.1}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\baselinestretch}
-% This is used as a multiplier for |\baselineskip|.
-% Note that if this command
-% doesn't resolve to ``empty'' any \texttt{plus} or \texttt{minus}
-% part in the specification of |\baselineskip| is ignored.
-%
-% Double spacing is the default: the style uses
-% the \@doubleleading factor, defined above.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\renewcommand\baselinestretch{\@tightleading}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\tighten}
-% The |\tighten| command merely resets the |\baselinestretch| to a
-% smaller factor, resulting in single-column text that is more closely
-% spaced. (This will always work.) Tightening the vertical spacing
-% in the text results in output that is more attractive for distribution
-% to colleagues who are primarily interested in reading the paper, as
-% opposed to copy editing it. Double-spaced output for referees and
-% copy editors is, however, the main objective of this style, hence
-% double-spacing occurs by default. The same effect as |\tighten|
-% can be achieved by using the |tighten| document style option.
-%
-% The |\tighten| command is intended for use in the preamble of the
-% article.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand\tighten{\def\baselinestretch{\@tightleading}}%
-\newcommand\tightenlines{\tighten}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\singlespace}
-% \begin{macro}{\doublespace}
-% For authors who feel compelled to change between single and double
-% spacing in the manuscript, |\singlespace| and |\doublespace| commands
-% are provided. (Following recommendations of AAS Publications Board
-% Subcommittee on Preprints.) These are no-ops in manuscript style.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand\singlespace{%
- \def\baselinestretch{\@tightleading}%
- \normalsize
-}%
-\newcommand\doublespace{%
- \def\baselinestretch{\@doubleleading}%
- \normalsize
-}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% Here are the corresponding command definitions for the ApJ style:
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\singlespace@apj{%
- \def\baselinestretch{\@tightleading}%
- \def\arraystretch{\@tightleading}%
- \normalsize
-}%
-\def\doublespace@apj{%
- \def\baselinestretch@apj{\@doubleleading}%
- \def\arraystretch{\@doubleleading}%
- \normalsize
-}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\sec@upcase}
-% Upper case for sections (optional upper case items). These are
-% created so that some headings can be toggled between mixed case and
-% upper case readily.
-% Headings that might be changed can be wrapped in the style file in
-% |\sec@upcase{|\m{text}|}| constructs;
-% the expansion of |\sec@upcase| is
-% controlled here. It is |\relax| by default (mixed case heads), and
-% can easily be changed to |\uppercase| if desired.
-% If mixed case headings are wanted by the editor, authors {\em must}
-% supply mixed case text, although this is what authors should be doing
-% anyway.
-% (Mixed can be converted to upper,
-% but the reverse transformation cannot be automated.)
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\parskip}
-% \begin{macro}{\parindent}
-% |\parskip| gives extra vertical space between paragraphs and
-% |\parindent| is the width of the paragraph indentation. The value
-% of |\parindent| depends on whether we are in two column mode.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\setlength\parskip{1.5ex}%
-\setlength\parindent{2em}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\smallskipamount}
-% \begin{macro}{\medskipamount}
-% \begin{macro}{\bigskipamount}
-% The values for these three parameters are set in the \LaTeX\
-% kernel.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\setlength\smallskipamount{3\p@\@plus1\p@\@minus1\p@}%
-\setlength\medskipamount{6\p@\@plus2\p@\@minus2\p@}%
-\setlength\bigskipamount{12\p@\@plus4\p@\@minus4\p@}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\@lowpenalty}
-% \begin{macro}{\@medpenalty}
-% \begin{macro}{\@highpenalty}%
-% The commands |\nopagebreak| and |\nolinebreak| put in penalties
-% to discourage these breaks at the point they are put in.
-% They use |\@lowpenalty|, |\@medpenalty| or |\@highpenalty|,
-% dependent on their argument.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\@lowpenalty 51
-\@medpenalty 151
-\@highpenalty 301
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\clubpenalty}
-% \begin{macro}{\widowpenalty}
-% These penalties are use to discourage club and widow lines.
-% Because we use their default values we only show them here,
-% commented out.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-% \clubpenalty 150
-% \widowpenalty 150
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\displaywidowpenalty}
-% \begin{macro}{\predisplaypenalty}
-% \begin{macro}{\postdisplaypenalty}
-% Discourage (but not so much) widows in front of a math display
-% and forbid breaking directly in front of a display. Allow break
-% after a display without a penalty. Again the default values are
-% used, therefore we only show them here.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-% \displaywidowpenalty 50
-% \predisplaypenalty 10000
-% \postdisplaypenalty 0
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\interlinepenalty}
-% Allow the breaking of a page in the middle of a paragraph.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-% \interlinepenalty 0
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\brokenpenalty}
-% We allow the breaking of a page after a hyphenated line.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-% \brokenpenalty 100
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \subsection{Layout for Landscape Tables}%
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\ptlandscape}
-% This command switches to a page layout appropriate to
-% a table in landscape orientation.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand\ptlandscape{%
- \setlength\textwidth{9in}%
- \setlength\textheight{6.5in}%
- \setlength\pt@width{\textwidth}%
- \setlength\hoffset{0.0in}%
- \setlength\voffset{-0.25in}%
-}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-%
-% \subsection{Formatting Options}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\eqsecnum}
-% Sometimes authors want to number equations by section,
-% rather than sequentially through the whole paper.
-%
-% To invoke this processing option, the user may
-% give the following command in the document preamble:
-% \begin{verbatim}
-% \eqsecnum
-% \end{verbatim}
-% The preferred way is to call |eqsecnum| as a
-% document class option:
-% \begin{verbatim}
-% \documentclass[eqsecnum]{aastex}
-% \end{verbatim}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\eqsecnum{%
- \@addtoreset{equation}{section}%
- \def\theequation{%
- %\mbox{\normalsize\arabic{section}-\arabic{equation}}% Wrong!
- \arabic{section}-\arabic{equation}%
- }%
-}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \subsection{Data Commands}%
-%
-% There are some obvious style-dependent parameters and formatting
-% instructions in this file. The object has been to keep the author
-% commands (the user interface, if you will) society-, journal-, and
-% style-independent, while the style-specific parameters and commands
-% are kept below that level.
-%
-% \subsubsection{Article Attributes}%
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\@journalname}
-% \begin{macro}{\cpr@holder}
-% Set the journal name and copyright holder.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\@journalname{The Astrophysical Journal}%
-\def\cpr@holder{American Astronomical Society}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% Journal and article identification information is established by the
-% editorial staff. The following macros are used by personnel at the
-% editorial office to annotate/record slug-line data and should be
-% included in the manuscript preamble, i.e., before the \LaTeX\
-% |\begin{document}|.
-% All they do is globally define other \TeX\ control sequences that are
-% used by other macros at a later time.
-% \begin{verbatim}
-% \received{<receipt date>}
-% \revised{<revision date>}
-% \accepted{<acceptance date>}
-% \journalid{<vol>}{<journal date>}
-% \articleid{<start page>}{<end page>}
-% \paperid{<id>}
-% \ccc{<code>}
-% \end{verbatim}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\received}
-% \begin{macro}{\accepted}
-% \begin{macro}{\revised}
-% \begin{macro}{\journalid}
-% \begin{macro}{\articleid}
-% \begin{macro}{\paperid}
-% \begin{macro}{\ccc}
-% For preprints and submitted manuscripts in draft/referee format, etc.,
-% the slug-line information is irrelevant and in those kinds of style,
-% the data are never used. In my estimation, it is perfectly acceptable
-% to have these commands in the file (for future use), so they are
-% defined in the usual way.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand\received[1]{\gdef\@recvdate{#1}}%
-\newcommand\accepted[1]{\gdef\@accptdate{#1}}%
-\newcommand\revised[1]{\gdef\@revisedate{#1}}%
-\newcommand\journalid[2]{\gdef\@jourvol{#1}\gdef\@jourdate{#2}}%
-\newcommand\articleid[2]{\gdef\@startpage{#1}\gdef\@finishpage{#2}}%
-\newcommand\paperid[1]{\gdef\@paperid{#1}}%
-\newcommand\ccc[1]{\gdef\CCC@code{#1}}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% We provide initialization code. If
-% at some future date someone manages to give these
-% macros a value before the end of the class,
-% |\providecommand| will nicely bow out.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\AtEndOfClass{%
- \@provide\@recvdate{}%
- \@provide\@accptdate{}%
- \@provide\@revisedate{}%
- \@provide\@jourvol{}%
- \@provide\@jourdate{}%
- \@provide\@startpage{}%
- \@provide\@finishpage{}%
- \@provide\@paperid{MS-0001-SAMP}%
- \@provide\CCC@code{000-00\$75.95-CDB}%
-}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \subsubsection{Copyright data}%
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\cpright}
-%
-% We permit the author/editor to supply a copyright ``type'' as well as
-% the year.
-% The formatting of the copyright notices is defined by |\@slug|.
-% FIXME: |\@slug| is never used.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand\cpright[2]{%
- \global\expandafter\let\expandafter\cpr@type\csname cpr@#1\endcsname
- \gdef\cpr@year{#2}%
- \typeout{`#1' copyright \cpr@year.}%
-}%
-\def\cpr@AAS{Copyright \cpr@year\space by the \cpr@holder.}%
-\def\cpr@PD{This article is in the public domain.}%
-\def\cpr@Crown{Crown copyright \cpr@year\space by the \cpr@holder.}%
-\def\cpr@none{No copyright is claimed for this article.}%
-\def\cpr@ASP{Copyright \cpr@year\space by the ASP.}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% Default copyright year and type:
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\cpr@year{\number\year}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\@slug}
-% |\@slug| determines formatting of slugline information.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\@slug{%
- \par
- \noindent\cpr@type\par
- \noindent Manuscript number \@paperid.\par
- \noindent\CCC@code\par
-}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% Here ends the code for the document class.
-% Hereinafter appears code that is common to
-% the document class and document style.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%</class>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \subsubsection{Running heads}%
-%
-% The change in the user-level markup is incorporated into the V4.1
-% document style.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*class|style>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\lefthead}
-% \begin{macro}{\righthead}
-%
-% The |\lefthead| and |\righthead| commands are now deprecated and will give
-% a diagnostic message in the \TeX\ log (NB: without halting \TeX).
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand\lefthead{\substitute@command\lefthead\shorttitle}%
-\newcommand\righthead{\substitute@command\righthead\shortauthors}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\shorttitle}
-% \begin{macro}{\shortauthors}
-% Authors may be asked to supply running head information. We use the
-% language of the publisher here to distinguish between two pieces of
-% information: the left head frequently contains an author list (last
-% names, possibly truncated as et al.), while the right head frequently
-% contains an abbreviated form of the paper title. The |\shorttitle| and
-% |\shortauthors| commands merely collect the information and buffer the
-% text.
-% \begin{verbatim}
-% \shorttitle{<text>}
-% \shortauthors{<text>}
-% \end{verbatim}
-% For the ApJ, right heads are the short titles, and the publisher
-% prefers that the author specify a 44-character or less abbreviated
-% title to use as the running head on right pages.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand\shorttitle[1]{\gdef\@versohead{#1}}%
-\newcommand\shortauthors[1]{\gdef\@rectohead{#1}}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% Default values:
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\shorttitle{\relax}%
-\shortauthors{\relax}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% Here ends the portion of code for the document style.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%</class|style>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% Hereinafter appears code for the document class.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*class>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\@runheads}
-% The |\@runheads| procedure determines the formatting of running head
-% information.
-% It produces a set of running head lines, one for each page of the
-% article.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\@runheads{%
- \@tempcnta\c@page
- \@whilenum\@tempcnta>\z@\do{%
- \vskip 3ex
- \hbox\@to30pc{%
- \small
- \expandafter\uppercase\expandafter{\@versohead}:
- \expandafter\uppercase\expandafter{\@rectohead}\hfil
- }%
- \advance\@tempcnta\m@ne
- }%
-}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\slugcomment}
-% The |\slugcomment| command is provided so authors or editors may
-% include a remark about the manuscript that may be desired in print for
-% some styles.
-% For instance, authors like to include information about the
-% journal and publication date of accepted papers ("To appear in AJ,
-% November 1992").
-% \begin{verbatim}
-% \slugcomment{<text>}
-% \end{verbatim}
-% The formatting of the |\slugcomment| information is controlled by the
-% |\@makeslugcmmnt| command, and its placement on the page is dictated
-% by the presence of |\@makeslugcmmnt| in |\sluginfo| (or whatever).
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand\msid[1]{\gdef\ms@id{#1}}% mss ID
-\def\ms@id{}%
-\newcommand\slugcomment[1]{\gdef\slug@comment{#1}}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% Default value:
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\slugcomment{}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\@slugcmmntwidth}
-% \begin{macro}{\@makeslugcmmnt}
-% Low-level formatting procedure:
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\newdimen\@slugcmmntwidth
-\long\def\@makeslugcmmnt@mss{%
- \@ifx@empty\slug@comment{\relax}{%
- \vskip 5ex
- \sbox\@tempboxa{\slug@comment}%
- \@ifdim{\wd\@tempboxa >\@slugcmmntwidth}{%
- \hbox\@to\textwidth{%
- \hss
- \parbox\@slugcmmntwidth\slug@comment
- }%
- }{%
- \hbox\@to\textwidth{\hfil\box\@tempboxa\hfil}%
- }%
- }%
-}%
-\long\def\@makeslugcmmnt@ppt{%
- \@ifx@empty\slug@comment{\relax}{%
- \sbox\@tempboxa{\slug@comment}%
- \@ifdim{\wd\@tempboxa >\@slugcmmntwidth}{%
- \hbox\@to\textwidth{%
- \hss
- \parbox\@slugcmmntwidth\slug@comment
- }%
- }{%
- \hbox\@to\textwidth{\hfil\box\@tempboxa}%
- }%
- \vskip 2ex
- }%
-}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-%
-% \subsubsection{Receipt and Acceptance Dates}%
-% Editorial offices like to have receipt and acceptance dates on the
-% front page for tracking purposes.
-% The current practice is to require the author
-% to type Received \dots\ and Accepted \dots\ lines
-% for the staff to type on.
-%
-% The |\@dates| command will typeset either rules
-% or the dates specified in |\received| and/or |\accepted| commands.
-% Note that authors should not include |\received| and |\accepted|.
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\@rcvaccrule}
-% This is the rule following the date.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\@rcvaccrule{\vrule\@width1.75in\@height0.5pt\@depth\z@}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\@dates}
-% |\@dates| determines formatting of manuscript date information.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\@dates{\ifx\@title\@empty\else {Received}\space%
- \ifx\@empty\@recvdate\@rcvaccrule\else\@recvdate\fi;%
- \hspace{1.5em}{accepted}\space%
- \ifx\@empty\@accptdate\@rcvaccrule\else\@accptdate\fi%
-\fi}% %
-\def\@dates@pptt{%
- \@ifx@empty\@recvdate{}{%
- \@ifx@empty\@accptdate{}{%
- {\center
- \@ifnum{\col@number=\tw@}{\small}{\normalsize}%
- {\itshape Received}\space
- \@recvdate
- \@ifnum{\col@number=\tw@}{\\[.5ex]}{\hspace{1.5em}}%
- {\itshape accepted}\space
- \@accptdate
- \endcenter
- }%
- }%
- }%
-}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \subsubsection{Formatting the Slug Information}%
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\sluginfo}
-% The |\sluginfo| command is executed automatically when a
-% |\begin{abstract}| is
-% encountered, so it is not necessary (or appropriate) for the author to
-% include this line explicitly. The received/accepted business is a
-% concern only for the editorial staff, hence we have arranged for the
-% author not to have to fuss with it.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\sluginfo@mss{%
- {%
- \addpenalty{\@M}%
- \addvspace{6\p@}%
- \centering
- \@dates
- \@makeslugcmmnt
- \par
- \addvspace{6\p@}%
- }%
-}%
-\newcommand\sluginfo{%
- {%
- \addpenalty{\@M}%
- \addvspace{6\p@}%
- \centering
- \@dates
- \par
- \addvspace{6\p@}%
- }%
-}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% For backwards compatibility:
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\let\dates=\sluginfo
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-%
-% \subsection{Front Matter}%
-%
-% \subsubsection{Abstract}%
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\abstract}
-% The abstract environment simply formats the
-% material into a certain box for later use.
-% Note that the assignment of the measure
-% (|\hsize|) is taken from the code
-% for |\begin{document}|,
-% as is the call to |\process@table|, which
-% turns into a no-op after |\begin{document}|.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\renewenvironment{abstract}{%
- \iflong@abstract% Abstract in one-column mode
- \onecolumn
- \fi
- \global\setbox\abstract@box\vtop\bgroup
-% \let\@nodocument\@empty
- \columnwidth\textwidth\hsize\columnwidth\linewidth\hsize
-% \process@table
- \normalsize
- \color@begingroup
- \@parboxrestore
- \@setminipage
- \quotation
-}{%
- \par
- \endquotation
- \removelastskip
- \vskip-\prevdepth
- \color@endgroup
- \egroup
-}%
-\newbox\abstract@box
-% \end{macrocode}
-% Make adjustments to \LaTeX\ abstract style: optional upper case
-% heading, retain current type size (should be |\normalsize|),
-% ignore twocolumn option in the |manuscript| substyle,
-% add |\sluginfo|, and start abstract on new page.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\abstractname{ABSTRACT}%
-\def\@abstract@mss{%
- \sluginfo
- \clearpage
- \@ifvoid\abstract@box{}{%
- \begin{center}\bfseries\abstractname\end{center}%
- \contribute@box\abstract@box
- }%
-}%
-\def\contribute@box#1{%
- \dimen@\ht#1%
- \leavevmode\hbox{\vrule\@height\ht#1\@width\z@}\par
- \nointerlineskip\nobreak\kern-\ht#1\unvbox#1\prevdepth\z@
-}%
-\def\@abstract@ppt{%
-%\sluginfo
-%\clearpage
- \@ifvoid\abstract@box{}{%
- \begin{center}\bfseries\abstractname\end{center}%
- \contribute@box\abstract@box
- }%
-}%
-\def\@abstract@pptt{%
- \@ifvoid\abstract@box{}{%
- \@ifnum{\col@number=\tw@}{%
- \section*{Abstract}%
- }{%
- \vspace{3em}%
- \begin{center}%
- \large
- \bfseries\abstractname\vspace{-.5em}\vspace{\z@}%
- \end{center}%
- }%
- \contribute@box\abstract@box
- }%
-}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \subsubsection{Title, Author, etc.}\label{sec-preamble}%
-% Title and author identification is by way of standard \LaTeX\ commands
-% |\title| and |\author|.
-% The authors' principal affiliation is specified with a separate macro |\affil|.
-% Each |\author| command should be followed by its own |\affil| (or address).
-%
-% Authors often have affiliations above and beyond their main employer,
-% and these are specified with the |\altaffilmark| and |\altaffiltext|
-% commands.
-% These commands behave like the |\footnotemark| and |\footnotetext|
-% commands
-% of \LaTeX.
-% |\altaffilmark| is appended to author's names in the |\author| lists,
-% and generates the superscript identification numbers.
-% The text for the individual alternate affiliations is generated by the
-% |\altaffiltext| command. It is up to the author to make sure that the
-% |\altaffilmark| numbers attached to authors' names correspond to the
-% correct alternate affiliation.
-%
-% The following commands may appear in the title block,
-% with the |\title| command appearing exactly once, and
-% all others appearing as many times as needed:
-% \begin{verbatim}
-% \title{<lucid text>}
-% \author{<name(s)>}
-% \authoraddr{<author's postal address>}% Deprecated (V5.0) in favor of \affil
-% \email{<author's e-mail address>}
-% \affil{<affiliation>}
-% \altaffilmark{<tag number(s)>}
-% \altaffiltext{<numerical tag>}{<text>}
-% \and
-% \end{verbatim}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\title}
-% \begin{macro}{\author}
-% \begin{macro}{\authoraddr}
-% \begin{macro}{\email}
-% \begin{macro}{\affil}
-% \begin{macro}{\altaffilmark}
-% \begin{macro}{\altaffiltext}
-% \begin{macro}{\and}
-% The title block commands simply queue up the
-% given tokens into the appropriate control sequence.
-%
-% Implementation note:
-% The |\email| command has one meaning until the titlepage
-% is set, then acquires a different meaning, appropriate for text use.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\title#1{\appdef\@title{\make@title{#1}}}%
-\def\author#1{\appdef\@author{\make@author{#1}}}%
-%%% \def\authoraddr{\substitute@command\authoraddr\affil}%
-\def\email#1{\appdef\@author{\make@authoremail{#1}}}%
-\def\affil#1{\appdef\@author{\make@affil{#1}}}%
-\def\altaffilmark#1{\appdef\@author{\make@altaffilmark{#1}}}%
-\def\altaffiltext#1#2{\appdef\@author{\make@altaffiltext{#1}{#2}}}%
-\def\and{\appdef\@author{\make@and}}%
-\let\authoraddr\@gobble
-\let\@title\@empty
-\let\@author\@empty
-\let\@date\@empty
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\@maketitle}
-% To format the title page, simply
-% expand the tokens that were saved up.
-% Remember that some users incorporate
-% title block commands (notably |\altaffilmark|)
-% into the argument of the |\author| command itself.
-% Therefore, we might encounter
-% certain of the above commands while formatting
-% the title page itself.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\@maketitle{%
- \newpage
- \begingroup
- \let\footnote\thanks
- \let\email\make@authoremail
- \let\affil\make@affil
- \let\altaffilmark\make@altaffilmark
- \let\altaffiltext\make@altaffiltext
- \let\and\make@and
- \@title
- \@author
- \@date
- \par
- \@abstract
- \@ifxundefined\keyword@list{}{%
- \expandafter\@keywords
- \expandafter{\keyword@list}%
- }%
- \endgroup
-}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% The typesetting performed by the titlepage commands is appropriate
-% for the top of the first text page of the manuscript.
-% They could as well be used on a title cover page, but vertical
-% placement would have to be controlled by the author.
-% This is not to be encouraged, since I want to discourage
-% the introduction of any extra horizontal or vertical space.
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\make@title}
-% \begin{macro}{\make@author}
-% \begin{macro}{\make@authoraddr}
-% \begin{macro}{\make@authoremail}
-% \begin{macro}{\make@affil}
-% \begin{macro}{\make@altaffilmark}
-% \begin{macro}{\make@altaffiltext}
-% \begin{macro}{\make@and}
-% Here are the formatting procedures for the title page.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\make@title@mss#1{%
- {%
- \def\baselinestretch{\@tightleading}%
- \center\large\bfseries{#1}\endcenter %%
- }%
- \thispagestyle{msstitle}% mss ID
-}%
-\def\make@title@ppt#1{%
- \@makeslugcmmnt
- {\center\large\bfseries{#1}\endcenter}%
- \thispagestyle{empty}%
-}%
-\def\make@title@pptt#1{%
- {%
- \center
- \@ifnum{\col@number=\tw@}{\large}{\Large}%
- \bfseries
- #1%
- \endcenter
- }%
-}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% Here are the formatting procedures for the author list.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\make@author#1{%
- {\topsep\z@\center\normalsize#1\endcenter}%
-}%
-\def\make@author@pptt#1{%
- {\topsep\z@
- \center
- \@ifnum{\col@number=\tw@}{\normalsize}{\vspace{4ex}\large}%
- #1%
- \endcenter
- }%
-}%
-% FIXME: produce text when in preprint substyle
-\let\make@authoraddr=\@gobble
-\def\make@authoremail#1{%
- {\topsep\z@\center\normalsize\tt#1\endcenter}%
-}%
-\newcommand\make@affil[1]{%
- \vspace*{-2.5ex}%
-{\topsep\z@\center#1\endcenter}%
-}%
-\def\make@affil@ppt#1{%
- \vspace*{-0.8ex}%
- {%
- \topsep\z@
- \center
- \@ifnum{\col@number=\tw@}{\small}{\normalsize}%
- \itshape
- #1%
- \endcenter
- }%
-}%
-\def\make@affil@pptt#1{%
- \vspace*{-0.8ex}%
- {%
- \topsep\z@
- \center
- \@ifnum{\col@number=\tw@}{\small}{\normalsize}%
- \itshape
- #1%
- \endcenter
- }%
-}%
-%
-\def\thefootnote{\@arabic\c@footnote}% initial style
-%
-\newcommand\make@altaffilmark[1]{$^{#1}$}%
-%
-\newcommand\make@altaffiltext[2]{%
-\iflong@abstract%
- \footnotetext@ass[#1]{#2}
-\else
- \footnotetext@ass[#1]{\hsize\columnwidth #2}
-\fi
-%\stepcounter{footnote}
-}%
-%%
-\def\thanks#1{\footnotemark
- \protected@xdef\@thanks{\@thanks
- \iflong@abstract%
- \protect\footnotetext[\the\c@footnote]{\hsize18pc #1}
- \else
- \protect\footnotetext[\the\c@footnote]{#1}
- \fi
- }%
-}
-%%
-\def\footnotetext@ass{%
- \@ifnextchar [\@xfootnotenext@ass
- {%\protected@xdef\@thefnmark{\thempfn}%
- \@footnotetext}}
-\def\@xfootnotenext@ass[#1]{%
- \begingroup
- %\csname c@\@mpfn\endcsname #1\relax
- \unrestored@protected@xdef\@thefnmark{#1}%
- \endgroup
- \@footnotetext}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% Redefine the \LaTeX\ |\and| command for this style.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\make@and{\vspace*{-0.5ex}{\topsep\z@\center and\endcenter}}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \subsubsection{Keywords}%
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\keywords}
-% \begin{macro}{\keyword@list}
-% \begin{macro}{\@keywords}
-% \begin{macro}{\@keywords@pptt}
-% \begin{macro}{\@keywordtext}
-% \begin{macro}{\@keyworddelim}
-% \begin{macro}{\subjectheadings}
-% Keywords, subject headings, etc., are accommodated
-% only as a piece of text; the |\keywords| command indents if necessary
-% and supplies the proper lead-in text
-% (``Keywords:'', ``Subject headings:'', etc.)
-% but does not apply formatting to the user's keyword text. The author
-% must supply the correct punctuation according to the journal style.
-%
-% Note that the editors of A\&A, ApJ, and MNRAS have discussed the issue
-% of keywords, and there is disagreement about whether
-% ``subject headings'' or
-% ``keywords'' should appear after abstracts in astronomical papers.
-% In any case, the user-level command is |\keywords|.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand\keywords{\appdef\keyword@list}%
-\let\keyword@list\undefined
-\def\@keywords#1{%
- \vspace*{-.7ex}%
- \@ifnum{\col@number=\tw@}{%
- \noindent
- {{\itshape\@keywordtext:\/}\space\@kwds{#1}}%
- }{%
- {%
- \quote
- {\itshape\@keywordtext:\/}\space
- \@kwds{#1}%
- \endquote
- }%
- }%
-}%
-\def\@keywords@pptt#1{%
- \vspace*{-.7ex}%
- \@ifnum{\col@number=\tw@}{%
- \noindent
- {%
- \small
- {\itshape\@keywordtext:\/}\space
- \@kwds{#1}%
- }%
- }{%
- {%
- \quote
- \small
- {\itshape\@keywordtext:\/}\space
- \@kwds{#1}%
- \endquote
- }%
- }%
-}%
-%
-\def\@keywords@mss#1{%%%
- \vspace*{-.7ex}%
- \@ifnum{\col@number=\tw@}{%
- \noindent
- {%
- \small
- {\itshape\@keywordtext:\/}\space
- \@kwds{#1}%
- }%
- }{%
- {%
- \quote
- \small
- {\itshape\@keywordtext:\/}\space
- \@kwds{#1}%
- \endquote%
- \clearpage
- }%
- }%
-}%
-%
-\let\subjectheadings=\keywords
-\def\@keywordtext{Subject headings}%
-\def\@keyworddelim{---}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\@kwds}
-% It might be possible to handle keywords and their punctuation more
-% automatically at some stage, but at the moment using this looping
-% construct is serious overkill. It also causes problems because the
-% loop delimiter is a comma, and there are keywords that legitimately
-% contain commas. It also seem ponderous to me for keywords in the
-% |\keyword| list to be delimited by \verb+|+, so I make the author
-% responsible for keyword list punctuation.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\@kwds@jnl#1{%
- \def\@kwddlm{}%
- \@for\@kwd:=#1\do{%
- \@kwddlm
- \def\@kwddlm{\space\@keyworddelim\penalty\@m\space}%
- {\@kwd}%
- }%
-}%
-\def\@kwds#1{#1\relax}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \subsubsection{Automatically Triggering the Title}%
-% In order to accomodate the many different formatting options
-% for the title page, it is best for the user to
-% present the title block and then to
-% invoke the |\maketitle| command explicitly.
-%
-% The custom in V4.0 documents has been to give
-% the commands of the title block
-% as if they formatted the given material immediately---which they did.
-% But this defies the \LaTeX\ markup scheme in which those commands
-% are expected to act like ``data'' commands: they are legal
-% in the preamble (before |\begin{document}|).
-%
-% Coupled with the need to automatically switch between
-% one- and two-column page grids, it would be best if the
-% title block commands were to return to their nature
-% as ``data'' commands.
-%
-% An \aastex\ document will therefore begin with its
-% |\begin{document}| declaration and its title block
-% (which could legally appear in the preamble), followed
-% by an optional |\maketitle| command, succeeded by
-% optional |\tableofcontents| and similar commands,
-% succeeded by the body of the article, which
-% may begin with a sectioning command like |\section|,
-% or may even begin with paragraph text.
-%
-% In order to trigger at the start of paragraph text, we
-% install a hook into |\everypar|. This may fail under some
-% circumstances because of the violent way \LaTeX\ handles
-% this token register. (We hope for the best.)
-%
-% Given that the abstract is formatted as part of the
-% title page, it, too, must have the status of a
-% data command. However, its syntax as a \LaTeX\ environment
-% prevents a simple approach using |\appdef|.
-% Instead, we temporarily endow the |abstract|
-% environment with the ability to set type.
-%
-% The procedure |\everypar@hook| takes advantage
-% of a trick for returning to vertical mode, effectively
-% aborting the nascent paragraph. The only trace thereof
-% in the vertical list being the |\parskip| glue.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\AtBeginDocument{%
- \everypar{%
- \everypar@hook
- }%
-}%
-\def\everypar@hook{%
- \setbox\z@\lastbox\par\removelastskip
- \everypar{}%
- \maketitle@trigger
- \leavevmode
-}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% We use |\@startsection@hook| in |\@startsection| (see above).
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\@startsection@hook{\maketitle@trigger}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% We headpatch into the |listof|\dots\ procedures:
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\prepdef\tableofcontents{\listof@hook}%
-\prepdef\listoffigures{\listof@hook}%
-\prepdef\listoftables{\listof@hook}%
-\def\listof@hook{\maketitle@trigger}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\maketitle@disarm{%
- \global\let\maketitle@trigger\relax
- \global\let\@startsection@hook\@empty
- \global\let\listof@hook\@empty
- \global\let\everypar@hook\@empty
-}%
-\def\maketitle@trigger{%
- \maketitle
-}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-%
-% \subsection{Document Body}%
-% Herein are definitions of formatting procedures that occur in the body
-% of the article.
-%
-% \subsubsection{Footnotes}%
-%
-% The following code redefines a few things so that spacing in footnotes
-% is different than \LaTeX\ defaults. The adjustment to |\skip\footins|
-% increases
-% the amount of vertical space inserted before the |\footnoterule|.
-% The commented out definitions of |\@makefntext| give proper
-% indentation.
-% \begin{macro}{\footins}
-% \begin{macro}{\footnotesep}
-% \begin{macro}{\@makefntext}
-%
-% Style Note: in the two-column preprint style, these values are
-% different.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\setlength{\skip\footins}{4ex\@plus1ex\@minus.5ex}%
-\setlength\footnotesep{3ex}%
-%\long\def\@makefntext#1{\noindent\hb@xt@\z@{\hss$^{\@thefnmark}$}#1}
-%\long\def\@makefntext#1{\indent\hbox{$^{\@thefnmark}$}#1}
-\long\def\@makefntext@pptt#1{%
- \noindent
- \hbox\@to\z@{\hss$^{\@thefnmark}$}%
- #1%
-}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% FIXME: doublecheck the |\xdef|.
-% \begin{macro}{editornote}
-% \begin{macro}{\theeditornote}
-% \begin{macro}{\notetoeditor}
-% The |\notetoeditor| command puts text into the footnote area that
-% contains some
-% special instruction to the editor.
-% It places a superior ``En'' at the point in
-% the text where the note appears, then makes a footnote labelled
-% ``En NOTE TO EDITOR: <text>''
-% \begin{verbatim}
-% \notetoeditor{<text>}
-% \end{verbatim}
-% FIXME: cf. definition of |\footnote|.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\newcounter{editornote}%
-\def\theeditornote{{\rmfamily E}\arabic{editornote}}%
-\newcommand\notetoeditor[1]{%
- \stepcounter{editornote}%
- \begingroup
- \def\protect{\noexpand\protect\noexpand}%
- \xdef\@thefnmark{\theeditornote}%
- \endgroup
- \@footnotemark\@footnotetext{NOTE TO EDITOR: #1}%
-}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \subsubsection{Sections}%
-%
-% Modify the indentation behavior so that {\em all} paragraphs,
-% including those first after section heads, are indented.
-% This is consonant with the styles of many journals,
-% although it's non-standard typographic practice.
-%
-% Style Note: In the two-column preprint style, we
-% add simple logic to engage |\twocolumn| when the first |\section|
-% command is encountered if this has not been done already.
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\section}
-% \begin{macro}{\thesection}
-% Level-one head.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\renewcommand\section{%
- \@startsection{section}{1}%
- {\z@}{5ex\@plus.5ex}{1ex\@plus.2ex}{\normalsize\bfseries}%
-}%
-\def\thesection{\@arabic{\c@section}}%
-\def\clear@section@page{}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\subsection}
-% \begin{macro}{\thesubsection}
-% Level-two head.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\renewcommand\subsection{%
- \@startsection{subsection}{2}%
- {\z@}{5ex\@plus.5ex}{1ex\@plus.2ex}{\normalsize\bfseries}%
-}%
-\def\thesubsection{\thesection.\@arabic{\c@subsection}}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\subsubsection}
-% \begin{macro}{\thesubsubsection}
-% Level-three head.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\renewcommand\subsubsection{%
- \@startsection{subsubsection}{3}%
- {\z@}{5ex\@plus.5ex}{1ex\@plus.2ex}{\normalsize\itshape}%
-}%
-\def\thesubsubsection{\thesubsection.\@arabic{\c@subsubsection}}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\subsubsubsection}
-% \begin{macro}{\thesubsubsubsection}
-% Define sectioning command below |\subsubsection|
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand\subsubsubsection{%
- \@startsection{subsubsection}{4}%
- {\z@}{-15\p@\@plus-5\p@\@minus-2\p@}{5\p@}{\normalfont\normalsize\itshape}%
-}%
-\def\thesubsubsubsection{\thesubsubsection.\@arabic{\c@subsubsubsection}}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\theparagraph}
-% The run-in head.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\theparagraph{\thesubsubsection.\@arabic{\c@paragraph}}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\acknowledgments}
-% \begin{macro}{\acknowledgements}
-% For ApJ, acknowledgments are set off from main body text simply by
-% vertical space (no heading or type size change). I do the same for
-% the AAS manuscript style. For use in producing more polished output
-% for other journals, this macro might generate text saying
-% ``Acknowledg[e]ments''.
-%
-% An alternative spelling of the command is provided.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand\acknowledgments{\vskip 3ex\@plus.8ex\@minus.4ex}%
-\let\acknowledgements=\acknowledgments
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-%
-% \subsubsection{Equation Numbering}%
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\appendix}
-% Redefine |\appendix| so that equation numbers are prepended with
-% |\theappendix| number. Reset equation counter so that equation
-% numbers in the appendix begin again with 1.
-% The |\section| command is redefined by
-% |\appendix| to clear the equation counter for each section, so
-% that equation numbers will look like A1, A2,\dots, B1, B2,
-%
-% Note that the
-% |\appendix| command is {\em not} a sectioning command; it is merely
-% a delimiting markup between the main body of the paper and the
-% appendix. Sections in the appendix are still started with
-% |\section| commands.
-% etc.
-%
-% If we are in two-column mode at this point,
-% we switch back to one column and set a flag to remind us to
-% return to two-column mode upon entering the bibliography.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\renewcommand\appendix{%
- \par
- \if@twocolumn\@restonecoltrue\onecolumn\fi
- \setcounter{section}{\z@}%
- \setcounter{subsection}{\z@}%
- \setcounter{equation}{\z@}%
-%\setcounter{figure}{\z@}%
-%\setcounter{table}{\z@}%
-%\def\fnum@figure{Figure \Alph{section}\thefigure:}%
-%\def\fnum@table{Table \Alph{section}\thetable:}%
- \def\thesection{\Alph{section}}%
- \def\theequation{%
- %\hbox{\normalsize\Alph{section}\arabic{equation}}%
- \thesection\arabic{equation}%
- }%
- \@addtoreset{equation}{section}%
- \appendix@figtab@defs
- \def\section{%
- \@startsection
- {section}{1}{\z@}%
- {5ex\@plus.5ex}{1ex\@plus.2ex}{\normalsize\bfseries}%
- }%
-}%
-\let\appendix@figtab@defs\@empty
-\def\appendix@figtab@defs@pptt{}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{mathletters}
-% Define |mathletters| environment. This is a wrapper that goes
-% \emph{around} (outside of) |equation| or |eqnarray| environments.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\newcounter{cureqno}%
-\newenvironment{mathletters}{%
- \refstepcounter{equation}%
- \setcounter{cureqno}{\value{equation}}%
- \let\@curtheeqn\theequation
- \edef\@tempa{\theequation}%
- \expandafter\def
- \expandafter\theequation
- \expandafter{\@tempa\alph{equation}}%
- \setcounter{equation}{0}%
-}{%
- \let\theequation\@curtheeqn
- \setcounter{equation}{\value{cureqno}}%
-}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\eqnum}
-% The |\eqnum| command allows the author to override all automatic
-% equation marking schemes.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand\eqnum[1]{%
- \def\theequation{#1}%
- \let\@currentlabel\theequation
- \addtocounter{equation}{\m@ne}%
-}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% Here ends the code for the document class.
-% Hereinafter appears code that is common to
-% the document class and document style.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%</class>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \subsubsection{Bibliography}%
-% For the time being, I don't think
-% it would be a good idea to force an implementation based on BibTeX,
-% although I'll prepare for that eventuality by using the constructs and
-% general ideas of the \LaTeX\ |thebibliography| environment.
-% Adjustments have been made so that the |\cite|--|\bibitem| mechanism
-% can be used to cite references symbolically while maintaining proper
-% citation syntax within the paper; the author must create the citation
-% label for each reference in proper journal format in the |\bibitem|
-% command.
-% \begin{verbatim}
-% \begin{thebibliography}
-% \bibitem[label]{<texttag>}
-% \reference <bibliographic data>
-% \end{thebibliography}
-% \end{verbatim}
-%
-% Observe that the bibliographic data supplied by the author must also
-% conform to the standards of the journal. I have elected not to burden
-% authors with tedious \LaTeX\ commands which would require many curly
-% braces to delimit the bibliographic fields because many of the
-% journals I have targeted in this project have agreed to reduce
-% typographic overhead (bolding, italicizing, etc.) in reference lists.
-% (See Abt's editorial in ApJ 357.)
-% It is the responsibility of the author to get these fields in the
-% proper order with the correct punctuation; the information will be
-% typeset as is, i.e., in roman with no size or style changes.
-%
-% Macros are provided for many of the oft-referenced journals so that
-% authors may use the \LaTeX\ names rather than having to look up a
-% particular journal's
-% specific abbreviation. In principle, all the journals should be using
-% the same abbreviations, too, but I anticipate some changes in the
-% specific abbreviations before a set is finally settled on. As long as
-% these macros are kept up to date, authors need not be concerned about
-% such editorial changes.
-%
-% Corresponding with the non-BibTeX references environment and
-% |\reference| command for the reference list is the |\markcite|
-% command.
-% This can be used to identify in-text citations; in this case, the
-% author provides the actual citation text as opposed to the symbolic
-% tag.
-% The use of this is encouraged, even for journals where no special
-% formatting of citation call-outs is required; it is crucial for the
-% future use of on-line browsers.
-%
-% Note: |\markcite| is deprecated (V5.0) and has been eliminated.
-%
-% The entire bibliography section of code is incorporated into the
-% V4.1 document style.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*class|style>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{thebibliography}
-% \begin{macro}{\clear@thebibliography@page}
-% \begin{macro}{\thebib@list}
-% \begin{macro}{\thebib@list@pptt}
-%
-% Note on |\clear@thebibliography@page|: this procedure is nil except in
-% the manuscript substyle, where it does a |\clearpage|, and
-% the two-column preprint substyle, where it returns to two column mode.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\renewenvironment{thebibliography}[1]{%
- \clear@thebibliography@page
- \subsection*{REFERENCES}%
- \thebib@list
- \def\refpar{\relax}%
- \def\newblock{\hskip .11em\@plus.33em\@minus.07em}%
- \sloppy
- \clubpenalty4000
- \widowpenalty4000
- \sfcode`\.=1000\relax
-}{%
- \endlist
- \revtex@pageid
-}%
-\def\clear@thebibliography@page{}%
-\def\thebib@list{%
- \list{\null}{%
- \leftmargin 3em\labelwidth\z@\labelsep\z@\itemindent-\leftmargin
- \usecounter{enumi}%
- }%
-}%
-\def\thebib@list@pptt{%
- \list{\null}{%
- \leftmargin 1.2em\labelwidth\z@\labelsep\z@\itemindent-\leftmargin
- \usecounter{enumi}%
- }%
-}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{references}
-% It is not necessary to use the thebibliography environment.
-% This style defines a |references| environment that simply sets off the
-% list of references and adjusts spacing parameters.
-% It is not possible to use |\bibitem|s within the |references|
-% environment.
-% (The |\reference| command cannot be shortened to |\ref|;
-% |\ref| is used in standard \LaTeX\ for cross-referencing.)
-% \begin{verbatim}
-% \begin{references}
-% \reference <bibliographic data>
-% \end{references}
-% \end{verbatim}
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\newenvironment{references}{%
- \clear@thebibliography@page
- \subsection*{REFERENCES}%
- \bgroup
- \setlength\parindent\z@
- \setlength\parskip\itemsep
- \let\refpar\references@refpar
-}{%
- \refpar
- \egroup
- \revtex@pageid
-}%
-\def\references@refpar@mss{%
- \par\setlength\hangindent{3em}\hangafter\@ne
-}%
-\def\references@refpar@pptt{%
- \par\setlength\hangindent{1.2em}\hangafter\@ne
-}%
-\let\references@refpar\references@refpar@mss
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\reference}
-% \begin{macro}{\@reference}
-% List of references.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand\reference{%
- \@ifnextchar\bgroup{\@reference}{%
- \@latexerr{Missing key on reference command}{%
- Each reference command should have a key corresponding
- to a \protect\markcite\space somewhere in the text
- }%
- }%
-}%
-\def\@reference#1{\relax\refpar}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\markcite}
-%
-% The |\markcite| command is now deprecated and will give
-% a diagnostic message in the \TeX\ log (NB: without halting \TeX).
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand\markcite[1]{\remove@command\markcite}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\@biblabel}
-% \begin{macro}{\@cite}
-% Formatting choices for citations.
-%
-% FIXME: doublecheck compatibility with natbib
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \def\@biblabel#1{\relax}%
-%\def\@cite#1#2{({#1\if@tempswa , #2\fi})}%
- \def\@cite#1#2{#1\if@tempswa , #2\fi}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% This completes the section of code incorporated into the
-% V4.1 document style.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%</class|style>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-%
-% Hereinafter appears code for the document class.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*class>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \subsubsection{Tables and Figures}%
-%
-% \begin{macro}{topnumber}
-% Explicitly set the counter for the number of floats allowed at the
-% top of the page
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\setcounter{topnumber}{7}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\tablenotemark}
-% \begin{macro}{\tablenotetext}
-% Footnotes for tables are to be identified with lower case alphabetics,
-% rather than numeric. |\tablenotemark| and |\tablenotetext| commands
-% are provided analogous to |\footnotemark| and |\footnotetext|, but
-% with the identifier {\em required}, like |\altaffilmark| and
-% |\altaffiltext|.
-% The |\tablenotetext| must be specified before the |\end{table}|,
-% since |\end{table}| displays it.
-%
-% \begin{verbatim}
-% \tablenotemark{<tag letter(s)>}
-% \tablenotetext{<alpha tag>}{<text>}
-% \end{verbatim}
-%
-% Note that \m{tag letter} is identified with \m{alpha tag}
-% for corresponding text.
-% It is the
-% responsibility of the author to get the correspondence correct.
-%
-% The table footnotes are coupled to the table in which they occur,
-% rather than being associated with a particular page, and they are
-% printed with the table (relatively close to the caption) instead of
-% appearing at the extreme bottom of the page.
-% This is done to ensure that the notes wind up on the same page as the
-% table, since tables are floats and can migrate
-% from one page to another. There is the additional benefit that the
-% notes are unambiguously attached to the proper table, which is what is
-% required in the event that the editorial requirement of one table only
-% per page is ever changed to permit several tables per page.
-%
-% Footnotes are \emph{not} supported for figures.
-%
-% Here we give the formatting procedures for the mark, the note, and
-% the sequence of notes as a whole.
-% The code for plano tables provides alternative procedures,
-% albeit a common queueing mechanism is used.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\newskip\tnotemarkskip
-\tnotemarkskip7pt
-\newdimen\@abovenoteskip%
-\newcommand\tablenotemark[1]{%
-\rlap{$^{\mathrm #1}$}\hskip\tnotemarkskip\ignorespaces% Fixed: the space after notemark
-}%
-\def\@tablenotetext#1#2{%
- \vspace{.5ex}%
- {\noindent\llap{$^{#1}$}#2\par}%
-}%
-\def\@tablenotes#1{%
- \par
- \vspace{4.5ex}\footnoterule\vspace{.5ex}%
- {\footnotesize#1}%
-}%
-\def\@tablenotes@pptt#1{%
- \par
- \vspace{3.2ex}\footnoterule\vspace{.4ex}%
- {\footnotesize#1}%
-}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\tablenotetext}
-% \begin{macro}{\spew@tblnotes}
-%
-% The command |\tablenotetext| enqueues the table note text.
-%
-% The tablenotes are
-% dequeued onto the vertical list by |\spew@tblnotes|, which is
-% executed at the end of table processing.
-% Note that |\spew@tblnotes| also clears the |\tblnote@list|.
-%
-% Praise and honor are due to Kresten Krab Thorup (krab@iesd.auc.dk) for
-% posting ftn.sty to the Usenet, from which I drew the technique.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\AtBeginDocument{%
- \let\tblnote@list\@empty
-}%
-%
-\newcommand\tablenotetext[2]{\ifdim\@abovenoteskip=0pt\global\@abovenoteskip=20pt\fi%
- \appgdef\tblnote@list{\hsize\pt@width\leftskip\z@\rightskip\z@%
- \@tablenotetext{#1}{\parfillskip\z@ plus1fil#2\endgraf}}%
-}%
-%
-\def\spew@tblnotes{%
- \@ifx@empty\tblnote@list{}{%
- \@tablenotes{\tblnote@list}%
- \global\let\tblnote@list\@empty
- }%
-}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{table}
-% \begin{macro}{table*}
-% Patch |\spew@tblnotes| into the end-processing for tables:
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\prepdef\endtable{\spew@tblnotes}%
-\expandafter\prepdef\csname endtable*\endcsname{\spew@tblnotes}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\tableline}
-% Add a |\tableline| command for use in tabular environments. This
-% command produces the horizontal rule(s) between the column headings
-% and the body of the table.
-% Authors are discouraged from using any |\hlines| themselves,
-% and are typically forbidden from using vertical rules by editors.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\let\tableline=\hline
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\@makecaption}
-% |\@makecaption| determines formatting for figure and table captions.
-% For manuscripts, all captions should be set as flushleft paragraphs.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\long\def\@makecaption#1#2{\vskip 2ex\noindent#1\ #2\par}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\tablenum}
-% \begin{macro}{\figurenum}
-% The |\tablenum| and |\figurenum| commands allows the author to
-% override all automatic table- and figure marking schemes.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand\tablenum[1]{%
- \def\thetable{#1}%
- \let\@currentlabel\thetable
- \addtocounter{table}{\m@ne}%
-}%
-\newcommand\figurenum[1]{%
- \def\thefigure{#1}%
- \let\@currentlabel\thefigure
- \addtocounter{figure}{\m@ne}%
-}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\placetable}
-% \begin{macro}{\placefigure}
-% \begin{macro}{\placeplate}
-% \begin{macro}{\@place@float}
-% Usually, a float (table, figure, or plate) is placed in an article at
-% or near the location that it is first mentioned.
-% However, there are times when an author wishes to refer to a float
-% {\em before} it is placed, for instance in an introduction.
-% The editors and typesetters however, may
-% have trouble deciding just where the float should be placed. The
-% following commands allow the author to tell the editor and publisher
-% exactly where they want to put the item.
-% It requires that a |\label{|\m{key}|}| command be
-% used in the markup for the float
-% (note that |\label{}| should appear {\em after} any |\caption|
-% command, so that the numbering will be correct).
-%
-% \begin{verbatim}
-% \placetable{<key>}
-% \placefigure{<key>}
-% \placeplate{<key>}
-% \end{verbatim}
-%
-% Style Note: In the preprint style, the command emits no text;
-% in the manuscript style, it places a note to the editors in the body
-% of the text.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand\placetable{\@place@float{TABLE}}%
-\newcommand\placefigure{\@place@float{FIGURE}}%
-\newcommand\placeplate{\@place@float{PLATE}}%
-\def\@place@float#1#2{%
- \vspace{0.5ex}%
- \begin{center}EDITOR: PLACE #1 \ref{#2} HERE.\end{center}%
- \vspace{0.5ex}%
-}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\figcaption}
-% \begin{macro}{\@figcaption}
-% \begin{macro}{\@xfigcaption}
-% Sometimes the figures are not included in the text, only the figure
-% captions. To facilitate this, a |\figcaption| command is
-% provided, which formats the figure captions as needed, and
-% increments the figure counter automatically.
-% The optional argument allows the markup to include, e.g. the filename
-% of the external figure.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand\figcaption{\@testopt{\@xfigcaption}{}}%
-\def\@xfigcaption[#1]#2{{\def\@captype{figure}\caption{#2}}}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\dummytable}
-% Similarly, we sometimes want to put a placeholder in a document
-% corresponding to a plano table (published elsewhere) so that cross
-% references, etc. work properly with autoincremented counters.
-% Thus, for example, one can do:
-% \begin{verbatim}
-% \dummytable
-% \label{mytable}
-% \end{verbatim}
-% in the document, and refer to this table by number.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand\dummytable{\refstepcounter{table}}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-%
-% Here ends the code for the document class.
-% Hereinafter appears code that is common to
-% the document class and document style.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%</class>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \subsubsection{Plano Tables}%
-%
-% Plano tables are camera-ready pages that are included in a typeset
-% article the same way as line drawings, graphs, and other camera-ready
-% art, i.e., as ``planographic'' figures. There are desirable
-% properties for a formatter to have that are somewhat above and beyond
-% \LaTeX\'s |tabular| environment that would facilitate the creation of
-% such tables.
-% Among these are breaking long tables across pages, using footnotes
-% in a table, specifying comments and references for tables, etc.
-%
-% Note for V5.0:
-% Plano tables are no longer supported, but the capabilities of
-% the |deluxetable| are still part of \aastex.
-% What this means for the user is that all tables should be coded
-% in \LaTeX, whether using the standard \LaTeX\ mechanisms or
-% using the enhancements of |deluxetable|, however, the
-% appearance of the table in the printed journal will be under the control
-% of the publisher and not the author.
-%
-% Style Note:
-% ApJ ``standard'' widths for tables are 21 and 42 picas, which are the
-% widths of single and double columns in the journal. For wide tables,
-% any width less than 42 is acceptable, although using widths of 30pc
-% and up will result in better appearance when centering. Landscape
-% orientation is acceptable, and I have provided the pseudo-option
-% |\ptlandscape| that resets the page dimensions; the author is still
-% responsible for running the local DVI translator with the proper
-% parameters so that landscape pages emerge from the laser printer.
-%
-% Style Note:
-% AJ has no ``standard'' widths for camera-ready tables,
-% they simply need to be narrower than the page.
-% Landscape orientation is acceptable,
-% and I have provided the pseudo-option |\ptlandscape| that resets the
-% page dimensions; the author is still responsible for running the
-% local DVI translator with the proper parameters so that landscape
-% pages actually emerge from the laser printer.
-%
-% What follows was inspired by supertab.sty by Theo Jurriens, 1988.
-%
-% We define descriptive markup for table elements.
-% Observe that the formatting is embedded in the macro definitions
-% so that the author doesn't need to be concerned about stylistic
-% nuances.
-%
-% \begin{verbatim}
-% \tablecaption{<text>}
-% \tablehead{<text>}
-% \colhead{<heading>}
-% \tabletail{<text>}
-% \tablewidth{<dimen>}
-% \tablecolumns{<num>}
-% \tableheadfrac{<num>}
-% \rotate
-% \end{verbatim}
-%
-% The entire deluxetable section of code is incorporated into the
-% V4.1 document style.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*class|style>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\pt@box}
-% \begin{macro}{\pt@width}
-% \begin{macro}{\pt@column}
-% \begin{macro}{\pt@nlines}
-% \begin{macro}{\pt@ncol}
-% \begin{macro}{\pt@page}
-% Allocate registers for use in |deluxetable| (plano) tables.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\newbox\pt@box
-\newdimen\pt@width
-\newcount\pt@line
-\newcount\pt@column
-\newcount\pt@nlines
-\newcount\pt@ncol
-\newcount\pt@page
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\colhead}
-% \begin{macro}{\tablecolumns}
-% \begin{macro}{\tablecaption}
-% \begin{macro}{\tablehead}
-% \begin{macro}{\tabletail}
-% \begin{macro}{\tablewidth}
-% \begin{macro}{\tableheadfrac}
-% See |deluxetable| environment definition for |\pt@addcol|.
-% The definition was moved so that |\tablecolumns| only affects the current
-% table
-%
-% FIXME: document syntax of |\tablehead{\colhead{<text>}}|
-% and alternative of using |\tablecolumns|.
-% Latter was added to assist Evan's translator, therefore is
-% highly recommended.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand\colhead[1]{\multicolumn{1}{c}{#1}\pt@addcol}%
-%
-\gdef\pt@footnotesize{\string\footnotesize}
-\gdef\pt@scriptsize{\string\scriptsize}
-\newcommand\tabletypesize[1]{\def\pt@typesize{#1}\gdef\@typesize{\string#1}
- \ifx\@typesize\pt@footnotesize
- \def\pt@headfrac{\pt@headfrac@ass@footnotesize}
- \else
- \ifx\@typesize\pt@scriptsize
- \def\pt@headfrac{\pt@headfrac@ass@scriptsize}
- \else
- \def\pt@headfrac{\pt@headfrac@ass@normalsize}%
- \fi
-\fi
-}% Access to different type sizes in deluxetable
-\def\pt@typesize{}%
-%
-\newcommand\tablecolumns[1]{%
- \pt@column=#1\relax%
- \pt@ncol=#1\relax%
- \global\let\pt@addcol\@empty%
-}%
-%
-\newcommand\tablecaption[1]{\gdef\pt@caption{\tnotemarkskip8pt#1}}%Fixed: space after mark
-\newcommand\tablehead[1]{%
- \gdef\pt@head{%
- \hline\hline
- \relax\\[-1.7ex]%
- #1\hskip\tabcolsep
- \\[.7ex]%
- \hline
- \relax\\[-1.5ex]%
- }%
-}%
-\def\tablehead@aj#1{%
- \gdef\pt@head{%
- #1\hskip\tabcolsep
- \\[.7ex]%
- \hline
- \relax\\[-1.5ex]%
- }%
-}%
-\newif\if@pt@rot
-\newcommand\rotate{\@pt@rottrue}%
-\newcommand\tabletail[1]{\gdef\pt@tail{#1}}%
-\newcommand\tablewidth[1]{\pt@width=#1\relax}%
-\newcommand\tableheadfrac[1]{\gdef\pt@headfrac{#1}}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% Initialization:
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\AtBeginDocument{%
- \let\pt@caption\@empty%
- \let\pt@head\@empty%
- \let\pt@tail\@empty%
- \pt@width\textwidth%
- %\def\pt@headfrac{.1}%
- \def\pt@headfrac{\pt@headfrac@ass@normalsize}% initialize typesize to consider
-}% % while calculating rows
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\pt@calcnlines}
-% Calculate the number of tabular rows that will fit in the body of the
-% table. The height of the table body and the number of lines are
-% calculated thus:
-% \makeatletter
-% \begin{eqnarray}
-% \mbox{\texttt{\@backslashchar bodyheight}}&
-% {}={}&
-% \mbox{\texttt{\@backslashchar textheight}}
-% \times (1 - \mbox{\texttt{\@backslashchar pt@headfrac}})\nonumber\\
-% \mbox{\texttt{\@backslashchar pt@nlines}}&
-% {}={}&
-% \mbox{\texttt{\@backslashchar bodyheight}}
-% / (\mbox{\texttt{\@backslashchar arraystretch}}
-% \times \mbox{\texttt{\@backslashchar baselineskip}})\nonumber
-% \end{eqnarray}
-% \makeatother
-%
-% The row height can be seen to be valid algebraically if one examines
-% the definitions for |\strutbox|, |\@setstrut|, and |\@array|.
-% I could eliminate
-% this calculation, as well as its attendant parameters, if it were
-% possible to determine the accumulated height of the |\halign| box as
-% \TeX\ goes along.
-%
-% Art says: of course this is not possible in \LaTeX\
-% without supplementing it with a specialized output routine.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%
-\newdimen\tabbaseskip%
-%
-\def\pt@calcnlines{%
- \begingroup%
- \if@pt@rot\textheight\textwidth\fi% rotate tables
- \pt@typesize% Type sizes in deluxetable
- \@tempdima\pt@headfrac\textheight
- \@tempdimb\textheight\advance\@tempdimb by -\@tempdima
- \@tempdima\arraystretch\baselineskip
- \global\tabbaseskip\baselineskip
- \divide\@tempdimb by\@tempdima
- \global\pt@nlines\@tempdimb
- \endgroup
-}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\pt@tabacol}
-% Set |\@acol|
-% to |\pt@tabacol|, which is called when building the preamble for the
-% |\halign| (assuming the first column format specification is |l|,
-% which it should be for ApJ tables) so that |\tabskip| within the table
-% is set to |\fill|.
-%
-% Doing so permits us to toggle between natural and fixed-width
-% tables without requiring the user to change markup. Note that by
-% forcing |\tabskip| always to be |\fill|, I pretty well nullify any
-% |@{\hspace}| commands the user puts in the template, but this
-% environment is for people who don't want to think about that sort of
-% stuff anyway.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\pt@tabacol{%
- \edef\@preamble{\@preamble\hskip\tabcolsep\tabskip\fill}%
-}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\pt@tmpcapwidth}
-% \begin{macro}{\@makecaption@plano}
-%
-% Permit different identifying strings, one for the first page of the
-% table and one for continuation pages. \LaTeX's |\fnum@table| is set
-% to one or the other automatically in the environment.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\newdimen\pt@tmpcapwidth
-\long\def\@makecaption@plano#1#2{%
- \@ifdim{\pt@width>\z@}{%
- \pt@tmpcapwidth\pt@width
- }{%
- \pt@tmpcapwidth\hsize
- }%
-%\center
- \parbox{\pt@tmpcapwidth}{%
- \@make@caption@text{#1}{#2}%
- }%
- \endcenter
-}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\fnum@ptable}
-% \begin{macro}{\fnum@ptablecont}
-% \begin{macro}{\@make@caption@text}
-% \begin{macro}{\@makecaption@plano@cont}
-%
-% The default formatting procedures for
-% plano table captions.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\fnum@ptable{Table \thetable}%
-\def\fnum@ptablecont{Table \thetable---{\rmfamily Continued}}%
-\long\def\@make@caption@text#1#2{%
- \center\rmfamily#1.\quad#2\endcenter
-}%
-\long\def\@makecaption@plano@cont#1#2{%
- \center\rmfamily#1\endcenter
- \vskip 2.5ex
-}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\fnum@ptablecont@pptt}
-% \begin{macro}{\@make@caption@text@pptt}
-% \begin{macro}{\@makecaption@plano@cont@pptt}
-% Formatting procedures for
-% plano table captions in the
-% preprint style.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\fnum@ptablecont@pptt{Table \thetable---{\itshape Continued}}%
-\long\def\@make@caption@text@pptt#1#2{%
- \center\sc#1\\[.5ex]#2\endcenter
-}%
-\long\def\@makecaption@plano@cont@pptt#1#2{%
- \center\sc#1\endcenter
- \vskip 1.5ex
-}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\fnum@ptable@apj}
-% \begin{macro}{\fnum@ptablecont@apj}
-% \begin{macro}{\@make@caption@text@apj}
-% \begin{macro}{\@makecaption@plano@cont@apj}
-% Formatting procedures for
-% plano table captions in the
-% ApJ style.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\fnum@ptable@apj{TABLE \thetable}%
-\def\fnum@ptablecont@apj{TABLE \thetable---{\itshape Continued}}%
-\long\def\@make@caption@text@apj#1#2{%
- \center\Large\sc#1\\[.5ex]#2\endcenter
-}%
-\long\def\@makecaption@plano@cont@apj#1#2{%
- \center\Large\sc#1\endcenter
- \vskip 1.5ex
-}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\fnum@ptable@aj}
-% \begin{macro}{\fnum@ptablecont@aj}
-% \begin{macro}{\@make@caption@text@aj}
-% \begin{macro}{\@makecaption@plano@cont@aj}
-% Formatting procedures for
-% plano table captions in the
-% AJ style.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\fnum@ptable@aj{Table \thetable.}%
-\def\fnum@ptablecont@aj{Table \thetable.\space{\rmfamily (continued)}}%
-\long\def\@make@caption@text@aj#1#2{%
- \center\large{\sc#1}\space#2\endcenter
-}%
-\long\def\@makecaption@plano@cont@aj#1#2{%
- \center\large{\sc#1}\endcenter
- \vskip 1.5ex
-}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{deluxetable}
-% \begin{macro}{planotable}
-% \begin{macro}{\startdata}
-% \begin{macro}{\enddata}
-%
-% Implementation Note:
-% It is desirable for the last portion of
-% a multi-page table to be |\topinsert|ed, rather than |\midinsert|ed.
-% At the moment, this doesn't happen. It's not straightforward to
-% make that preference known at the {\em end} of table processing.
-%
-% Note the context switch that provides for alternative formatting for
-% table notes in plano tables.
-%
-% In the start processing of |deluxetable|, the first order
-% of business is to put away the argument, which is
-% just like the argument of \LaTeX's |tabular|.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\newbox\spew@tblnotesbox%
-\newbox\restof@tblnotesbox%
-\global\newdimen\noteheight%
-\global\newdimen\pt@tabnoteminht%
-\global\pt@tabnoteminht=0pt%
-\newenvironment{deluxetable}[1]{%
-% Fixed: table immediately after the title
- \maketitle
- \def\pt@format{\string#1}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% Next come the custom modifications to |tabular|'s behavior,
-% the row terminator that allows pagebreaks and
-% the alignment preamble parser that always sets
-% |\tabskip| to |\hfill|.
-% Note: |\nl| and |\nextline| are now deprecated.
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \let\@acol\pt@tabacol%
- \let\@tabularcr\@ptabularcr%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% Now come the context switches that control how
-% table notes are formatted.
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \let\@tablenotetext\@ptablenotetext%
- \let\@tablenotes\@ptablenotes%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% The remainder of the start processing simply initializes
-% counters that are used in |deluxetable| processing.
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \global\pt@ncol\z@%
- \global\pt@column\z@%
- \global\pt@page\@ne%
- \gdef\pt@addcol{\global\advance\pt@ncol\@ne}%
- \if@pt@rot\leavevmode\fi%
-}{%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% End processing for |deluxetable| entails
-% formatting the table notes, outputting the diagnostic
-% message for the last table page and wrapping up the float.
-%
-% Finding the available space for tablenotes below the table body
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \ifx\@typesize\pt@footnotesize%%% considering the table typesize in calculation
- \global\pt@tabnoteminht=\pt@notemin@footnote\baselineskip
- \else
- \ifx\@typesize\pt@scriptsize
- \global\pt@tabnoteminht=\pt@notemin@script\baselineskip
- \else
- \global\pt@tabnoteminht=\pt@notemin@normal\baselineskip
- \fi
- \fi
- \global\advance\pt@tabnoteminht-\@abovenoteskip
- \global\@abovenoteskip=0pt
- \setbox\spew@tblnotesbox\vbox{\spew@tblnotes}%
- %%
- %% Finding the available space for tablenotes in current page
- \if@pt@rot\global\noteheight\textwidth\else\global\noteheight\textheight\fi%
- \global\advance\noteheight-\ht\captionbox%
- \global\advance\noteheight-\pt@line\tabbaseskip
- \if@twocolumn %% tables in preprint2 style
- \ifx\@typesize\pt@scriptsize
- \global\advance\noteheight-6\baselineskip%
- \else
- \global\advance\noteheight-3\baselineskip%
- \fi
- \else
- \global\advance\noteheight-2\baselineskip%
- \fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-%%
-%% Print the maximum lines of notes below table within current page
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \ifdim\noteheight<\pt@tabnoteminht% if not possible to keep the minimum two lines
- \global\noteheight=0pt% % the whole notes move to next page.
- \global\setbox\restof@tblnotesbox\vbox{\unvbox\spew@tblnotesbox}%
- \else
- %%
- %% if possible two lines, check the length of notes
- \ifdim\ht\spew@tblnotesbox>\noteheight%
- % Print maximum notes in available space and store the remaining part
- \hbox\@to\hsize{\hfil\vsplit\spew@tblnotesbox to \noteheight\hfil}%
- \global\setbox\restof@tblnotesbox\vbox{\unvbox\spew@tblnotesbox}%
- \else%
- % Print the whole notes in current page.
- \vbox{\hbox\@to\hsize{\hfil\box\spew@tblnotesbox\hfil}}%
- \fi
- \fi
- \typeout@deluxetable%
- \endcenter%
- \end@plano@float%
-% \end{macrocode}
-%%
-%% Print the remaining tablenotes into new page(s).
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%% print each page until the remaining box empty.
- \loop\ifvoid\restof@tblnotesbox\else%
- \clearpage
- %%
- %% check whether the remaining box is a full/partial page
- \ifdim\ht\restof@tblnotesbox<\if@pt@rot\hsize\else\vsize\fi%
- \vbox to \textheight{\if@pt@rot\vfill\fi\hbox to \textwidth{\if@pt@rot\else\hfil\fi
- \if@pt@rot\rotatebox{90}{\box\restof@tblnotesbox}
- \else{\box\restof@tblnotesbox}\fi\hfil}\vfill}%
- \else%
- \vbox to \textheight{\vfill\hbox to \textwidth{\hfil%
- \if@pt@rot\rotatebox{90}{\vsplit\restof@tblnotesbox to \textwidth}
- \else{\vsplit\restof@tblnotesbox to \textheight}\fi\hfil}\vfill}%
- \fi%
- \clearpage
- \repeat%
- \addtocounter{table}{\m@ne}%
- \tabletypesize{\normalsize}%
-}%
-\let@environment{planotable}{deluxetable}%
-%
-\def\@plano@float{% Invoked by \startdata
- \begingroup%
- \if@pt@rot\columnwidth\textheight\fi% Deluxetable table \rotate
- \@plano@float@{table}%
-}%
-\def\end@plano@float{% S/B invoked by \enddata; instead by \enddeluxetable
- \end@plano@float@\endgroup}%
-\def\@plano@float@{\@float}% Extra layer of abstraction for float processing
-\def\end@plano@float@{%
-\end@float}%
-\newdimen\firsttabskip
-\firsttabskip-\hsize
-\appdef\@endfloatbox{%
-\if@pt@rot
-\global\setbox\@currbox\vbox{\hskip\firsttabskip\global\firsttabskip\z@%
-\rotatebox{90}{\box\@currbox}}\else\global\firsttabskip\z@\fi%
-% Fix the roate table on first page
-}%
-%
-\def\typeout@deluxetable@mss{%
- \typeout{%
- Table \thetable\space has been set to width \the\pt@width
- }%
-}%
-\def\typeout@deluxetable@ppt{%
- \typeout{%
- Page \the\pt@page \space of table \thetable\space has been set to
- width \the\pt@width\space with \the\pt@nlines\space lines per page
- }%
-}%
-% FIXME: default setting in case of unknown substyle
-\let\typeout@deluxetable\typeout@deluxetable@mss
-\newcommand\startdata{%
- \pt@calcnlines
- \@ifdim{\pt@width>\z@}{%
- \def\@halignto{\@to\pt@width}%
- }{%
- \def\@halignto{}%
- }%
- \let\fnum@table=\fnum@ptable
- \let\@makecaption\@makecaption@plano
- \global\pt@line\z@
- \start@pt@tabular
- \after@startdata
-}%
-%
-\global\newbox\captionbox
-\def\start@pt@tabular{\par%
- \@plano@float
- \center
- \expandafter\caption\expandafter{\pt@caption}%
- \global\setbox\captionbox\vbox{\expandafter\caption\expandafter{\pt@caption}}
- \pt@typesize% Type sizes in deluxetable
- \expandafter\@tabular\expandafter{\pt@format}%
-}%
-%
-\def\set@pt@box#1{\setbox\pt@box}%
-\def\after@startdata{\pt@head}%
-\def\after@startdata@aj{\hline\hline\relax\\[-1.7ex]\pt@head}%
-\def\enddata{%
- \crcr
- \noalign{\vskip .7ex}%
- \before@enddata%
- \endtabular%
- \setbox\pt@box\lastbox%
- \pt@width\wd\pt@box
- \hbox \@to \hsize{\hfil\box\pt@box\hfil}%
- \ignorespaces}%
-\def\before@enddata{\hline}%
-\def\before@enddata@aj{\hline\hline}%
-\def\nl{\substitute@command\nl\\}%
-\def\nextline{\substitute@command\nextline\\}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\@ptabularcr}
-% \begin{macro}{\@argptabularcr}
-% A different row terminator is needed so that the line counter
-% can be checked prior to adding the line to the alignment box.
-% This command is syntactically equivalent to |\\|.
-%
-% User Note: This code is syntactically the same as the \LaTeX\
-% code for |\@tabularcr|, however the latter semantically ignores
-% its *-form.
-% In the case of |\@ptabularcr|, the * suppresses the possibility
-% of a page break.
-%
-% Implementation Note: This code, like |\@tabularcr| relies on the
-% idiom |{\ifnum0=`}\fi|, an obscure construction that is explained
-% by the \TeX book on pages 240 and 385--386.
-% The need for this construct is the case where a |\\| is immediately
-% followed by a |&| or a |\cr|. The construct |\ifnum0=`{\fi}| undoes
-% the effect of the first.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\@ptabularcr{%
- {\ifnum0=`}\fi% A klootch just in case the next token is & or \cr
- \@ifstar{%
- \@testopt{\@argptabularcr\@empty}\z@skip%
- }{%
- \@testopt{\@argptabularcr\ptable@@split}\z@skip%
- }%
-}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% Recalculating the lines per page if any optional spacing between rows
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\newdimen\pt@reduceline
-\newdimen\extra@vspace
-\extra@vspace\z@
-\def\@xargptarraycr#1{\@tempdima #1%
- \global\advance\extra@vspace\@tempdima% % adding the optional spaces
- \advance\@tempdima\dp \@arstrutbox%
- \vrule \@height\z@ \@depth\@tempdima \@width\z@%
- \global\pt@reduceline\arraystretch\tabbaseskip% total lines to be reduced
- \@whilenum\pt@reduceline<\extra@vspace% % reducing the excess lines%
- \do{%
- \global\advance\extra@vspace-\pt@reduceline%
- \global\advance\pt@line1
- }%
-\cr}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\@argptabularcr#1[#2]{%
- \ifnum0=`{\fi}% To undo the effect of the klootch.
- \@ifdim{#2>\z@}{%
- \unskip\@xargptarraycr{#2}%
- }{%
- \@yargarraycr{#2}%
- }\ptable@split#1%
-}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\ptable@split}
-% \begin{macro}{\ptable@@split}
-% \begin{macro}{\before@suspendpt}
-% \begin{macro}{\before@resumept}
-% \begin{macro}{\before@suspendpt@aj}
-% \begin{macro}{\before@resumept@aj}
-% \begin{macro}{\typeout@pt@nl@ppt}
-% \begin{macro}{\typeout@pt@nl@mss}
-% \begin{macro}{\typeout@pt@nl@aj}
-% The decision to break the table is made by |\ptable@split|,
-% which does its calculations inside a |\noalign|,
-% a trick I got from William Baxter.
-% Note that if the *-form of the |\\| was used,
-% the token thrown by |\aftergroup| is simply |\@empty|,
-% regardless of what the line count is;
-% this is how we prevent a pagebreak at this line.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\ptable@split#1{%
- \noalign{%
- \global\advance\pt@line\@ne%
- \@ifnum{\pt@line<\pt@nlines}{}{%
- \aftergroup#1%
- }%
- }%
-}%
-\def\ptable@@split{%
- \before@suspendpt%
- \endtabular%
- \setbox\pt@box\lastbox%
- \pt@width\wd\pt@box\box\pt@box%
- \typeout@pt@nl%
- \global\advance\pt@page\@ne%
- \endcenter%
- \end@plano@float%
- \clearpage
- \global\extra@vspace\z@
- \addtocounter{table}{-2}%
- \let\fnum@table=\fnum@ptablecont%
- \let\@makecaption\@makecaption@plano@cont%
- \global\pt@ncol=\pt@column% Either 0 or value of \tablecolumns
- \global\pt@line\z@%
- \start@pt@tabular%
- \before@resumept%
- \pt@head%
-}%
-\def\before@suspendpt{}%
-\def\before@resumept{}%
-\def\before@suspendpt@aj{\@tabularcr\noalign{\vskip .7ex}\hline}%
-\def\before@resumept@aj{\hline\relax\@tabularcr[-1.7ex]}%
-\def\typeout@pt@nl@ppt{%
- \typeout{%
- Page \the\pt@page\space of table \thetable\space has been set to
- width \the\pt@width
- }%
-}%
-\def\typeout@pt@nl@mss{%
- \typeout{%
- Page \the\pt@page\space of table \thetable\space has been set to
- width \the\pt@width\space with \the\pt@nlines\space lines per page
- }%
-}%
-\def\typeout@pt@nl@aj{%
- \typeout{%
- Table \thetable\space has been set to
- width \the\pt@width\space with \the\pt@nlines\space lines per page
- }%
-}%
-\let\typeout@pt@nl\typeout@pt@nl@mss
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\tablevspace}
-% \begin{macro}{\tablebreak}
-% Author markup commands for planotable environment line breaks.
-%
-% In version 4.0, it was necessary to use |\nl| or |\nextline| instead
-% of |\\| and to employ an alternative mechanism for introducing extra
-% vertical space:
-% \begin{verbatim}
-% \nl == \nextline Used in place of LaTeX's \\
-% \tablevspace{<dimen>}
-% \tablebreak
-% \end{verbatim}
-%
-% In this version of \aastex\, the user can simply employ \LaTeX's |\\|
-% as per usual.
-% The user can supply an optional argument to govern the vertical
-% spacing as usual, and the *-form prevents a pagebreak.
-%
-% Consequently, |\nl|, |\nextline|, and |\tablevspace| are now deprecated.
-%
-% Note that there is a significant problem with the |\tablevspace| command that
-% recommends against its use:
-% if the table splits at that point, the extra vertical space
-% will fall at the top of the next page's table.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand\tablevspace[1]{\substitute@command\tablevspace\\[#1]}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% In order to force a |deluxetable| to split (over pages), the user
-% gives the |\tablebreak| command.
-%
-% Art says: As a means of controlling page breaks,
-% I prefer to see the user employ the *-form of the
-% row terminator |\\| to prevent the indicated line
-% from splitting from the next line.
-% Besides, there is a drawback in using |\tablebreak|, namely
-% that it is syntactically different from |\\|, and
-% unlike any extant \LaTeX\ capability.
-% The ``\LaTeX\ way'' of forcing a page break would be
-% to use the |\pagebreak| or |\newpage| commands.
-% So I deprecate |\tablebreak|.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand\tablebreak{\cr\ptable@@split}%\\{\cr\ptable@@split}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\cutinhead}
-% \begin{macro}{\cutinhead@ppt}
-% \begin{macro}{\sidehead}
-% We have some specialty heads that are sometimes wanted in tables.
-% Art says: Why do these use |\@ptabularcr|?
-% \begin{verbatim}
-% \cutinhead{<text>}
-% \sidehead{<text>}
-% \end{verbatim}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand\cutinhead[1]{%
- \noalign{\vskip 1.5ex}%
- \hline
- \@ptabularcr
- \noalign{\vskip -4ex}%
- \multicolumn{\pt@ncol}{c}{#1}%
- \@ptabularcr
- \noalign{\vskip .8ex}%
- \hline
- \@ptabularcr
- \noalign{\vskip -2ex}%
-}%
-\def\cutinhead@ppt#1{%
- \noalign{\vskip 1.5ex}%
- \hline
- \@ptabularcr
- \noalign{\vskip -2ex}% Style Note: in apj, it is -1.5ex
- \multicolumn{\pt@ncol}{c}{#1}%
- \@ptabularcr
- \noalign{\vskip .8ex}%
- \hline
- \@ptabularcr
- \noalign{\vskip -2ex}%
-}%
-\newcommand\sidehead[1]{%
- \noalign{\vskip 1.5ex}%
- \multicolumn{\pt@ncol}{@{\hskip\z@}l}{#1}%
- \@ptabularcr
- \noalign{\vskip .5ex}%
-}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\@ptablenotetext}
-% \begin{macro}{\@ptablenotes}
-%
-% Here we provide for the alternative formatting procedures for
-% table notes in plano tables.
-% Note that the |\tablenotemark| does not change.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\@ptablenotetext#1#2{%
- \vspace{0ex}% Style Note: in ppt, it is gone
- {%\parbox{\pt@width}%
- {\hskip1em$^{\mathrm#1}$#2}\par}%
-}%
-\def\@ptablenotes#1{%
- \par
- \vspace{2ex}%
- {\setlength\parskip{1.5ex}#1}%
-}%
-\def\@ptablenotes@apj#1{%
- \par
- \vspace{2ex}%
- {#1}%
-}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\tablerefs}
-% \begin{macro}{\@tableref}
-% \begin{macro}{\tablecomments}
-% \begin{macro}{\@tablecom}
-% Special kinds of table footnotes. Sometimes authors tabulate things
-% which have corresponding references, and it may be desirable to
-% associate these references with the table rather than
-% (or in addition to) the formal reference list.
-% Occasionally, authors wish to append a short
-% paragraph of explanatory notes that pertain to the entire table, but
-% which are different than the caption.
-% \begin{verbatim}
-% \tablerefs{<reference list>}
-% \tablecomments{<text>}
-% \end{verbatim}
-%
-% In implementation, we enqueue and dequeue using the same
-% mechanism as the table notes.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%
-\newcommand\tablerefs[1]{\ifdim\@abovenoteskip=0pt\global\@abovenoteskip=10pt\fi
-\appgdef\tblnote@list{\hsize\pt@width\leftskip\z@\rightskip\z@%
-\@tableref{\parfillskip\z@ plus1fil#1\endgraf}}}%
-\def\@tableref#1{%
- \par
- \vspace*{3ex}%
- {%\parbox{\pt@width} %%%%
- {\hskip1em\rmfamily References. --- #1}\par}%
-}%
-\newcommand\tablecomments[1]{\ifdim\@abovenoteskip=0pt\global\@abovenoteskip=10pt\fi
-\appgdef\tblnote@list{\hsize\pt@width\leftskip\z@\rightskip\z@%
-\@tablecom{\parfillskip\z@ plus1fil#1\endgraf}}}%
-\def\@tablecom#1{%
- \par
- \vspace*{3ex}%
- {%\parbox{\pt@width} %%%
-{\hskip1em\rmfamily Note. --- #1}\par}%
-}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\@tableref@pptt}
-% \begin{macro}{\@tablecom@pptt}
-% Table references and comments in the two-column preprint style:
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\@tableref@pptt#1{%
- \par
- \vspace*{3ex}%
- {%\parbox{\pt@width} %%%
- {\hskip1em{\sc References.---}#1}\par}%
-}%
-\def\@tablecom@pptt#1{%
- \vspace*{3ex}{%
- %\parbox{\pt@width} %%%
- {\hskip1em{\sc Note.---}#1}\par}%
-}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% Here ends the section of code incorporated into the
-% V4.1 document style.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%</class|style>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% Hereinafter appears code for the document class.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*class>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \subsubsection{Float Parameters}%
-%
-% \begin{macro}{plate}
-% Create a new type of float for ``plates''.
-% Note that the |\ftype@plate| must be a power of 2,
-% and that plates are put into the LOF (via |\ext@plate|).
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\newcounter{plate}%
-\def\ftype@plate{4}%
-\def\ext@plate{lof}%
-\newenvironment{plate}{\@float{plate}}{\end@float}%
-\newenvironment{plate*}{\@dblfloat{plate}}{\end@dblfloat}%
-\let\platewidth=\tablewidth
-\newcommand\platenum[1]{%
- \def\theplate{#1}%
- \let\@currentlabel\theplate
- \addtocounter{plate}{\m@ne}%
-}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\thefigure}
-% \begin{macro}{\thetable}
-% \begin{macro}{\theplate}
-% Float numbering is arabic.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\thefigure{\@arabic\c@figure}%
-\def\thetable{\@arabic\c@table}%
-\def\theplate{\@arabic\c@plate}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\fnum@figure}
-% \begin{macro}{\fnum@table}
-% \begin{macro}{\fnum@plate}
-%
-% Formatting of the float number:
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\fnum@figure{{\rmfamily Fig.\space\thefigure.---}}%
-\def\fnum@table{{\rmfamily Table \thetable:}}%
-\def\fnum@plate{{\bfseries Plate \theplate.}}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\fps@figure}
-% \begin{macro}{\fps@table}
-% \begin{macro}{\fps@plate}
-%
-% Float positions:
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%
-\def\fps@figure{bp}%
-\def\fps@table{bp}%
-\def\fps@plate{bp}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-%
-% \subsubsection{EPS Inclusions}%
-% FIXME: requires package epsf.sty
-%
-% FIXME: prefer |\includegraphics|
-%
-% FIXME: implement autoscaling in |\plotone| and |\plottwo|.
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\eps@scaling}
-% \begin{macro}{\epsscale}
-% \begin{macro}{\plotone}
-% \begin{macro}{\plottwo}
-% \begin{macro}{\plotfiddle}
-% Support EPS inclusion with the native \LaTeX\ |\includegraphics|
-% command.
-% A large number of DVI translators are supported by this mechanism,
-% although certain other features of \aastex, notably turnpage tables,
-% are supported only by PostScript output devices.
-% \begin{verbatim}
-% \plotone{<epsfile>}
-% \plottwo{<epsfile>}{<epsfile>}
-% \plotfiddle{<epsfile>}{<vsize>}{<rot>}{<hsf>}
-% {<vsf>}{<htrans>}{<vtrans>}
-% <epsfile> name of EPS file
-% \end{verbatim}
-% |\plotone| inserts the plot in a space that is |\columnwidth| wide;
-% |\plottwo| inserts two plots side by side on the same line.
-%
-% The |\plotfiddle| command now
-% uses only its first six arguments;
-% only |voffset| is ignored.
-% The parameters |hsf| and |vsf| serves as a scale factor for both
-% horizontal and vertical.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%\epsfverbosetrue
-\def\eps@scaling{1.0}%
-\newcommand\epsscale[1]{\gdef\eps@scaling{#1}}%
-% 28 Oct 2003 SZ
-% added typeout commands to \plotone, \plottwo, \plotfiddle
-% this was a change made to the .cls for WPR
-% that was not picked up in the .dtx
-\newcommand\plotone[1]{%
- \typeout{Plotone included the file #1}
- \centering
- \leavevmode
- \includegraphics[width={\eps@scaling\columnwidth}]{#1}%
-}%
-\newcommand\plottwo[2]{{%
- \typeout{Plottwo included the files #1 #2}
- \centering
- \leavevmode
- \columnwidth=.45\columnwidth
- \includegraphics[width={\eps@scaling\columnwidth}]{#1}%
- \hfil
- \includegraphics[width={\eps@scaling\columnwidth}]{#2}%
-}}%
-%
-\def\plotfiddle#1#2#3#4#5#6#7{{
-\typeout{Plotfiddle included the file #1}
-\centering\leavevmode%% Re-implement from v4.0
-\vbox to #2{\rule{0pt}{#2}}
-\hspace*{#6pt}\includegraphics[width=#4pt, height=#5pt, angle=#3, origin=c]{#1}}%
-}
-%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-%
-% \subsubsection{Abbreviations for Journals}%
-%
-% The object here is to provide authors
-% with convenient shorthands for the most ``popular'' (often-cited)
-% journals; the author can use these markup tags without being concerned
-% about the exact form of the journal abbreviation, or its formatting.
-% It is up to the keeper of the macros to make sure the macros expand
-% to the proper text. If macro package writers agree to all use the
-% same TeX command name, authors only have to remember one thing, and
-% the style file will take care of editorial preferences. This also
-% applies when a single journal decides to revamp its abbreviating
-% scheme, as happened with the ApJ (Abt 1991).
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\let\jnl@style=\rmfamily
-\def\ref@jnl#1{{\jnl@style#1}}%
-\newcommand\aj{\ref@jnl{AJ}}%
- % Astronomical Journal
-\newcommand\actaa{\ref@jnl{Acta Astron.}}%
- % Acta Astronomica
-\newcommand\araa{\ref@jnl{ARA\&A}}%
- % Annual Review of Astron and Astrophys
-\newcommand\apj{\ref@jnl{ApJ}}%
- % Astrophysical Journal
-\newcommand\apjl{\ref@jnl{ApJ}}%
- % Astrophysical Journal, Letters
-\newcommand\apjs{\ref@jnl{ApJS}}%
- % Astrophysical Journal, Supplement
-\newcommand\ao{\ref@jnl{Appl.~Opt.}}%
- % Applied Optics
-\newcommand\apss{\ref@jnl{Ap\&SS}}%
- % Astrophysics and Space Science
-\newcommand\aap{\ref@jnl{A\&A}}%
- % Astronomy and Astrophysics
-\newcommand\aapr{\ref@jnl{A\&A~Rev.}}%
- % Astronomy and Astrophysics Reviews
-\newcommand\aaps{\ref@jnl{A\&AS}}%
- % Astronomy and Astrophysics, Supplement
-\newcommand\azh{\ref@jnl{AZh}}%
- % Astronomicheskii Zhurnal
-\newcommand\baas{\ref@jnl{BAAS}}%
- % Bulletin of the AAS
-\newcommand\caa{\ref@jnl{Chinese Astron. Astrophys.}}%
- % Chinese Astronomy and Astrophysics
-\newcommand\cjaa{\ref@jnl{Chinese J. Astron. Astrophys.}}%
- % Chinese Journal of Astronomy and Astrophysics
-\newcommand\icarus{\ref@jnl{Icarus}}%
- % Icarus
-\newcommand\jcap{\ref@jnl{J. Cosmology Astropart. Phys.}}%
- % Journal of Cosmology and Astroparticle Physics
-\newcommand\jrasc{\ref@jnl{JRASC}}%
- % Journal of the RAS of Canada
-\newcommand\memras{\ref@jnl{MmRAS}}%
- % Memoirs of the RAS
-\newcommand\mnras{\ref@jnl{MNRAS}}%
- % Monthly Notices of the RAS
-\newcommand\na{\ref@jnl{New A}}%
- % New Astronomy
-\newcommand\nar{\ref@jnl{New A Rev.}}%
- % New Astronomy Review
-\newcommand\pra{\ref@jnl{Phys.~Rev.~A}}%
- % Physical Review A: General Physics
-\newcommand\prb{\ref@jnl{Phys.~Rev.~B}}%
- % Physical Review B: Solid State
-\newcommand\prc{\ref@jnl{Phys.~Rev.~C}}%
- % Physical Review C
-\newcommand\prd{\ref@jnl{Phys.~Rev.~D}}%
- % Physical Review D
-\newcommand\pre{\ref@jnl{Phys.~Rev.~E}}%
- % Physical Review E
-\newcommand\prl{\ref@jnl{Phys.~Rev.~Lett.}}%
- % Physical Review Letters
-\newcommand\pasa{\ref@jnl{PASA}}%
- % Publications of the Astron. Soc. of Australia
-\newcommand\pasp{\ref@jnl{PASP}}%
- % Publications of the ASP
-\newcommand\pasj{\ref@jnl{PASJ}}%
- % Publications of the ASJ
-\newcommand\qjras{\ref@jnl{QJRAS}}%
- % Quarterly Journal of the RAS
-\newcommand\rmxaa{\ref@jnl{Rev. Mexicana Astron. Astrofis.}}%
- % Revista Mexicana de Astronomia y Astrofisica
-\newcommand\skytel{\ref@jnl{S\&T}}%
- % Sky and Telescope
-\newcommand\solphys{\ref@jnl{Sol.~Phys.}}%
- % Solar Physics
-\newcommand\sovast{\ref@jnl{Soviet~Ast.}}%
- % Soviet Astronomy
-\newcommand\ssr{\ref@jnl{Space~Sci.~Rev.}}%
- % Space Science Reviews
-\newcommand\zap{\ref@jnl{ZAp}}%
- % Zeitschrift fuer Astrophysik
-\newcommand\nat{\ref@jnl{Nature}}%
- % Nature
-\newcommand\iaucirc{\ref@jnl{IAU~Circ.}}%
- % IAU Cirulars
-\newcommand\aplett{\ref@jnl{Astrophys.~Lett.}}%
- % Astrophysics Letters and Communications
-\newcommand\apspr{\ref@jnl{Astrophys.~Space~Phys.~Res.}}%
- % Astrophysics Space Physics Research
-\newcommand\bain{\ref@jnl{Bull.~Astron.~Inst.~Netherlands}}%
- % Bulletin Astronomical Institute of the Netherlands
-\newcommand\fcp{\ref@jnl{Fund.~Cosmic~Phys.}}%
- % Fundamental Cosmic Physics
-\newcommand\gca{\ref@jnl{Geochim.~Cosmochim.~Acta}}%
- % Geochimica Cosmochimica Acta
-\newcommand\grl{\ref@jnl{Geophys.~Res.~Lett.}}%
- % Geophysics Research Letters
-\newcommand\jcp{\ref@jnl{J.~Chem.~Phys.}}%
- % Journal of Chemical Physics
-\newcommand\jgr{\ref@jnl{J.~Geophys.~Res.}}%
- % Journal of Geophysical Research
-\newcommand\jqsrt{\ref@jnl{J.~Quant.~Spec.~Radiat.~Transf.}}%
- % Journal of Quantitiative Spectroscopy and Radiative Trasfer
-\newcommand\memsai{\ref@jnl{Mem.~Soc.~Astron.~Italiana}}%
- % Mem. Societa Astronomica Italiana
-\newcommand\nphysa{\ref@jnl{Nucl.~Phys.~A}}%
- % Nuclear Physics A
-\newcommand\physrep{\ref@jnl{Phys.~Rep.}}%
- % Physics Reports
-\newcommand\physscr{\ref@jnl{Phys.~Scr}}%
- % Physica Scripta
-\newcommand\planss{\ref@jnl{Planet.~Space~Sci.}}%
- % Planetary Space Science
-\newcommand\procspie{\ref@jnl{Proc.~SPIE}}%
- % Proceedings of the SPIE
-\let\astap=\aap
-\let\apjlett=\apjl
-\let\apjsupp=\apjs
-\let\applopt=\ao
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-%
-% Here ends the code for the document class.
-% Hereinafter appears code that is common to
-% the document class and document style.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%</class>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \subsubsection{Text Entities}%
-%
-% The entire text entities section of code is incorporated into the
-% V4.1 document style.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*class|style>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% Handy little things---that everybody works out for themselves anyway!
-% Many of these come from Springer's A\&A package, and some were
-% contributed by Francois Schweizer at DTM.
-% You can go berserk making these up,
-% especially when you start getting into the composite ones. We have
-% tried to select a tractable number that were useful, and somewhat
-% difficult to get right because fussy kerning or some such is required.
-% Most can be used in or out of math mode with impunity; |\alt| and
-% |\agt| are relations and can only be used in math mode.
-%
-% The first group consists of
-% various kinds of phantoms used for aligning columns in tables;
-% |\phn| is a phantom numeral,
-% |\phd| a phantom decimal,
-% |\phs| a phantom minus sign, and
-% |\phm| is a generic phantom.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand\phn{\phantom{0}}%
-\newcommand\phd{\phantom{.}}%
-\newcommand\phs{\phantom{$-$}}%
-\newcommand\phm[1]{\phantom{#1}}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% Wait! These two macros are defined in \file{amssymb.sty}!
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%\newcommand\lesssim{%
-% \mathrel{\mbox{\rlap{\mbox{\lower4pt\hbox{$\sim$}}}\mbox{$<$}}}%
-%}%
-%\newcommand\gtrsim{%
-% \mathrel{\mbox{\rlap{\mbox{\lower4pt\hbox{$\sim$}}}\mbox{$>$}}}%
-%}%
-%
-\let\la=\lesssim % For Springer A&A compliance...
-\let\ga=\gtrsim
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% Various and sundry shorthand for text entities:
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand\sq{\mbox{\rlap{$\sqcap$}$\sqcup$}}%
-\newcommand\arcdeg{\mbox{$^\circ$}}%
-\newcommand\arcmin{\mbox{$^\prime$}}%
-\newcommand\arcsec{\mbox{$^{\prime\prime}$}}%
-\newcommand\fd{\mbox{$.\!\!^{\mathrm d}$}}%
-\newcommand\fh{\mbox{$.\!\!^{\mathrm h}$}}%
-\newcommand\fm{\mbox{$.\!\!^{\mathrm m}$}}%
-\newcommand\fs{\mbox{$.\!\!^{\mathrm s}$}}%
-\newcommand\fdg{\mbox{$.\!\!^\circ$}}%
-\newcommand\farcm@mss{\mbox{$.\mkern-4mu^\prime$}}%
-\let\farcm\farcm@mss
-\newcommand\farcs@mss{\mbox{$.\!\!^{\prime\prime}$}}%
-\let\farcs\farcs@mss
-\newcommand\fp{\mbox{$.\!\!^{\scriptscriptstyle\mathrm p}$}}%
-\newcommand\micron{\mbox{$\mu$m}}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% Alternative definitions for ApJ
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\farcm@apj{%
- \mbox{.\kern -0.7ex\raisebox{.9ex}{\scriptsize$\prime$}}%
-}%
-\def\farcs@apj{%
- \mbox{%
- \kern 0.13ex.%
- \kern -0.95ex\raisebox{.9ex}{\scriptsize$\prime\prime$}%
- \kern -0.1ex%
- }%
-}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\case}
-% Permit author to typeset ``case'' fractions. This is sometimes
-% wanted in displayed equations, during which \LaTeX\ will set fractions
-% specified as |\frac{x}{y}| as ``built-up'' fractions (numerator and
-% denominator at body text size).
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand\case[2]{\mbox{$\frac{#1}{#2}$}}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\slantfrac}
-% \begin{macro}{\onehalf}
-% \begin{macro}{\onethird}
-% \begin{macro}{\twothirds}
-% \begin{macro}{\onequarter}
-% \begin{macro}{\threequarters}
-% \begin{macro}{\ubvr}
-% \begin{macro}{\ub}
-% \begin{macro}{\bv}
-% \begin{macro}{\vr}
-% \begin{macro}{\ur}
-% Permit author to typeset ``text fractions''---the |\slantfrac|
-% command should be used in text mode, \emph{not} in math mode.
-% Note that this is different from a ``shilling'' fraction, which the
-% author can produce without any special formatting markup.
-% Define markup shorthands for several common fractions using |\slantfrac|.
-%
-% The |\slantfrac| command is reimplemented in this version of \aastex---
-% it used to produce a ``special fraction'', now a case fraction.
-% The old definition appears below for reference.
-%
-% I do not understand the |\ubvr| commands.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%\newcommand\slantfrac[2]{\mbox{$\,^#1\!/_#2$}}%
-\newcommand\slantfrac{\case}%
-\newcommand\onehalf{\slantfrac{1}{2}}%
-\newcommand\onethird{\slantfrac{1}{3}}%
-\newcommand\twothirds{\slantfrac{2}{3}}%
-\newcommand\onequarter{\slantfrac{1}{4}}%
-\newcommand\threequarters{\slantfrac{3}{4}}%
-%
-\newcommand\ubvr{\mbox{$U\!BV\!R$}}%% UBVR system
-\newcommand\ub{\mbox{$U\!-\!B$}}% % U-B
-\newcommand\bv{\mbox{$B\!-\!V$}}% % B-V
-\newcommand\vr{\mbox{$V\!-\!R$}}% % V-R
-\newcommand\ur{\mbox{$U\!-\!R$}}% % U-R
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\ion}
-% Notation for atomic species (ionization levels). The ionization state
-% is specified as the second argument, and should be given as a numeral.
-% The macro has to expand the numeric state into the proper notation for
-% the publication (roman, numeric, plus signs, etc.)
-% \begin{verbatim}
-% \ion{<element>}{<ionization state>}
-% \end{verbatim}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand\ion[2]{#1$\;${\small\rmfamily\@Roman{#2}}\relax}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\nodata}
-% Centered ellipsis for use in tables (for unknown values). |\nodata|
-% is generalized markup for this notion: format of null-valued entries
-% in tables is style-specific.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%\newcommand\cellipsis{\hfill$\cdots$\hfill}%
-%\newcommand\nodata{\multicolumn{1}{c}{$\cdots$}}%
-\newcommand\nodata{ ~$\cdots$~ }%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\diameter}
-% The |\diameter| command produces a circle with a slash through it;
-% added for compatibility with A\&A and MNRAS packages.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand\diameter{\ooalign{\hfil/\hfil\crcr\mathhexbox20D}}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\degr}
-% The |\degr| command is a synonym for |\arcdeg|;
-% added for compatibility with A\&A and MNRAS packages.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand\degr{\arcdeg}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\Sun}%
-% \begin{macro}{\Sol}%
-% \begin{macro}{\sun}%
-% \begin{macro}{\Mercury}%
-% \begin{macro}{\Venus}%
-% \begin{macro}{\Earth}%
-% \begin{macro}{\Mars}%
-% \begin{macro}{\Jupiter}%
-% \begin{macro}{\Saturn}%
-% \begin{macro}{\Uranus}%
-% \begin{macro}{\Neptune}%
-% \begin{macro}{\Pluto}%
-% \begin{macro}{\Moon}%
-% \begin{macro}{\ascnode}%
-% \begin{macro}{\descnode}%
-% Names for the planets and ascending node and descending node.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand\Sun{\sun}% Sun symbol, "S"
-\newcommand\Sol{\sun}%
-\newcommand\sun{\odot}%
-\newcommand\Mercury{\astro{\char1}}% Mercury symbol, "1"
-\newcommand\Venus{\astro{\char2}}% Venus symbol, "2"
-\newcommand\Earth{\earth}% Earth symbol, "3"
-\newcommand\Terra{\earth}%
-\newcommand\earth{\oplus}%
-\newcommand\Mars{\astro{\char4}}% Mars symbol, "4"
-\newcommand\Jupiter{\astro{\char5}}% Jupiter symbol, "5"
-\newcommand\Saturn{\astro{\char6}}% Saturn symbol, "6"
-\newcommand\Uranus{\astro{\char7}}% Uranus symbol, "7"
-\newcommand\Neptune{\astro{\char8}}% Neptune symbol, "8"
-\newcommand\Pluto{\astro{\char9}}% Pluo symbol, "9"
-\newcommand\Moon{\astro{\char10}}% Moon symbol, "M"
-\newcommand\Luna{\Moon}%
-%\def\ascnode{\astro{N}}% ascending node (dragon's head), (only in cmastro)
-%\def\descnode{\astro{D}}% descending node (dragon's tail), (only in cmastro)
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\Aries}%
-% \begin{macro}{\VEq}%
-% \begin{macro}{\Taurus}%
-% \begin{macro}{\Gemini}%
-% \begin{macro}{\Cancer}%
-% \begin{macro}{\Leo}%
-% \begin{macro}{\Virgo}%
-% \begin{macro}{\Libra}%
-% \begin{macro}{\AEq}%
-% \begin{macro}{\Scorpius}%
-% \begin{macro}{\Sagittarius}%
-% \begin{macro}{\Capricornus}%
-% \begin{macro}{\Aquarius}%
-% \begin{macro}{\Pisces}%
-% Zodiacal symbols, and autumnal and vernal equinox.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand\Aries{\astro{\char11}}%
-\newcommand\VEq{\Aries}% vernal equinox (Aries)
-\newcommand\Taurus{\astro{\char12}}%
-\newcommand\Gemini{\astro{\char13}}%
-\newcommand\Cancer{\astro{\char14}}%
-\newcommand\Leo{\astro{\char15}}%
-\newcommand\Virgo{\astro{\char16}}%
-\newcommand\Libra{\astro{\char17}}%
-\newcommand\AEq{\Libra}% autumnal equinox (Libra)
-\newcommand\Scorpius{\astro{\char18}}%
-\newcommand\Sagittarius{\astro{\char19}}%
-\newcommand\Capricornus{\astro{\char20}}%
-\newcommand\Aquarius{\astro{\char21}}%
-\newcommand\Pisces{\astro{\char22}}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\astro}
-% Font for astronomical symbols.
-% If the document lacks a |astro| class option, then the
-% |\astro@font| font switch gives a warning message suggesting how to correct things.
-%
-% The font is loaded at a size commensurate with that of basal text.
-% We may need to fine-tune things by scaling the value; the |astro| font's metrics
-% are, weirdly, about one quarter the em square.
-%
-% FIXME: scale the astro font?
-%
-% FIXME: provide a better default.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\load@astro{%
- \dimen@=1\aas@ptsize\p@
- \font\astro@font=Astrosym at\dimen@
-}%
-\def\astro#1{\leavevmode\hbox{\astro@font#1}}%
-\def\astro@font{%
- \ClassWarning{aastex}{%
- Please use class option `astro', since you are using the astro font.%
- }%
-}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\sbond}
-% \begin{macro}{\dbond}
-% \begin{macro}{\tbond}
-% Chemical bonds in text
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand\sbond{\chem@bnd{\@sbnd}}%
-\newcommand\dbond{\chem@bnd{\@dbnd}}%
-\newcommand\tbond{\chem@bnd{\@tbnd}}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\chem@bnd}
-% \begin{macro}{\@sbnd}
-% \begin{macro}{\@dbnd}
-% \begin{macro}{\@tbnd}
-% Low-level macros for chemical bonds in text
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\chem@bnd#1{%
- {%
- \kern.1em\relax
- \setbox\z@\hbox{M}%
- \dimen@ii.8em\relax
- \p@=.1em\relax
- \dimen@.5\ht\z@\dimen@i-\dimen@
- \advance\dimen@1.5\p@\advance\dimen@i-1.0\p@
- #1%
- \kern.1em\relax
- }%
- }%
-%
-\def\@sbnd{%
- \advance\dimen@-1.5\p@\advance\dimen@i1.5\p@
- \vrule\@height\dimen@\@depth\dimen@i\@width\dimen@ii\nobreak
- }%
-%
-\def\@dbnd{%
- \advance\dimen@-0.5\p@\advance\dimen@i0.5\p@
- \vrule\@height\dimen@\@depth\dimen@i\@width\dimen@ii\nobreak
- \advance\dimen@-1.5\p@\advance\dimen@i1.5\p@
- \hskip-\dimen@ii
- \vrule\@height\dimen@\@depth\dimen@i\@width\dimen@ii\nobreak
- }%
-%
-\def\@tbnd{%
- \vrule\@height\dimen@\@depth\dimen@i\@width\dimen@ii\nobreak
- \advance\dimen@-1.5\p@\advance\dimen@i1.5\p@
- \hskip-\dimen@ii
- \vrule\@height\dimen@\@depth\dimen@i\@width\dimen@ii\nobreak
- \advance\dimen@-1.5\p@\advance\dimen@i1.5\p@
- \hskip-\dimen@ii
- \vrule\@height\dimen@\@depth\dimen@i\@width\dimen@ii\nobreak
- }%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\LaTeX}
-% This is a generalization of the definition of |\LaTeX| that comes in
-% \LaTeX.
-% The change here ensures that \LaTeX\ will be typeset in the current
-% style, rather than always in roman.
-% Note that the appearance of the \LaTeX\ logo will not necessarily
-% coincide with that promulgated by Team \LaTeX\ in the Companions,
-% but I claim that, in the absence of a standard set by Lamport himself,
-% we need have no concerns about being taken to task by the purity police.
-%
-% Implementation note: we use herein the |\count@| scratch register.
-% if |\everymath| begins using that register, this macro is hosed.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\renewcommand\LaTeX{%
- \leavevmode
- L%
- \raise.42ex\hbox{%
- \count@=\the\fam
- $\fam\count@\scriptstyle\kern-.3em A$%
- }%
- \kern-.15em\TeX
-}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\anchor}
-% Syntax: |\anchor|\arg{href}\arg{text}.
-%
-% A general-purpose hypertext link tag, using the parlance of
-% the HTML element |<<A>>| (anchor).
-% |<href>| is a \emph{full} URI, including the |scheme:| designator
-% and may be active in some sort of hyperref-savvy system;
-% for now it has no semantic.
-% The |<text>| argument is the copy to set in the document,
-% much like the content of the HTML |<<A>>| element.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand\anchor[2]{#2}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\url}
-% Syntax: |\url|\oarg{href}\arg{text}.
-%
-% We provide |\url| with the |<href>| as an optional argument,
-% to support the degenerate case where an author wishes to express a URL in the text.
-% In that case, |<href>|\({}={}\)|<text>|.
-% If the author supplies both arguments, this command looks like an alias for |\anchor|.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand\url{\@dblarg\@url}%
-\def\@url[#1]{\anchor{#1}}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\email}
-% Syntax: |\email|\arg{address}.
-%
-% Identify email addresses anywhere in text (not just in the author group).
-%
-% This markup will also permit production software at the Press
-% to make |mailto:| links, etc., in online products.
-% |<address>| should \emph{not} contain the |mailto:| scheme designator.
-%
-% In general text, |\email{foo@bar}| produces |\textt{mailto:foo@bar}|.
-% The |\email| command is also used in the author lists;
-% |\authoremail| is deprecated.
-%
-% FIXME: what happens if there is no title page?
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\@text@email#1{#1}%
-\def\authoremail{\substitute@command\authoremail\email}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\objectname}
-% Syntax: |\objectname|\oarg{catalog ID}\arg{text}.
-%
-% Celestial objects can and should be identified by the author to facilitate
-% post-processing of articles by the astronomical catalog databases.
-% At the moment, this is done by eye, although when articles contain these
-% marks, the Press could pass along a list of `objects in article'
-% to database personnel. Obviously, more sophisticated technical solutions
-% are possible.
-%
-% In the future, software could construct queries to those databases in the
-% online editions, hence it may be useful for the author to supply a catalog identifier.
-% We may choose to suppress the |<catalog ID>| argument in the
-% documentation in the near term, since we don't have an architecture
-% and a nomenclature for linking to them at this point.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand\objectname{\@testopt\@objectname{[}}
-\def\@objectname[#1]#2{#2}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% macro for object
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand\object{\@testopt\@object{[}}%
-\def\@object[#1]#2{#2}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-%% macro for facility
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand\facility{\@testopt\@facility{[}}%
-\def\@facility[#1]#2{#2}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-%% macro for supportfrom
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand\supportfrom{\@testopt\@supportfrom{[}}%
-\def\@supportfrom[#1]#2{#2}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-%% macro for dataset
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand\dataset{\@testopt\@dataset{[}}%
-\def\@dataset[#1]#2{#2}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% Here ends the section of code incorporated into the
-% V4.1 document style.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%</class|style>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-%
-% Hereinafter appears code for the document class.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*class>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \subsubsection{Debugging}%
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\sizrpt}
-% Reveal the em-width and ex-height of the current font:
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand\sizrpt{%
- (\fontname\the\font): em=\the\fontdimen6\font, ex=\the\fontdimen5\font
- \typeout{%
- (\fontname\the\font): em=\the\fontdimen6\font, ex=\the\fontdimen5\font
- }%
-}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-%
-%
-% \subsection{Substyles for Manuscript and Preprint}%
-%
-% This portion defines the class options that account for
-% the differences between the various types of document formats
-% (substyles) covered by this class.
-%
-% \subsubsection{Preprint class option}%
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\aas@preprint}
-% The user should invoke the |preprint| document class option
-% if wishing the document formatted in preprint format.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\aas@preprint{%
- \def\revtex@genre{preprint}%
- \let\ptlandscape\@empty
- \setlength\@slugcmmntwidth{.67\textwidth}%
- \let\@makeslugcmmnt\@makeslugcmmnt@ppt
- \let\@abstract\@abstract@ppt
- \let\make@title\make@title@ppt
- \let\make@affil\make@affil@ppt
- \let\notetoeditor\@gobble
- \let\clear@section@page\@empty
- \let\placetable\@gobble
- \let\placefigure\@gobble
- \let\placeplate\@gobble
- \let\typeout@deluxetable\typeout@deluxetable@ppt
- \let\typeout@pt@nl\typeout@pt@nl@mss
- \ps@plaintop
- \let\references@refpar\references@refpar@mss
- \let\cutinhead\cutinhead@ppt
- \def\pt@headfrac@ass@normalsize{.1}
- \def\pt@headfrac@ass@footnotesize{.12}
- \def\pt@headfrac@ass@scriptsize{.15}
- \def\pt@notemin@normal{4.5}
- \def\pt@notemin@footnote{4.5}
- \def\pt@notemin@script{5}
-}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \subsubsection{Two-column preprint class option}%
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\aas@preprint2}
-% The user should invoke the |preprint2| document class option
-% if wishing the document formatted in two-column preprint format.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\@namedef{aas@preprint2}{%
- \aas@preprint
- \def\revtex@genre{2-column preprint}%
- \ps@plain
- \@twocolumntrue
- \@rightskip=\z@\@plus4em
- \rightskip\@rightskip
- \opt@just
- \just@just % -SZ restored preprint2 to full justification
- \setlength\parindent{1.2em}%
- \setlength\parskip{0.5ex}%
- \setlength\columnsep{0.5in}%
- \setlength\hoffset{-0.2in}%
- \tolerance=600
- \setlength\emergencystretch{6\p@}%
- \def\baselinestretch{1.0}%
- \def\@tightleading{1.0}%
- \let\singlespace\@empty
- \let\doublespace\@empty
- \let\@dates\@dates@pptt
- \let\@abstract\@abstract@pptt
- \let\make@title\make@title@pptt
- \let\make@author\make@author@pptt
- \let\make@affil\make@affil@pptt
- \let\@keywords\@keywords@pptt
- \setlength{\skip\footins}{3ex\@plus1ex\@minus.5ex}%
- \setlength\footnotesep{2ex}%
- \let\@makefntext\@makefntext@pptt
- \let\section\section@pptt
- \let\subsection\subsection@pptt
- \let\subsubsection\subsubsection@pptt
- \let\section@centering\@empty
- \let\appendix@figtab@defs\appendix@figtab@defs@pptt
- \def\clear@thebibliography@page{%
- \if@restonecol\if@twocolumn\else\twocolumn\fi\fi
- }%
- \let\references@refpar\references@refpar@pptt
- \let\thebib@list\thebib@list@pptt
- \let\@tablenotes\@tablenotes@pptt
- \let\fnum@ptablecont\fnum@ptablecont@pptt
- \let\@make@caption@text\@make@caption@text@pptt
- \let\@makecaption@plano@cont\@makecaption@plano@cont@pptt
- \let\cutinhead\cutinhead@ppt
- \def\@plano@float@{\@dblfloat}% Extra layer of abstraction for float processing
- \def\end@plano@float@{\end@dblfloat}%
- %\let\@tableref\@tableref@pptt
- \let\@tablecom\@tablecom@pptt
- \def\pt@headfrac@ass@normalsize{.12}
- \def\pt@headfrac@ass@footnotesize{.15}
- \def\pt@headfrac@ass@scriptsize{.18}
- \def\pt@notemin@normal{5}
- \def\pt@notemin@footnote{5}
- \def\pt@notemin@script{5}
-}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\section@pptt}
-% \begin{macro}{\subsection@pptt}
-% \begin{macro}{\subsubsection@pptt}
-% Level one-, two-, and three heads for two-column preprint substyle.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\section@pptt{%
- \@startsection{section}{1}%
- {\z@}{2.3ex\@plus1ex\@minus.2ex}%
- {1.5ex\@plus.2ex}{\normalsize\bfseries}%
-}%
-\def\subsection@pptt{%
- \@startsection{subsection}{2}%
- {\z@}{2ex\@plus1ex\@minus.2ex}{1ex\@plus.2ex}{\normalsize\bfseries}%
-}%
-\def\subsubsection@pptt{%
- \@startsection{subsubsection}{3}%
- {\z@}{2ex\@plus1ex\@minus.2ex}{1ex\@plus.2ex}{\normalsize\itshape}%
-}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \subsubsection{Manuscript class option}%
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\aas@manuscript}
-% The user should invoke the |manuscript| document class option
-% if wishing the document formatted in manuscript format.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\aas@manuscript{%
- \def\revtex@genre{manuscript}%
- \let\ptlandscape\@empty
- \def\baselinestretch{\@doubleleading}%
- \let\footnote@size\@empty
- \def\tighten{\def\baselinestretch{\@doubleleading}}%
- \def\singlespace{}%
- \def\doublespace{}%
- \opt@tighten
- \setlength\@slugcmmntwidth{\textwidth}%
- \let\@makeslugcmmnt\@makeslugcmmnt@mss
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% Page layout dimensions:
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \@rightskip=\z@\@plus4em
- \rightskip\@rightskip
- \opt@just
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% Other switches:
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \let\sluginfo\sluginfo@mss
- \let\@abstract\@abstract@mss
- \let\@keywords\@keywords@mss % pagebreak after keywords
- \let\make@title\make@title@mss
- \def\clear@section@page{\clearpage}%
- \def\clear@thebibliography@page{\clearpage}%
- \let\typeout@deluxetable\typeout@deluxetable@mss
- \let\typeout@pt@nl\typeout@pt@nl@mss
- \ps@plaintop
- \let\references@refpar\references@refpar@mss
- \def\pt@headfrac@ass@normalsize{.08}
- \def\pt@headfrac@ass@footnotesize{.1}
- \def\pt@headfrac@ass@scriptsize{.12}
- \def\pt@notemin@normal{3}
- \def\pt@notemin@footnote{3}
- \def\pt@notemin@script{4}
-}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-%
-% Here ends the code for the document class.
-% Hereinafter appears code that is common to
-% the document class and document style.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%</class>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \subsection{For Editorial Use Only}%
-% The following commands permit administrative details or production
-% instructions to be passed through to production software at the publisher.
-% These commands are not to be used by the author.
-%
-% The entire editorial entities section of code is incorporated into the
-% V4.1 document style.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*class|style>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\journal}
-% \begin{macro}{\volume}
-% \begin{macro}{\issue}
-% |\journal|\arg{identifier}, |\volume|\arg{text}, |\issue|\arg{text}:
-% The identification token for the target journal, and the volume
-% and issue numbers, are specified in these commands.
-% In the \LaTeX\ style, they produce no output; they are simply a |\@gobble|.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\journal{\@gobble}%
-\def\volume{\@gobble}%
-\def\issue{\@gobble}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\SGMLbi}
-% \begin{macro}{\SGMLbsc}
-% \begin{macro}{\SGMLclc}
-% |\SGMLbi|\arg{text}, |\SGMLbsc|\arg{text}, |\SGMLclc|\arg{text}:
-% These commands mark text that should be in bold italic, bold script (calligraphic),
-% or \emph{always} in mixed case. The first two occur principally in math mode,
-% and they permit editors and keyboardists a more direct approach for specifying
-% these changes. The latter item is used around text, notably chemical symbols,
-% that must remain in mixed case, even when presented in an all-caps environment.
-% In the \LaTeX\ style, these commands just pass the \arg{text} through.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\SGMLbi#1{#1}%
-\def\SGMLbsc#1{#1}%
-\def\SGMLclc#1{#1}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\SGMLentity}
-% |\SGMLentity|\arg{text}:
-% This command permits editors and keyboardists to introduce special symbols
-% with their SGML entity names. \arg{text} does \emph{not} contain the leading
-% ampersand (|&|) or the trailing semicolon (|;|).
-% In the \LaTeX\ style, this command should add the ampersand and the
-% semicolon to \arg{text}.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\SGMLentity#1{\&#1;}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\SGML}
-% |\SGML|\arg{text}:
-% This command permits SGML instructions and markup to passed through the
-% translation process.
-% In the \LaTeX\ style, it produces no output; it is simply a |\@gobble|.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\SGML{\@gobble}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-%%
-% \begin{macro}{\@makecol}
-%% Modify the |\@makecol| macro for one-column abstract.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\newif\if@printfoot%
-\global\@printfoottrue%
-\global\newbox\my@footins
-\gdef \@makecol@pptt {%
- \ifvoid\footins
- \setbox\@outputbox \box\@cclv
- \else
- \if@printfoot
- \else
- \global\setbox\my@footins\vbox{\box\footins}
- %\global\advance\c@colht by -\ht\my@footins
- \fi
- \setbox\@outputbox \vbox{%
- \global\setbox\footins\vbox{\unvbox\my@footins\unvbox\footins}
- \boxmaxdepth \@maxdepth
- \unvbox\@cclv
- \if@printfoot
- \vskip\skip\footins
- \color@begingroup
- \normalcolor
- \footnoterule
- \unvbox \footins
- \color@endgroup
- \else
- \global\@printfoottrue
- \fi
- }%
- \fi
- \xdef\@freelist{\@freelist\@midlist}%
- \global \let \@midlist \@empty
- \@combinefloats
- \ifvbox\@kludgeins
- \@makespecialcolbox
- \else
- \setbox\@outputbox \vbox to \@colht{%
- \@texttop
- \dimen@ \dp\@outputbox
- \unvbox \@outputbox
- \ifbotragg%
- \vskip -\dimen@
- \@textbottom
- \fi
- }%
- \fi
- \global \maxdepth \@maxdepth
-}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%%
-%%
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-% \begin{macro}{\strip}
-%% macro to switch from one-column long abstract to two-column normal text
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\iflong@abstract
-\newtoks\juo@sar \juo@sar={}
-\def\@ca#1#2#3#4{}
-\@ifundefined{stripsep}{\newskip\stripsep\stripsep 15pt}{}
-\newskip\m@addvipersep
-\m@addvipersep\z@
-\newskip\c@addvipersep
-\c@addvipersep\z@
-\newdimen\ht@strip
-\newdimen\right@cor
-\newdimen\cor@height \cor@height=0pt
-\newdimen\juo@pr
-\newdimen\juo@ht
-\newbox\@viper
-\newcount\juo@sk
-\newdimen\c@colht
-\newbox\my@outputbox
-%% macro for adding strip
-\def\add@strip#1#2#3#4{\begingroup%
- \xdef\ex@{\global\noexpand\juo@sar{\the\juo@sar\noexpand\@ca{#1}{#2}{#3}{#4}}}\ex@%
-\endgroup}
-%% macro for remove strip
-\def\remove@strip#1{\ifx#1\@empty\global\juo@sk=0\else
- \global\advance\juo@sk by-1\expandafter\next@item\the #1\@@#1\fi}
-\def\next@item \@ca#1#2#3#4#5\@@#6{\global #6={#5}\global\juo@pr=#1\global\juo@ht=#2%
-\global\cor@height=#3\global\m@addvipersep=#4}
-%% macro for strip command
-\def\strip{\@ifnextchar[{\@strip}{\@strip[0pt/0pt]}}
-\def\@strip[#1/#2]{\global\@tempdima=#1\global\@tempdimb=#2%
- \global \setbox\@viper\vbox\bgroup%
- \hsize\textwidth
- \@parboxrestore
- \col@number \@ne
- \vrule height\topskip width\z@ depth\z@}
-\def\endstrip{%
- \egroup
- \if@firstcolumn
- \ifdim\pagetotal>\z@
- \global\ht@strip\pagegoal
- \global\advance\ht@strip by-\pagetotal
- \global\advance\ht@strip by-\stripsep
- \global\advance\ht@strip by-\ht\@viper
- \global\advance\ht@strip by-\stripsep
- \global\juo@ht=\ht\@viper
- \else
- \global\ht@strip\z@
- \fi
- \ifdim\ht@strip>\z@
- \add@strip{\the\pagetotal}{\the\juo@ht}{\the\@tempdima}{\the\@tempdimb}%
- \global\advance\juo@sk by1
- \fi
- \fi
-}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \begin{macro}{\@outputdblcol}
-% Modification in |\@outputdblcol| command for long abstract
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\newif\ifbotragg\botraggfalse
-\def\@outputdblcol@pptt{%
-\if@firstcolumn
- \global\@firstcolumnfalse
- \global\setbox\@leftcolumn\box\@outputbox
- \global\c@colht\@colht\global\c@addvipersep\z@
- \ifnum\juo@sk>0
- \remove@strip\juo@sar
- \global\@colht\the\juo@pr
- \global\@printfootfalse
- \ifdim\right@cor>\z@
- \global\advance\@colht by\right@cor
- \fi
- \global\advance\@colht by\cor@height
- \global\cor@height=0pt
- \fi
-\else
- \ifdim\c@colht>\@colht%
- \@tempdima\@colht%
- \ifdim\@colht>\z@%%
- \ifvoid\footins%
- \else%
- \vskip-\skip\footins%
- \fi%
- \splittopskip0pt%
- \setbox\my@outputbox\vbox{%
- \vspace*{\@colht}%%
- \global\botraggfalse%
- \vskip.7\baselineskip%
- \vsplit\@outputbox to \baselineskip%
- \unvbox\@outputbox}%
- \unvbox\my@outputbox%
- \ifvoid\my@outputbox%
- \global\botraggtrue
- \fi%
- \global \@printfoottrue
- \global\c@addvipersep\m@addvipersep%
- \else%
- \fi%
- \ifnum\juo@sk>0%
- \else%
- \global\@colht\c@colht%
- \fi%
- \else%
- \global \@firstcolumntrue%
- \global\setbox\@outputbox\vbox to \ht\@leftcolumn{\unvbox\@outputbox}%
- \setbox\@outputbox \vbox{\hb@xt@\textwidth {%
- \hb@xt@\columnwidth {\box\@leftcolumn \hss}%
- \hfil
- \vrule \@width\columnseprule
- \hfil
- \hb@xt@\columnwidth{\box\@outputbox \hss}}%
- \vss}%
- \@combinedblfloats
- \@outputpage
- \begingroup
- \@dblfloatplacement
- \@startdblcolumn
- \@whilesw\if@fcolmade \fi
- {\@outputpage\@startdblcolumn}%
- \endgroup
- \global\juo@sk=0\global\juo@sar={}%
- \global\cor@height\z@\global\c@addvipersep\z@
- \fi
-\fi
-}
-\fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% Here ends the code for both document class and document style.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%</class|style>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-%
-%
-% \section{Tail of Document Style Module}%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*style>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% This is not good: we now define a command for the
-% document style that is defined elsewhere for the class.
-% FIXME: only one definition of |\email|
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%%\def\email#1{\appdef\@author{\make@authoremail{#1}}}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% Here is another klootch:
-% we have to provide a meaning to |\footnote@size|;
-% the following code duplicates code in the class file.
-% FIXME: only one code for |\footnote@size|!
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\AtBeginDocument{%
- \ifx\footnote@size\undefined
- \let\footnote@size\footnotesize
- \fi
-}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% Finally, execute the commands queued by |\AtEndOfClass|.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\@styleh@@k
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% Here ends the document style.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%</style>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \section{Programming Conventions}%
-% In writing the above code, I cleave to certain conventions, noted
-% here.
-% My goal in explaining them is to encourage others maintaining this
-% body of code to consider following them as well.
-% The benefits are twofold:
-% Some of the coding conventions aim to avoid programming pitfalls;
-% following them reduces maintenance costs.
-% Others make the code easier to read; following these eases the
-% process of understanding how the code works.
-%
-% And, for my part, I prefer to read code of this type.
-%
-% \subsection{Whitespace Conventions}%
-% Exactly where code lines break and indent, and where additional
-% whitespace is inserted is explained here.
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item
-% Each new macro definition or register assignment begins a new line.
-% Therefore, |\def|, |\newcommand|, and their ilk will start in column
-% 1.
-% \item
-% Code is indented one space for each level of nesting within braces
-% |{}|.
-% \item
-% Likewise, if possible, for |\if...| and matching |\fi|.
-% \item
-% However, the closing brace or |\fi| is outdented by one so that it
-% falls
-% at the same level of indentation as its matching brace or |\if|,
-% and it appears alone on its line.
-% \item
-% Use of the |tab| character is deprecated
-% (tabs are not standardized across all applications and operating
-% systems).
-% \item
-% Lines of code are limited to 72 characters.
-% I follow this convention mostly to ease the transmission of files
-% via email (a deprecated practice) and to accomodate people with
-% small monitors.
-% But |ltxdoc| output looks better with the shorter lines, too.
-% \item
-% Extraneous whitespace is avoided by using the comment character |%|.
-% In most cases, if falling at the end of a line of code,
-% a brace will be immediately followed by a comment character,
-% as will the macro parameter |#1| and any one-letter control sequence,
-% like |\\|.
-% \end{itemize}
-% These conventions taken together are illustrated by the following:
-% \begin{verbatim}
-%\def\prepdef#1#2{%
-% \@ifxundefined#1{\toks@{}}{\toks@\expandafter{#1}}%
-% \toks@ii{#2}%
-% \edef#1{\the\toks@ii\the\toks@}%
-%}%
-% \end{verbatim}
-% In the above, the definition of |\prepdef| would not fit on a single
-% line,
-% and required breaking. The first and last lines have matching braces,
-% and are a the same level of indentation, with the last line containing
-% a single brace.
-%
-% Each of the three intervening lines has balanced braces and is
-% indented by one space. Each line that would otherwise end in a single
-% brace character is terminated by a comment character.
-%
-% Some coders rely on the fact that a space character seen by \TeX's
-% scanner while in vertical mode is a no-op.
-% Be that as it may, I eliminate them unless actually intentional.
-%
-% \subsection{Conventions For Procedures}%
-% Here are some of my preferences when writing procedures:
-% \begin{itemize}
-%
-% \item
-% I dislike defining a macro within another macro, especially when the
-% pattern part is non-nil.
-% You know, you are not saving much space in |mem| when you do this,
-% right?
-% You do save space in the hash table and the string pool, though.
-% On the other hand, we are not dealing with small \TeX\ engines
-% anymore; Team \LaTeX\ has made sure of this.
-%
-% \item
-% If two or more macros have very similar replacement parts, consider
-% layering.
-%
-% \item
-% Macros may perform parsing, may maintain tokens or registers, or may
-% set type (produce marks). I try to avoid combining the three functions
-% in a single macro.
-%
-% \item
-% When a procedure both does assignments and sets type, I try to have a
-% clean separations between the two activities. Try to avoid:
-% \begin{verbatim}
-% \vskip10pt
-% \parindent=0pt
-% \leavevmode
-% \end{verbatim}
-%
-% \item
-% The Boolean calculus (cf. |\@ifx|)
-% is very useful and produces code that executes nicely.
-% Using it also helps avoid your having to debug problems where
-% |\if...| and |\fi| are not properly balanced
-% (a nightmare in case you didn't already experience it).
-%
-% \end{itemize}
-%
-% \subsection{Conventions For \LaTeX}%
-% Team \LaTeX\ make certain recommendations in \file{clsguide.tex}.
-% Ones that I particularly pay attention to are:
-% \begin{itemize}
-%
-% \item
-% For the sake of ``color safety'',
-% use |\sbox| rather than |\setbox|, |\mbox| rather than |\hbox|, and
-% |\parbox| or |minipage| rather than |\vbox|.
-%
-% \item
-% Use |\newcommand| and |\newenvironment| to declare user-level commands
-% and environments. Avoid the idiom |\def\foo|, |\def\endfoo| to define
-% an environment.
-% Ideally, all user-level markup could be extracted from the
-% document class by grepping on |\newcommand| and |\newenvironment|.
-%
-% \item
-% Prefer to use |\setlength| to assign registers.
-%
-% \end{itemize}
-% I cannot help but notice that much of the code of \LaTeX\ itself fails
-% to comply with many of the coding recommendations of Team \LaTeX.
-%
-%
-% \section{Yet to do}%
-% The following work is considered for the release of the \aastex\ 5.0
-% package:
-% \begin{description}
-%
-% \item[dot accents]
-% Augment |\dot| and |\ddot| with |\dddot| and |\ddddot|.
-%
-% \item[Posters]
-% Andrea wants to do posters. Ref best practices list. Sample document?
-%
-% \item[BibTeX]
-% Support for BibTeX-generated bibliographies.
-% Not a problem if using |thebibliography| and |\bibitem|.
-% Hoguvain and Berend have written a \file{astrobib.bst}.
-%
-% \item[Landscape tables]
-% Automatically rotate landscape tables if supported by output device.
-% User may specify \cmd\rotate in the preamble of |deluxetable|.
-% Works for any DVI translator targetting a PostScript printer.
-%
-% This command will be used in the pseudopreamble of deluxetable to create
-% a turnpage (broadside) table in the midst of an upright (portrait) article.
-% Implementation will be dependent on authors having a PostScript print engine.
-%
-% The |\rotate| command is implemented syntactically, but not semantically.
-%
-% \item[Two-column preprint formatting]
-% Automatically put text in 2-col, appendices in 1-col, references in
-% 2-col, obviating the user's need to insert markup. Done.
-%
-% If using native \LaTeX, all float types are supported, columns are not
-% balanced, and the page ends.
-%
-% If using |multicol|, only full-page floats are supported, columns
-% balance, and pages do not break.
-%
-% \item[Table autoplacement]
-% Possibly support automatically placing tables as follows:
-% less than 20pc width---single column,
-% up to 44pc width---full width,
-% over 44pc width---landscape.
-%
-% \item[tighten]
-% Class option |tighten| and commands |\doublespace|, |\singlespace| are noops in
-% |manuscript| substyle. In others, what should be done?
-%
-% \item[documentstyle]
-% What should happen to a compatibility mode document?
-% Wouldn't we have to support the exact same document style options?
-%
-% \item[substyle names]
-% Should we keep the old names or use the new ones?
-%
-% \item[FIXME]
-% Resolve all the remaining notes.
-%
-% \item[Line lengths]
-% Source lines should be no loonger than 72 characters. Done.
-% But re-check.
-%
-% \item[Testing]
-% In particular, the |\@ptabularcr| code is new,
-% but I have done some testing.
-%
-% \item[Distribution]
-% Why not make this class a supported \LaTeX\ oackage?
-% It would go in: |CTAN:/macros/latex/contrib/supported|.
-%
-% \item[Macro names verbatim]
-% Use |\cmd{\foo}| when the control sequence name
-% appears in a moving argument.
-% Use |\cs{foo}| when the name involves non-alpha characters.
-%
-% \item[Changes from 4.0]
-% It would be good to have a section in the users guide
-% called ``Changes from 4.0''.
-% Summarizing
-% the new markup commands,
-% the removed markup commands,
-% any alteration in formatting,
-% etc.
-%
-% \item[Deprecated features list]
-% To add to user documentation.
-%
-% \item[ltxdoc stuff]
-% |\begin{environment}|, |\generate|
-%
-% \item[Best practices list]
-% To add to user documentation.
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item How to code celestial coordinates.
-% \item How to specify object names (+,-).
-% \item How to include figures.
-% \item How to rotate tables.
-% \item |\ge|, |\le| exist---use them!
-% \item Don't include gigantic macro lists---please include only the ones you actually use.
-% \item |\newcommand| is recommended; please avoid |\def|.
-% \item Ionization potentials?
-% \end{itemize}
-%
-% \item
-% Natbib commands in user guide.
-%
-% \end{description}
-%
-% \section{Recently Done}%
-%
-% \begin{description}
-%
-% \item
-% We have to say proactively that plano tables aren't accepted anymore,
-% and not just remove those words from the AASTeX user guide.
-% That's why the |apjpt| and |aj_pt| substyles are removed from v4.1.
-% Done 9113.
-%
-% \item
-% \cmd\SGMLcite. (CB): Deprecated in favor of <TT>\cite*. Unimplemented.
-% \item
-% \cmd\slantfrac reimplemented with \cmd\case. Done 9113.
-%
-% \item[Deprecate commands]
-% Deprecate |\nl|, |\nextline|, |\tablevspace|, and |\tablebreak|. Done 9113.
-%
-% \item[URL commands]
-% Functionality covered by |hyperref| package.
-% Syntax: |\anchor|\arg{HREF}\arg{text}.
-% Syntax: |\url|\oarg{URL-specification}\arg{text}.
-% Syntax: |\email|\arg{address}.
-% Ref: \file{url.sty} in |/contrib/other/misc|. \file{hyperref.sty} in |/contrib/supported/hyperref|.
-% Done 9113.
-%
-% \item[Celestial objects]
-% Syntax: |\objectname|\oarg{catalogID}\arg{text}. Done 9113.
-%
-% \item[\texttt{slantfrac}]
-% \texttt{slantfrac} to be deprecated. |\onehalf| and friends to be
-% implemented with |\frac|. Done 9113.
-%
-% \item[Extensions to \texttt{cite}]
-% Support multiple citations in natural language. Ref email from Anton. Done with |natbib|.
-%
-% \item[\texttt{natbib}]
-% I incorporated |natbib| into \aastex\ as a vehicle for the expanded
-% citation functionality. |natbib| seems the right choice because
-% it is a part of |latex/contrib/supported|, is well thought out and implemented
-% and because it provided more than enough functionality, albeit
-% via different syntax.
-%
-% \item[\texttt{amsmath}]
-% The |amsmath| package is the successor to the \LaTeX2.09 |amssymb| package.
-% I have incorporated it into \aastex\ (that is, it is automatically loaded),
-% making it a constant part of \aastex\ rather than an option.
-%
-% The |amsmath| package is a part of |latex/packages/|, so it is an
-% ``annointed'' package---much more blessed than even the
-% |latex/contrib/supported| stuff. I have no hesitation about
-% mandating its use.
-%
-% \item[Unknown Symbols]
-% The following control sequence names cause \LaTeX\ to complain:
-% |\lhd|, |\rhd|, |\unlhd|, |\unrhd|, |\sqsubset|, |\sqsupset|,
-% |\Join|, |\leadsto|, |\Box|, |\Diamond|, |\mho|.
-% The message seen is:
-% \begin{verbatim}
-% ! LaTeX Error: Command \lhd not provided in base LaTeX2e.
-% \end{verbatim}
-% This problem is now fixed (9113).
-%
-% \item[UCPress administrative markup]
-% Syntax: \cmd\journal\arg{ID}, \cmd\SGML\arg{text}, \cmd\SGMLentity\arg{text}.
-% No production. Not documented in user guide. Done 9113.
-%
-% \item[Evan's Markup]
-% Done 9113.
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item
-% \cmd\journal\arg{ApJ},
-% \cmd\articleID\arg{number},
-% \cmd\volno\arg{number}\arg{issue}.
-% \item
-% \cmd\journalID\arg{number}
-% \item
-% \cmd\url\oarg[URL]\arg{text or URL}
-% \item
-% \cmd\corpauth\arg{name} appears in arg of |\author|.
-% \item
-% \cmd\SGML\arg{text}
-% \item
-% \cmd\clc\arg{text} goes to \cmd\SGMLclc\arg{text}
-% \item
-% \cmd\SGMLentity\arg{text}
-% \item
-% \cmd\SGMLbi\arg{text}
-% \item
-% \cmd\SGMLbsc\arg{text}
-% \end{itemize}
-%
-% \item[Email]
-% Syntax: \cmd\email\arg{address}.
-%
-% \item[\cs{objectname}]
-% \cmd\objectname\oarg{catalog id}\arg{text}
-%
-% \item[Evan's Points]
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item
-% \cmd\shorttitle\arg{text} and \cmd\shortauthors\arg{text}
-% instead of |\lefthead| and |\righthead|. Done.
-% \item
-% \cmd\anchor is \cmd\url
-% \item
-% No plates anymore.
-% \item
-% Turnpage figures are a requirement.
-% \end{itemize}
-%
-% \end{description}
-%
-% \section{User Documentation and Sample Documents}%
-% User documentation for \aastex\ is the file \file{aasguide.tex},
-% generated by the {\sc docstrip} module following this section.
-%
-% Note:
-% This file requires the \file{aastex.cls} document class itself,
-% thereby lengthening the bootstrap process.
-% The requirement enters in the section documenting
-% the text entities defined by the class (see key |spec.symbols|).
-%
-% Sample files for this distribution of \aastex\ include
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item
-% |sample.tex| is an \aastex\ tutorial paper with a fairly complete
-% set of markup.
-% \item
-% \item
-% |table.tex| is a sample \aastex\ table with complex column headings.
-% \end{itemize}%
-%
-% Since the user documentation and sample files are not heavily commented,
-% there is little utility in displaying them in the programmer documentation,
-% therefore, I bring the class doc to an end here.
-%
-% \Finale
-% %Here ends the programmer's documentation.
-% \endinput
-%
-% User documentation module
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*guide>
-\documentclass[preprint2]{aastex}%
-\makeindex
-%
-\hyphenation{com-pu-scripts}
-\newcommand\aastex{AAS\TeX}%
-\newcommand\aastexhome{http://www.journals.uchicago.edu/AAS/AASTeX}%
-%
-\makeatletter
-\renewenvironment{theindex}
- {\if@twocolumn
- \@restonecolfalse
- \else
- \@restonecoltrue
- \fi
- \columnseprule \z@
- \columnsep 35\p@
- \twocolumn[\section{\indexname}]%
-% \@mkboth{\MakeUppercase\indexname}%
-% {\MakeUppercase\indexname}%
- \thispagestyle{plain}\parindent\z@
- \parskip\z@ \@plus .3\p@\relax
- \let\item\@idxitem}
- {\if@restonecol\onecolumn\else\clearpage\fi}
-\makeatother
-%
-\makeatletter % This code stolen from ltxguide.cls:
-% Some hacks with verbatim... NB: this would be better done with the
-% verbatim package, but this document has to run on any LaTeX
-% installation.
-
-\let\o@verbatim\verbatim
-\def\verbatim{%
- \ifhmode\unskip\par\fi
-% \nopagebreak % Overridden by list penalty
- \ifx\@currsize\normalsize
- \small
- \fi
- \o@verbatim
-}
-
-% Here we extend the font-setting command to include making <> active
-% (ie adjusting the input encoding).
-\renewcommand \verbatim@font {%
- \normalfont \ttfamily
- \catcode`\<=\active
- \catcode`\>=\active
-}
-
-% Make |...| a synonym for \verb|...|.
-\RequirePackage{shortvrb}
-\MakeShortVerb{\|}
-
-
-% Make active <...> produce italics surrounded by angle brackets
-% (used in verbatim and \verb).
-% << produces a less-than, and >> produces a greater-than.
-
-\begingroup
- \catcode`\<=\active
- \catcode`\>=\active
- \gdef<{\@ifnextchar<\@lt\@meta}
- \gdef>{\@ifnextchar>\@gt\@gtr@err}
- \gdef\@meta#1>{\m{#1}}
- \gdef\@lt<{\char`\<}
- \gdef\@gt>{\char`\>}
-\endgroup
-\def\@gtr@err{%
- \ClassError{ltxguide}{%
- Isolated \protect>%
- }{%
- In this document class, \protect<...\protect>
- is used to indicate a parameter.\MessageBreak
- I've just found a \protect> on its own.
- Perhaps you meant to type \protect>\protect>?
- }%
-}
-\def\verbatim@nolig@list{\do\`\do\,\do\'\do\-}
-
-% Various forms of argument:
-
-\newcommand{\m}[1]{\mbox{$\langle$\it #1\/$\rangle$}}
-\renewcommand{\arg}[1]{{\tt\string{}\m{#1}{\tt\string}}}
-\newcommand{\oarg}[1]{{\tt[%]
-}\m{#1}{\tt%[
-]}}
-\def\cmd#1{\cs{\expandafter\cmd@to@cs\string#1}}
-\def\cmd@to@cs#1#2{\char\number`#2\relax}
-\DeclareRobustCommand\cs[1]{\texttt{\char`\\#1}}
-\newcommand*{\file}[1]{\texttt{#1}}%
-
- % end of code stolen from ltxguide.cls. Thanks, Alan.
-
- % code stolen from doc.dtx:
-\def\GetFileInfo#1{%
- \def\filename{#1}%
- \def\@tempb##1 ##2 ##3\relax##4\relax{%
- \def\filedate{##1}%
- \def\fileversion{##2}%
- \def\fileinfo{##3}}%
- \edef\@tempa{\csname ver@#1\endcsname}%
- \expandafter\@tempb\@tempa\relax? ? \relax\relax}
-
- % end of code stolen from doc.dtx. Thanks FMi.
-\makeatother
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% Title block of user guide.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\title{%
- The \aastex\ \LaTeXe\ Macros\\for Manuscript Preparation
-}%
-
-%\author{Chris Biemesderfer}
-%\affil{Seagoat Consulting}
-
-%\author{Revised by Jeannette Barnes, May 1995}
-%\affil{American Astronomical Society}
-%\affil{NOAO, P.O. Box 26732, Tucson, AZ 85726}
-
-%\author{Revised for \fileversion\ by Arthur Ogawa, \filedate}
-%\affil{\TeX\ Consultants}
-%\email{ogawa@teleport.com}
-
-\expandafter\GetFileInfo\expandafter{\jobname.tex}%
-
-%\date{\filedate, \fileversion}
-
-\begin{document}
-
-\maketitle
-\tableofcontents
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% Introduction
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\section{Introduction}
-
-The American Astronomical Society (AAS) has developed a markup package to assist authors in preparing manuscripts intended for submission to AAS-affiliated journals, as well as to other journals that will accept \aastex\ manuscripts.
-
-The most important aspect of the \aastex\
-package is that it defines the set of commands, or markup,
-that can be used to identify the structural elements of papers.
-When articles are marked up using this set of standard commands,
-they may then be submitted electronically to the editorial
-offices and fed into the electronic production of the journals.
-
-This guide contains basic instructions for creating
-manuscripts using the \aastex\ markup package.
-Authors are expected to be familiar with the editorial
-requirements of the journals so that they can make
-appropriate submissions; they should also have a basic
-knowledge of \LaTeX---for instance, knowing
-how to set up equations using \LaTeX\ commands.
-A number of useful publications about \LaTeX\ (and \TeX) are listed in
-the reference section of this guide.
-
-{\em Authors who wish to submit papers electronically to the ApJ, AJ, or PASP are strongly encouraged use the \aastex\ markup package as described in this guide.}
-
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% Package context
-% \begin{macrocode}
-
-\section{\aastex\ Article Markup}
-
-This section describes the commands in the \aastex\
-package that an author might enter in a manuscript that is being
-prepared for electronic submission to one of the journals.
-The commands will be described in roughly the same order as they
-would appear in a manuscript.
-The reader will also find it helpful to examine the
-sample files that are distributed with the package and to consult the
-information available on the AASTeX Web site located at \aastexhome.
-Authors are also reminded to review the instructions to authors and electronic
-submissions guidelines for the specific journals to which they submit
-their papers.
-
-\subsection{Preamble}\label{sec-preamble}
-
-In \LaTeX\ manuscripts, the preamble is that portion of the file before
-the \verb"\begin{document}" command.
-
-\subsubsection{Getting Started}
-
-The first piece of markup in the manuscript declares the
-overall style of the document. Any commands that appear before this
-markup will be ignored.
-\begin{quote}\index{documentclass@\verb`\documentclass`}
-\begin{verbatim}
-\documentclass{aastex}
-\end{verbatim}
-\end{quote}
-This specifies the document class as \texttt{aastex} with the
-default style (|manuscript|).
-The paper copy produced by this style file will be double spaced.
-Any tables included in the main body of the manuscript will also be
-double spaced.
-
-Other substyles are available. They are discussed in \S~\ref{styles}.
-
-\subsubsection{Defining New Commands}
-
-\aastex\ allows authors to define their own commands with
-\LaTeX's \verb"\newcommand".
-(Authors should not use the plain \TeX\ \verb"\def" command in
-AAS journal submissions.)
-Authors' \verb"\newcommand" definitions must be placed in the
-document preamble.
-
-In general, author-defined commands that are
-abbreviations or shorthands, for instance,
-\begin{quote}
-\begin{verbatim}
-\newcommand{\lte}{local thermodynamic
- equilibrium}
-\end{verbatim}
-\end{quote}
-, are acceptable and can be easily handled
-by journal offices and publishers during data conversion.
-However, abbreviations that attempt to define new symbols by using
-\LaTeX\ commands for repositioning text tend to
-cause problems in the publication process and should be avoided.
-
-In particular, author-defined commands that use any of the commands
-listed below are apt to cause problems during data conversion.
-\begin{quote}
-\verb"\hskip", \verb"\vskip",
-\verb"\raise", \verb"\raisebox",
-\verb"\lower", \verb"\rlap",
-\verb"\kern", \verb"\lineskip",
-\verb"\char", \verb"\mathchar",
-\verb"\mathcode", \verb"\buildref",
-\verb"\mathrel", \verb"\baselineskip"
-\end{quote}
-Consequently, authors are strongly discouraged from
-using them.
-
-Extra symbols are defined for \aastex,
-some specifically for an astronomical context, others more
-broadly used in math and physics.
-In particular, the AMS has additional symbol fonts that are
-available in a standard \LaTeX\ package (\verb"amssymb").
-All of these symbols are depicted in the additional symbosl tables
-supplied with the package and on the \aastex\ Web site.
-
-Before defining a new symbol command,
-authors are advised to consult these tables to see whether the
-symbol they need already exists. If it does, they should use the
-corresponding markup command.
-Authors should \emph{not} redefine existing command names.
-When one of these commands is encountered in an electronic
-manuscript submitted to a journal, an author's redefinition will
-be ignored and the originally-defined command used.
-
-\subsubsection{Editorial Information}
-
-A number of markup commands are available for
-editorial office use in recording the publication history
-for each manuscript.
-These commands should be used by
-the editorial and production offices only.
-\begin{quote}
-\begin{verbatim}
-\received{<receipt date>}
-\revised{<revision date>}
-\accepted{<acceptance date>}
-
-\ccc{<code>}
-\cpright{<type>}{<year>}
-\end{verbatim}
-\end{quote}
-
-Copyright information should be specified with the commands \verb"\cpright"\
-and \verb"\ccc". The type of copyright and the corresponding year
-are given in \verb"\cpright". Valid copyright types are as follows.
-\begin{quote}
-\begin{tabular}{l@{\quad}p{1.8in}}
-\tt AAS & Copyright has been assigned to the AAS\\
-\tt ASP & Copyright has been assigned to the ASP\\
-\tt PD & The article is in the public domain\\
-\tt none & No copyright is claimed for the article
-\end{tabular}
-\end{quote}
-The copyright type is case sensitive, so the type string must be
-entered exactly as given above.
-
-The Copyright Clearing Center code may be given in the \verb"\ccc"\
-command. The code is taken as regular text, so any special characters,
-notably ``\$,'' must be escaped as appropriate.
-
-\subsubsection{Short Comment on Title Page}
-
-Authors who wish to include a short remark on the title page,
-such as the name and date of the journal to which an article
-has been submitted, may do so with the following command.
-\begin{quote}
-\begin{verbatim}
-\slugcomment{<text>}
-\end{verbatim}
-\end{quote}
-In the
-\texttt{manuscript} style,
-these comments appear on the title page after the title and authors;
-in the
-\texttt{preprint} style,
-they are placed at the upper right corner
-of the title page.
-
-\subsubsection{Running Heads}\label{shorthead}
-
-Authors are invited to supply running head information using the
-following commands.
-\begin{quote}
-\begin{verbatim}
-\shorttitle{<text>}
-\shortauthors{<text>}
-\end{verbatim}
-\end{quote}
-Two different kinds of data are generally supplied in running heads.
-The left head contains an author list, (last
-names, possibly truncated as ``et al.''), while the right head
-is an abbreviated form of the paper title. This running head
-information will not appear on the \LaTeX-printed page but will be
-passed through to copy editing staff
-for inclusion in the published version.
-
-Editors and publishers impose varying requirements
-on the brevity of these data. A good rule of thumb is to limit the list
-of authors to three or else use ``et al.,'' and to limit the
-short form of the title to 40--45 characters.
-The editors may choose to modify the author-supplied
-running heads.
-
-\subsection{Starting the Main Body}
-
-The preamble is a control section.
-None of the markup that appears in the preamble
-actually typesets anything. The author must include a
-\begin{quote}
-\begin{verbatim}
-\begin{document}
-\end{verbatim}
-\end{quote}
-command to identify the beginning of the main, typeset
-portion of the manuscript.
-
-\subsection{Title and Author Information}
-
-Authors should use the
-\verb"\title"\
- and \verb"\author"\ commands to specify title
-and author information and the \verb"\affil" command
-to indicate the author's primary affiliation.
-Each \verb"\author"\
- command
-should be followed by a corresponding \verb"\affil"\
-and optional \verb"\email"\ command.
-\begin{quote}
-\begin{verbatim}
-\title{<text>}
-\author{<name(s)>}
-\affil{<affiliation>}
-\affil{<address>}
-\email{<e-mail address>}
-\and
-\end{verbatim}
-\end{quote}
- Line breaks may be inserted in the title
-with the \verb"\\" command. (Long titles will
-be broken automatically, so the \verb"\\" markup is not required.)
-If the title is explicitly broken over several lines, the
-preferred style for titles in AAS and ASP journals is the so-called
-``inverted pyramid'' style. In this style, the longest line
-is the first (or top) line, and each succeeding line is shorter.
-The text of the title should be entered in mixed case;
-it will be printed in upper case or mixed case according to
-the style of the publication.
-Footnotes are permissible in titles. Be careful to ensure that
-alternate affiliations (see below) are properly numbered if a
-footnote to the title is specified.
-
-Authors' names should be entered in mixed case.
-Names that appear together in the author list for authors who
-have the same primary affiliation should be specified in a single
-\verb"\author"\ command.
-Each author group should be followed by
-an \verb"\affil"\ command giving the principle
-affiliation of those authors. Physical and postal address information
-for the specified institution may be included with \verb"\affil".
-The address can be broken over several lines using the
-\verb"\\" command to indicate
-the line breaks.
-Usually, however, postal information will fit on one line.
-When there is more than one \verb"\author"\ command, the final
-one should be preceded by the \verb"\and"\ command.
-
-Authors often have affiliations in addition to their principle employer.
-These alternate affiliations may be specified with the \verb"\altaffilmark"\
- and \verb"\altaffiltext"\
- commands.
-These behave like the \verb"\footnotemark"\
-and |\footnotetext| commands of \LaTeX\ except that they do not take
-optional arguments. \verb"\altaffilmark"\
- is appended to authors' names in the \verb"\author"\
- list and generates superscript identification numbers.
-The text for the individual alternate affiliations is generated by the
-\verb"\altaffiltext"\
- command.
-\begin{quote}
-\begin{verbatim}
-\altaffilmark{<key number(s)>}
-\altaffiltext{<numerical key>}{<text>}
-\end{verbatim}
-\end{quote}
-It is up to the author to make sure that
- each \m{key number} in his or her \verb"\altaffilmark"\
- matches the \m{numerical key} for
-the corresponding \verb"\altaffiltext".
-
-When there is a lengthy author list, all author names may be
-specified in a single \verb"\author"\
- command with affiliations
-specified using the \verb"\altaffilmark"\ me\-chan\-ism.
-In these cases, no \verb"\affil"\
- commands are used, and in print, the
-affiliations would all be listed in a footnote block at the bottom
-of the title page.
-
-
-\subsection{Abstract}
-
-A paper's abstract should be marked with the
-\texttt{abstract} environment.
-\begin{quote}
-\begin{verbatim}
-\begin{abstract}
-<abstract text>
-\end{abstract}
-\end{verbatim}
-\end{quote}
-
-If an author is using the \texttt{preprint2} style, and the abstract is too long to fit on the title page, the \texttt{longabstract} option may be used in the \texttt{documentclass} to break the abstract to a new page.
-
-\noindent
-%\begin{quote}
-\begin{verbatim}
-\documentclass[preprint2,longabstract]{aastex}
-\end{verbatim}
-%\end{quote}
-
-\noindent Note that authors should use the \texttt{longabstract} option only in \texttt{preprint2} mode and only when the abstract is too long to fit on the title page.
-
-\subsection{Keywords}
-
-Keywords, or subject headings, are accommodated
-as a single piece of text.
-\begin{quote}
-\begin{verbatim}
-\keywords{<text>}
-\end{verbatim}
-\end{quote}
-If authors supply keywords, they must be delimited by whatever
-punctuation is required by the journal.
-They should be specified in alphabetical order.
-The \verb"\keywords"\
- command will print the proper leading text---``Keywords:,'' ``Subject headings:,'' etc.---according to journal style.
-
-\subsection{Comments to Editors}
-
-Authors may make notes or comments to the copy editor with the
-\verb`\notetoeditor` command.
-\begin{quote}
-\begin{verbatim}
-\notetoeditor{<text>}
-\end{verbatim}
-\end{quote}
-This command behaves like a
-footnote. Output to the printed page is produced only in the
-\texttt{manuscript} style.
-
-\subsection{Sections}
-
-\aastex\ supports four levels of section headings.
-\begin{quote}
-\begin{verbatim}
-\section{<heading>}
-\subsection{<heading>}
-\subsubsection{<heading>}
-\paragraph{<heading>}
-\end{verbatim}
-\end{quote}
-Section headings should be given in upper case or mixed case, depending
-on the style of the journal.
-Note that these commands delimit sections by marking the
-\emph{beginning} of each section;
-there are no separate commands to mark the ends.
-
-\subsection{Figure and Table Placement} \label{place}
-
-When preparing a manuscript for submission to an AAS journal, figures and tables do not generally need to be ``placed'' in the text of the
-document where an author would like them to appear but
-rather may simply follow the main body of the text.
-However, authors may indicate to the editors the preferred placement of
-these items by use of the \verb"\place*" commands.
-\begin{quote}
-\begin{verbatim}
-\placetable{<key>}
-\placefigure{<key>}
-\end{verbatim}
-\end{quote}
-The \verb"\place*{"\m{key}\verb"}" commands are similar to the
-\verb"\ref"
- command in La\TeX\
-and require corresponding \verb"\label"\
- commands to link them to the
-proper elements.
-
-When used in the
-\texttt{manuscript} style, the \verb"\place*"\ commands will print a short
-message to the editor about figure or table placement.
-In the other styles, nothing is printed.
-
-\subsection{Acknowledgments}
-
-\aastex\ supports an
-\verb"\acknowledgments"%
-\index{acknowledgments@\verb`\acknowledgments`} section.
-\begin{quote}
-\begin{verbatim}
-\acknowledgments
- <acknowledgments text>
-\end{verbatim}
-\end{quote}
-In the \aastex\ styles, acknowledgments are set off from the
-conclusion of the body with vertical space. Note the acknowledgments
-command takes no arguments.
-
-\subsection{Facilities}
-
-To help organizations obtain information on the effectiveness of their
-telescopes, the AAS has created a group of keywords for telescope
-facilities. Using a common set of keywords will make searches for
-this information significantly easier and more accurate.
-In addition, the use of facility
-keywords will be useful for linking papers that utilize the
-same telescopes together within the framework of the Virtual Observatory.
-A facilities keyword list is available through a
-link at the AASTeX Web page, \aastexhome.
-
-The facilities list should appear after the
-acknowledgments section.
-\begin{quote}
-\begin{verbatim}
-Facilities: \facility{<facility ID>},
- \facility{<facility ID>},
- \facility{<facility ID>}, ...
-\end{verbatim}
-\end{quote}
-As part of the {\it facility ID} argument,
-the author may also include
-the name of the instrument in parentheses, e.g.
-|\facility{HST(WFPC2)}| or |\facility{MMT(Blue channel spectrograph)}|.
-There is no limit to the number of facility keywords
-that may be included in a paper.
-
-\subsection{Appendices}
-
-When one or more appendices are needed in a paper, the point where the
-main body text ends and the appendix begins should be marked
-with the \verb"\appendix"\
- command.
-\begin{quote}
-\begin{verbatim}
-\section{<body section>}
-\appendix
-\section{<appendix section>}
-\end{verbatim}
-\end{quote}
-The \verb"\appendix"\
- command takes care of a number of internal
-housekeeping concerns, such as identifying sections with letters
-instead of numerals, and resetting the equation counter.
-Note that the \verb"\appendix"\
- command takes no arguments.
-Sections in the appendix should be headed with \verb"\section"\
- commands.
-
-\subsection{Equations}
-
-Display equations can be typeset in \LaTeX\ in a number of ways.
-The following three are probably of greatest use in AASTeX.
-\begin{quote}
-\begin{verbatim}
-\begin{displaymath}
-\end{displaymath}
-
-\begin{equation}
-\end{equation}
-
-\begin{eqnarray}
-\end{eqnarray}
-\end{verbatim}
-\end{quote}
-The
-\texttt{displaymath} environment
-will break out a single,
-unnumbered formula. The \texttt{equation} environment does the same
-thing except that the equation is
-autonumbered by \LaTeX.
-To set several formul\ae\ in which vertical alignment
-is required, or to display a long equation across multiple lines, use the
-\texttt{eqnarray} environment. Each line of the \texttt{eqnarray}
-will be numbered
-unless a \verb"\nonumber"\
- command is inserted
-before the equation line delimiter
-(\verb"\\").
-\LaTeX's equation counter is \emph{not} incremented when
-\verb"\nonumber"\
- is used.
-
-Authors may occasionally wish to group related equations together and
-identify them with letters appended to the equation number.
-When this is desired, such related equations should still be set
-in \texttt{equation} or \texttt{eqnarray} environments, whichever is
-appropriate, and then grouped within
-the \texttt{mathletters} environment.
-\begin{quote}
-\begin{verbatim}
-\begin{mathletters}
-<equation> or <eqnarray>
-\end{mathletters}
-\end{verbatim}
-\end{quote}
-
-It is possible to override \LaTeX's automatic numbering within the
-\texttt{equation} or \texttt{eqnarray} environments using
-\begin{quote}
-\begin{verbatim}
-\eqnum{<text>}
-\end{verbatim}
-\end{quote}
-When \verb"\eqnum"\
- is specified inside an \texttt{equation} environment
-or on a particular equation within an \texttt{eqnarray}, the text
-supplied as an argument to \verb"\eqnum"\
- is used as the equation
-identifier.
-\LaTeX's equation counter is \emph{not} incremented when \verb"\eqnum"\
- is used.
-\verb"\eqnum"\
- must be used \emph{inside} the math environment.
-
-If, as a consequence of the use of \verb"\eqnum"\
- or \verb"\nonumber",
-\LaTeX's equation counter gets out of synch with the author's
-intended sequence,
-the counter may be reset to a particular value.
-\begin{quote}
-\begin{verbatim}
-\setcounter{equation}{<number>}
-\end{verbatim}
-\end{quote}
-The equation counter should be set to the number corresponding to the
-last equation that was formatted; therefore, it is most appropriate for this
-command to appear immediately after an \texttt{equation} or
-\texttt{eqnarray} environment.
-The command must be used
-\emph{outside} the math environments.
-
-The \texttt{eqsecnum} style file can also be used to modify the way equations
-are numbered. See \S~\ref{styles} for details.
-
-\subsection{Citations and Bibliography} \label{bibliography}
-
-Two options are available for marking citations
-and formatting reference lists: the standard \LaTeX\ \verb"thebibliography"\
-environment, and the \aastex\ \verb"references"\ environment.
-Authors are strongly encouraged to use \verb"thebibliography"\
-in their electronic submissions.
-
-Please note that the bibliographic data supplied by the author in
-the reference list must conform to the standards of the journal.
-Many of the journals that
-accept \aastex\ agreed to reduce typographic overhead, bold, italic, etc.,
-in reference lists \citep{Abt90}, and the AAS
-has elected not to burden authors with tedious markup commands
-to delimit the bibliographic fields. Instead, citations will be
-typeset in roman with no size or style changes.
-It is the responsibility of the author to
-arrange the required bibliographic fields in the
-proper order with the correct punctuation, according to journal
-style.
-
-\subsubsection{The {\tt thebibliography} Environment} \label{bib}
-
-The preferred method for reference management is to use \LaTeX's
-\texttt{thebibliography} environment, marking citations in the body
-of the paper with
-\verb"\citep"\ or \verb"\citet"\
-and associating references with them using \verb"\bibitem".
-The \verb"\cite"-\verb"\bibitem"\
-mechanism associates citations and references symbolically
-while maintaining proper citation syntax within the paper.
-In the \verb"\bibitem"\
-command, the author should specify citation data inside
-square brackets and a citation key in curly braces
-for each reference. (The |\bibitem| command is described
-in detail in the next section.)
-
-\noindent
-%\begin{quote}
-\begin{verbatim}
- \begin{thebibliography}{<dummy>}
- \bibitem[<cite data>]{<key>} <bibliographic data>
- .
- .
- \end{thebibliography}
-\end{verbatim}
-%\end{quote}
-
-\noindent Note that the argument \m{dummy} to the start command of the
-environment is not
-used in the \aastex\ package, but it is included to be consistent with the
-syntax of standard \LaTeX. It is acceptable to simply insert an
-empty pair of curly braces at the end of the \verb"\begin{thebibliography}"\
-command.
-
-\subsubsection{Specifying Bibliographic and Citation Information}\label{spec-bib-data}
-
-\aastex\ uses the |natbib| package \citep{Daly98} for
-citation management.
-The |natbib| package re-implements \LaTeX's |\cite| command,
-offering greater flexibility for managing citations in the
-author-year form.
-
-When using |natbib|, bibliographic data are defined
-in |\bibitem| commands.
-
-\noindent
-%\begin{quote}
-\begin{verbatim}
- \bibitem[<author>(<year>)]{<key>}
- <bibliographic data>
-\end{verbatim}
-%\end{quote}
-
-\noindent
-The square-bracketed argument of the |\bibitem|
-contains the \m{author} portion of the citation
-followed by the \m{year} set off in parentheses.
-The parentheses are important---|natbib| uses them to
-determine the year portion of the citation---so be sure to
-include them.
-The argument \m{key} in curly braces is the code name
-by which the citation is referenced in the text.
-
-When placing citations in the text, the author should use
-either a |\citep| or a |\citet| command.
-\begin{quote}
-\begin{verbatim}
-\citep{<key(s)>}
-\citet{<key(s)>}
-\end{verbatim}
-\end{quote}
-The |\citep| command produces a citation that is entirely
-set off by parentheses, e.g.\ ``(Cox 1995),'' while |\citet| permits
-the author's name to form part of the text, e.g.\ ``Cox (1995).''
-The plain \LaTeX\ |\cite| command behaves like |\citet|.
-
-The citation \m{key} must correspond to the \m{key} in a |\bibitem| command.
-During processing, information from the square-bracketed argument of the
-key's |\bibitem| is inserted in
-the text at the location of the \verb"\cite"\ command.
-Multiple citation keys are separated by commas, e.g.,
-|\citep|\allowbreak
-|{knuth84,|\allowbreak
-|cox95,|\allowbreak
-|lamport94}|.
-
-|\citep| and |\citet| each take optional arguments that specify
-extra text to be appended to the citation label. Text in the first
-set of square brackets will appear before the cite while
-text in the second set will appear after it.
-For instance, |\citep[chap. 2]{jon90}|
-would produce the citation ``(Jones et al., 1990, chap. 2),''
-|\citep[see][]{jon90}| would produce ``(see Jones et al, 1990),'' and
-|\citep[see][chap. 2]|\allowbreak|{jon90}| would print
-``(see Jones et al., 1990, chap. 2).''
-In addition, the * form of the
-cite commands will print the full author list instead of the
-abbreviated form.
-
-The syntax discussed above should be sufficient for the
-vast majority of cases; however, \aastex\
-does use the full |natbib| implementation, so many more
-syntax options are available. For details on
-the full range of |natbib| citation options, see the section
-on using |natbib| on the \aastex\ Web
-site and the |natbib| package documentation.
-
-It is not possible to use \verb"\bibitem"
-within \aastex's \texttt{references} environment
-(\S~\ref{refenv}),
-nor will \verb"\cite"\ commands work properly in the main body
-if \verb"\bibitem" commands are absent.
-
-\subsubsection{The {\tt references} Environment}\label{refenv}
-
-Some authors might prefer to enter citations directly
-into the body of an article. If so, the |references| environment may be
-used to format the reference list. The
-\texttt{references} environment
-simply sets off
-the list of references and adjusts spacing parameters.
-\begin{quote}
-\begin{verbatim}
-\begin{references}
-\reference{<key>} <bibliographic data>
- .
- .
-\end{references}
-\end{verbatim}
-\end{quote}
-
-While the
-\texttt{references} environment
-remains supported in \aastex,
-we anticipate that authors will prefer the stronger capabilities of
-the standard \LaTeX\ |thebibliography| commands as extended by |natbib|.
-
-\subsubsection{Abbreviations for Journal Names}
-
-\aastex\ commands are available for many of the most--frequently-referenced
-journals so that authors may use the markup rather than having
-to look up a particular journal's abbreviation.
-In principle, all the journals should be using the
-same abbreviations, but it is fair to anticipate some changes in
-the specific abbreviations before a system is finally settled on.
-If authors use the journal macros, they need not worry about
-changes to journal style governing abbreviations in citations.
-A listing of the current abbreviation macros appears
-in Table~\ref{journame}.
-\begin{table}
-\footnotesize
-\begin{center}
-\caption{Abbreviations for Journal Names}\label{journame}
-\begin{tabular}{l@{\quad}p{2.5in}}
-\verb"\araa" & Annual Review of Astronomy and Astrophysics\\
-\verb"\actaa" & Acta Astronomica\\
-\verb"\ao" & Applied Optics\\
-\verb"\aj" & Astronomical Journal\\
-\verb"\azh" & Astronomicheskii Zhurnal\\
-\verb"\aap" & Astronomy and Astrophysics\\
-\verb"\aapr" & Astronomy and Astrophysics Reviews\\
-\verb"\apj" & Astrophysical Journal\\
-\verb"\apjl" & \rule[.5ex]{2em}{.4pt}, Letters to the Editor\\
-\verb"\apjs" & \rule[.5ex]{2em}{.4pt}, Supplement Series\\
-\verb"\aplett" & Astrophysics Letters and Communications\\
-\verb"\apspr" & Astrophysics Space Physics Research\\
-\verb"\apss" & Astrophysics and Space Science\\
-\verb"\aaps" & \rule[.5ex]{2em}{.4pt}, Supplement Series\\
-\verb"\baas" & Bulletin of the AAS\\
-\verb"\bain" & Bulletin Astronomical Inst. Netherlands\\
-\verb"\caa" & Chinese Astronomy and Astrophysics\\
-\verb"\cjaa" & Chinese Journal of Astronomy and Astrophysics\\
-\verb"\fcp" & Fundamental Cosmic Physics\\
-\verb"\gca" & Geochimica Cosmochimica Acta\\
-\verb"\grl" & Geophysics Research Letters\\
-\verb"\iaucirc" & IAU Circular\\
-\verb"\icarus" & Icarus\\
-\verb"\jcp" & Journal of Chemical Physics\\
-\verb"\jgr" & Journal of Geophysical Research\\
-\verb"\jcap" & Journal of Cosmology and Astroparticle Physics\\
-\verb"\jqsrt" & Journal of Quantitative Specstroscopy and Radiative Transfer\\
-\verb"\jrasc" & Journal of the RAS of Canada\\
-\verb"\memras" & Memoirs of the RAS\\
-\verb"\memsai" & Mem. Societa Astronomica Italiana\\
-\verb"\mnras" & Monthly Notices of the RAS\\
-\verb"\na" & New Astronomy\\
-\verb"\nar" & New Astronomy Review\\
-\verb"\nat" & Nature\\
-\verb"\nphysa" & Nuclear Physics A\\
-\verb"\physscr" & Physica Scripta\\
-\verb"\pra" & Physical Review A\\
-\verb"\prb" & Physical Review B\\
-\verb"\prc" & Physical Review C\\
-\verb"\prd" & Physical Review D\\
-\verb"\pre" & Physical Review E\\
-\verb"\prl" & Physical Review Letters\\
-\verb"\physrep" & Physics Reports\\
-\verb"\planss" & Planetary Space Science\\
-\verb"\procspie" & Proceedings of the SPIE\\
-\verb"\pasa" & Publications of the ASA\\
-\verb"\pasj" & Publications of the ASJ\\
-\verb"\pasp" & Publications of the ASP\\
-\verb"\qjras" & Quarterly Journal of the RAS\\
-\verb"\rmxaa" & Revista Mexicana de Astronomia y Astrofisica \\
-\verb"\skytel" & Sky and Telescope\\
-\verb"\solphys" & Solar Physics\\
-\verb"\ssr" & Space Science Reviews\\
-\verb"\sovast" & Soviet Astronomy\\
-\verb"\zap" & Zeitschrift fuer Astrophysik\\
-\end{tabular}
-\end{center}
-\end{table}
-
-\subsection{Figures}
-
-\subsubsection{Electronic Art}
-
-If an author wishes
-to embed graphics in a manuscript, it is necessary that
-the graphics files conform
-to the Encapsulated PostScript (EPS) standard \citep{PLRM}. The
-author must also have an appropriate DVI translator,
-one that targets PostScript output devices. (Detailed information
-on preparing and submitting electronic art is
-available in the submissions instructions for the journals.)
-
-Several commands are available for including EPS files
-in \aastex\ manuscripts. They should be placed within the
- \texttt{figure} environment.
-\begin{quote}
-\begin{verbatim}
-\begin{figure}
-\figurenum{<text>}
-\epsscale{<num>}
-\plotone{<epsfile>}
-\plottwo{<epsfile>}{<epsfile>}
-\caption{<text>}
-\end{figure}
-\end{verbatim}
-\end{quote}
-When \verb"\figurenum" is specified inside the {\tt figure} environment,
-the text supplied as an argument to \verb"\figurenum" will be used as the
-figure identifier.
-\LaTeX's figure counter is \emph{not} incremented when \verb"\figurenum"
-is used.
-\verb"\figurenum" must be used \emph{inside} the {\tt figure} environment.
-
-\verb"\plotone" inserts the graphic in the named EPS file,
-scaled so that the horizontal
-dimension fits the width of the body text;
-the vertical dimension is scaled to maintain the aspect ratio.
-\verb"\plottwo" inserts two plots next to each other.
-Scale factors are determined automatically from information in the
-EPS file.
-
-The automatic scaling may be overridden with the command
-\verb"\epsscale{<num>}", where \m{num} is a scaling factor
- in decimal units, e.g., 0.80.
-
-The |\plotone| and |\plottwo|
-macros are invocations of the |graphicx|
-|\includegraphics| command. In most instances, using
-|\plotone| or |\plottwo| should work for placing
-figures in \aastex\ documents. However, if more
-flexibility is needed, the |\includegraphics| command
-may be invoked directly. For instance, to rotate
-an image by 90 degrees, use
-\begin{quote}
-\begin{verbatim}
-\includegraphics[angle=90]{<epsfile>}
-\end{verbatim}
-\end{quote}
-See the |graphicx| package documentation or the \aastex\ Web site for a
-complete list of the available arguments to |\includegraphics|.
-
-Authors are strongly encouraged to use |\plotone|, |\plottwo|, or |\includegraphics| to place their EPS figures. However, as of the current release, the old |\plotfiddle| macro from v4.0 has been reintroduced and may be used if the desired figure placement cannot be achieved with one of the methods above. The syntax of the command is
-\begin{quote}
-\begin{verbatim}
-\plotfiddle{<epsfile>}{<vsize>}{<rot>}{<hsf>}
- {<vsf>}{<htrans>}{<vtrans>}
-\end{verbatim}
-\end{quote}
-where the arguments are
-\begin{center}
-\begin{tabular}{l@{\quad}p{2in}}
-\tt epsfile & name of the EPS file \\
-\tt vsize & vertical white space to allow for plot (\LaTeX\ dimension)\\
-\tt rot & rotation angle (degrees)\\
-\tt hsf & horizontal width of scaled figure (PS points)\\
-\tt vsf & vertical height of scaled figure (PS points)\\
-\tt htrans & horizontal translation (PS points)\\
-\tt vtrans & vertical translation (PS points)\\
-\end{tabular}
-\end{center}
-PostScript points are 1/72 inches, so an \m{htrans} of 72 moves
-the graphic 1 inch to the right. Note that the \m{vtrans} argument is
-discarded in the reimplented macro and is included only for
-backward compatibility with \aastex\ v4.0.
-
-\subsubsection{Figure Captions} \label{legends}
-
-Regardless of whether an author includes electronic art in a manuscript, figure captions, or legends, should be provided. If art is included in the document, use the \verb"\caption"\ command within the \texttt{figure} environment. If electronic art is not included, figure captions may be grouped together at the end of the document using \verb"\figcaption".
-\begin{quote}
-\begin{verbatim}
-\figcaption[<filename>]{<text>\label{<key>}}
-\end{verbatim}
-\end{quote}
-The optional argument, \m{filename}, can be used to iden\-ti\-fy
-the file for the corresponding figure;
-\m{text} refers to the caption for that figure. The author
-may provide a \verb"\label"\ with a unique \m{key} for cross-referencing
-purposes.
-
-When the \verb"\figcaption"\ command is used, the figure
-identification label,
-e.g., ``Figure 1,'' is generated automatically by the command itself, so
-there is no need to key this information.
- There is an upper limit of seven figure captions per page.
-Footnotes are \emph{not} supported for figures.
-
-\subsection{Tables} \label{tables}
-
-There is support in the \aastex\ package for tables via two mechanisms:
-\LaTeX's standard \texttt{table} environment,
-and the
-\texttt{deluxetable} environment, which allows for the formatting
-of lengthy tabular material. Tables may be
-marked up using either mechanism, although use of
-\texttt{deluxetable} is preferred.
-Authors should \emph{not} use the \LaTeX\
-\texttt{tabbing} environment when preparing electronic
-submissions.
-
-\subsubsection{The \texttt{deluxetable} Environment} \label{dte}
-
-Authors are encouraged to use the
-\texttt{deluxetable} environment to format their tables since it automatically
-handles many formatting tasks, including table numbering and insertion
-of horizontal rules. It also provides mechanisms for breaking tables and
-controlling width and vertical spacing that are unavailable in the \LaTeX\
-\texttt{tabular} environment.
-
-The \texttt{deluxetable} environment
-is delimited by \LaTeX's familiar
-\verb"\begin"\ and \verb"\end"\ constructs.
-The content consists of preamble commands and table data,
-the latter delimited by \verb"\startdata"\
- and \verb"\enddata".
-\begin{quote}
-\begin{verbatim}
-\begin{deluxetable}{<cols>}
-<preamble commands>
-\startdata
-<table data>
-\enddata
-\end{deluxetable}
-\end{verbatim}
-\end{quote}
-The argument \m{cols} specifies the justification for each col\-umn.
-An alignment token, ``l,'' ``c,'' or ``r,'' is given for each column,
-indicating flush left, centered, or flush right.
-
-\subsubsection{Preamble to the \texttt{deluxetable}}%
-
-There are several commands in the
-\texttt{deluxetable} environment
-that
-must be given in the preamble.
-\begin{quote}
-\begin{verbatim}
-\tabletypesize{<font size command>}
-\rotate
-\tablewidth{<dimen>}
-\tablenum{<text>}
-\tablecolumns{<num>}
-\tablecaption{<text>\label{<key>}}
-\tablehead{<text>}
-\end{verbatim}
-\end{quote}
-
-If a table is too wide for the printed page, the font size of the table
-can be cahnged with the \verb"\tabletypesize" command, which takes as
-an argument one of the the font size change commands:
-\verb"\small"\
- (11pt), \verb"\footnotesize"\
- (10pt), or
-\verb"\scriptsize"\
- (8pt).
-
-To force a table to be set in landscape orientation,
-use the \verb"\rotate"\ \label{cmd-rotate} command. Note that
-most DVI previewers will not properly render rotated |deluxetable|
-output, so in order to see what the table looks like,
-it must be output to PostScript and viewed there.
-
-The width of a deluxetable is defined by \verb"\tablewidth".
-If this command is omitted, the default width is the width of the page.
-The table can be set to its natural width by specifying
-a dimension of \verb"0pt".
-Long tables may have a natural width that is
-different for each page. The natural width for each page will be
-printed to the log file during processing.
-Authors may then use this log information to
-define a fixed table width in order to give the
-table a more uniform appearance across pages.
-
-It is possible to override \LaTeX's automatic numbering within the
-\texttt{deluxetable} environment.
-When \verb"\tablenum"\
- is specified inside a \texttt{deluxetable}
-preamble,
-the text supplied as an argument to \verb"\tablenum"\
- will be used as the
-table identifier.
-\LaTeX's equation counter is \emph{not} incremented when
-\verb"\tablenum"\
- is used.
-
-The caption (actually, the title) of the table is specified
-in \verb"\tablecaption".
-The text of \verb"\tablecaption"\
- should be brief;
-explanatory notes should be specified in the end notes to the table
-(see \S \ref{tabendnotes}
- below). If the caption
-does not appear
-centered above the table after processing, then specify the width of
-the table explicitly with the \verb"\tablewidth"\
- command and rerun
-\LaTeX\ on the file. If an author supplies a \verb"\label"\ for cross-referencing purposes, this, too, should be included in the \verb"\tablecaption".
-
-Column headings are specified with \verb"\tablehead".
-Within the \verb"\tablehead", each column heading should be given
-in a \verb"\colhead", which will ensure that the heading
-is centered
-on the natural width of the column.
-There should be a heading for each column so that there are as
-many \verb"\colhead"\
- commands in the \verb"\tablehead"\
- as there
-are data columns.
-
-\begin{quote}
-\begin{verbatim}
-\tablehead{
-\colhead{<heading>} & \colhead{<heading>}}
-\end{verbatim}
-\end{quote}
-
-If more complicated column headings are required,
-any valid \texttt{tabular} command that constitutes a proper
-head line in a \LaTeX\ table may be used. For example, the
-|\multicolumn| command below would create a table head with
-text centered over five columns.
-\begin{quote}
-\begin{verbatim}
-\multicolumn{5}{c}{<text>}
-\end{verbatim}
-\end{quote}
-Consult \citet{Lamport} or \citet{Kopka99} for further details
-on the available table commands.
-
-The \verb"\tablecolumns{"\m{num}\verb"}" command
-is necessary if an author has
-multi-line column headings produced by \verb"\tablehead"\
- or other \LaTeX\
-commands and is using either the \verb"\cutinhead"\
- or \verb"\sidehead"\
-markup (see below). The \m{num} argument should be
-set to the true number of columns in the
-table. The command must come before the \verb"\startdata"\
- command.
-
-%It is possible that a complicated table heading will overflow
-%the vertical space allotted for the table heading.
-%The fraction of the page allocated
-%for the table heading may be changed with \verb"\tableheadfrac".
-%The \m{num} argument to \verb"\tableheadfrac"\
-% should be the
-%decimal fraction of the page used for heading information.
-%The default value is 0.1, meaning that 10\% of the page height
-%is reserved for the table heading. It should rarely be necessary
-%to change this value.
-
-\subsubsection{Content of the \texttt{deluxetable}}%
-
-After the table title and column headings have been specified,
-data rows can be entered.
-Data rows are delimited with the \verb"\startdata"\
- and \verb"\enddata"\ commands.
-The end of each row is indicated with the standard \LaTeX\ \verb"\\" command.
-Data cells within a row are separated with \& (ampersand) characters.
-\begin{quote}
-\begin{verbatim}
-\startdata
-<data line>\\
-<cell>&<cell>&<cell>\\
-<more data lines>\\
-\enddata
-\end{verbatim}
-\end{quote}
-
-Column alignment within the data columns can be adjusted with the \TeX\
-\verb"\phantom{"\m{string}\verb"}" command,
-where \m{string} can be any character, e.g., \verb"\phantom{$\arcmin$}".
-A blank character of width \m{string} is then inserted in the table.
-Four commands have been predefined for this purpose.
-\begin{quote}
-\begin{tabular}{l@{\quad}p{2in}}
-{\verb"\phn"%
-} & {phantom numeral 0-9}\\
-{\verb"\phd"%
-} & {phantom decimal point}\\
-{\verb"\phs"%
-} & {phantom $\pm$ sign}\\
-{\verb"\phm{"\m{string}\verb"}"} & {generic phantom}\\
-\end{tabular}
-\end{quote}
-
-Extra vertical space can be inserted between rows with an optional argument to the
-\verb"\\" command.
-\begin{quote}
-\begin{verbatim}
-\\[<dimen>]
-\end{verbatim}
-\end{quote}
-The argument is a dimension
-and may be specified in any units that are legitimate in \LaTeX.
-
-In a table, it may happen that several rows of data are
-associated with a single object or item.
-Such logical groupings should not be broken across pages.
-In these cases, the |\tablebreak| command may be used to force
-a page break at the desired point.
-\begin{quote}
-\begin{verbatim}
-<table row>\\
-\tablebreak
-<next table row>\\
-\end{verbatim}
-\end{quote}
-This command can be used any time that the default |deluxetable| page
-breaks need to be overridden.
-
-Journals often require that table cells that contain no data
-be explicitly marked. This is to differentiate such cells from
-blank cells, which are frequently interpreted as implicitly
-repeating the entry in the corresponding cell in the row preceding.
-Table cells for which there are no data should contain
-a \verb"\nodata"\
- command.
-\begin{quote}
-\begin{verbatim}
-\nodata
-\end{verbatim}
-\end{quote}
-
-Within the |deluxetable| body, two kinds of special heads are
-allowed, |\cutinhead| and |\sidehead|.
-A cut-in head is a piece of text centered across the width
-of the table. It is spaced above and below
-from the data rows that precede and
-follow it and will appear set off by rules in the \LaTeX\ output.
-Similarly, the command for a side head produces a row spanning
-the width of the table but with the text left justified.
-\begin{quote}
-\begin{verbatim}
-\cutinhead{<text>}
-\sidehead{<text>}
-\end{verbatim}
-\end{quote}
-
-Table footnotes (more properly, table \emph{end notes})
-may also be used in the \texttt{deluxetable} environment.
-Their use is described in detail in \S \ref{tabendnotes}.
-
-\subsubsection{The \texttt{table} Environment}
-
-Authors may also compose tables using the \texttt{table} environment.
-\begin{quote}
-\begin{verbatim}
-\begin{table}
-\end{table}
-\end{verbatim}
-\end{quote}
-The \texttt{table}\ environment
-encloses not only the tabular
-material but also any title or footnote information
-associated with the table.
-
-Titles, or captions, for tables are indicated with a |\caption|
-command
-\begin{quote}
-\begin{verbatim}
-\caption{<text>\label{<key>}}
-\end{verbatim}
-\end{quote}
-A table label, e.g. ``Table 2,'' is generated automatically
-by \verb"\caption".
- The author
-may provide a \verb"\label"\ in the caption with a unique \m{key}
-for cross-referencing
-purposes.
-
-The table body should appear within the \texttt{tabular} environment.
-\begin{quote}
-\begin{verbatim}
-\begin{tabular}{<cols>}
-\end{tabular}
-\end{verbatim}
-\end{quote}
-The alignment tokens in \m{cols} specify the justification for each column. The letters ``l,'' ``c,'' or ``r'' is given for each column,
-indicating left, center, or right justification.
-Consult \citet{Lamport} for details about using
-the
-\texttt{tabular} environment
-to prepare tables.
-
-Each \texttt{tabular} table must appear within a \texttt{table}
-environment. There should be only one \texttt{tabular} table per
-\texttt{table}
-environment.
-If the journal requests manuscripts with only one table per page,
-the author may need to insert a \verb"\clearpage"\
- command after especially short tables.
-
-Use the |\tableline| command to insert horizontal rules in the
-|tabular| environment.
-\begin{quote}
-\verb"\tableline"
- \end{quote}
-The use of vertical rules should be avoided.
-
-As with the \texttt{deluxetable} environment, it
- is possible to override \LaTeX's automatic numbering within the
-\texttt{table} environment using \verb"\tablenum".
-\verb"\tablenum"\
- must be used \emph{inside} the \texttt{table}
-environment.
-
-\subsubsection{Table End Notes} \label{tabendnotes}
-
-\aastex\ supports footnotes and end notes within tables;
-this support applies to both the
-\texttt{deluxetable} environment
-and the standard \LaTeX\ \texttt{table} environment.
-
-Footnotes for tables are usually identified by lowercase letters
-rather than numbers. Use the |\tablenotemark| and |\tablenotetext|
-commands to supply table footnotes.
-As with \verb"\altaffilmark" and \verb"\altaffiltext", a note label,
-usually a letter, is required.
-\begin{quote}
-\begin{verbatim}
-\tablenotemark{<key letter(s)>}
-\tablenotetext{<alpha key>}{<text>}
-\end{verbatim}
-\end{quote}
-The \m{key letter} of the |\tablenotemark| should be the same as the
-\m{alpha key} for the corresponding \m{text}.
-It is the responsibility of the author to make the correspondence
-correct.
-
-Sometimes authors tabulate materials that have corresponding
-references and may want to associate these references with the table.
-Authors may also wish to append a short paragraph of explanatory
-notes that pertain to the entire table. These elements should be
-specified with the commands below.
-\begin{quote}
-\begin{verbatim}
-\tablerefs{<reference list>}
-\tablecomments{<text>}
-\end{verbatim}
-\end{quote}
-The \verb"\tablenotetext", \verb"\tablecomments", and
-\verb"\tablerefs" commands \emph{must}
- be specified after the
-\verb"\end{tabular}" or \verb"\enddata" and before
-the closing \verb"\end{table}" or \verb"\end{deluxetable}".
-
-\subsection{Supplemental Materials}
-
-For many years now, authors have been taking advantage of the AAS journals'
-ability to post supplemental materials with their papers in the electronic
-editions. Even though each paper must stand on its own
-scientifically without the supplements, these materials are reviewed in the
-peer review process and should be included in initial manuscript
-submissions. As with regular figures and tables, papers with online only
-data must reference each electronic object in the main text
-and include an explanation of what the reader will
-find in the electronic edition.
-
-The four most popular types of supplemental materials are
-machine-readable tables, online color figures, online-only figures, and
-animations. Please see each journal's Web site for details on
-what types of supplemental materials are acceptable, how to
-submit these materials, author tools for preparing them,
-and their associated costs.
-
-\subsubsection{Machine-readable Tables}
-
-Online-only tables submitted to AAS journals are converted
-to a machine-readable
-format for presentation in the electronic edition.
-Machine-readable tables have two
-parts: the formatted ASCII data and a metadata header that provides
-format, units, and short explanations of each column of data. This
-structure is designed to provide maximum flexibility and ease of use
-for readers who wish to further manipulate the data with their own
-computer programs or with software like Excel.
-
-For each machine-readable table, the author should include a short sample
-version of the table in his or her \LaTeX\ submission. This sample version
-will appear in the print edition as well as
-in HTML in the electronic edition. The sample table should be
-5 to 15 lines long. It should include a table note at the end
- with text indicating that a machine-readable
-version will be available in the electronic edition. For instance,
-\begin{quote}
-\begin{verbatim}
-\tablecomments{Table 1 is
-published in its entirety in
-the electronic edition of
-the Astrophysical Journal.
-A portion is shown here
-for guidance regarding its
-form and content.}
-\end{verbatim}
-\end{quote}
-Each example table must
-be cited and numbered as if it were a fully printed table.
-
-\subsubsection{Online Color Figures}
-
-For some journals, authors may submit figures
-that will appear in black and white in the
-print edition of a journal but in color in the electronic edition.
-In these cases, authors must submit separate black and white and RGB color
-versions of each figure labelled according to the
-file-naming conventions required for the publication.
-For the benefit of print journal readers, figure captions should be written
-with the color information placed inside parentheses,
-for instance, ``The dotted
-line (colored blue in electronic edition)
-is the H$_o$ = 75 km s-1 Mpc-1 model,'' and should
-include a note directing the reader to
-``See the electronic edition of the Journal
-for a color version of this figure.''
-
-\subsubsection{Online-only Figures}
-
-This feature is mainly useful for articles that contain large compendia
-of identification charts and other supplemental graphic material that need not
-be printed in full in the paper journal. Online-only figures are intended to
-provide supplemental information that is not critical to the scientific
-content of the article but that might nonetheless be of interest to the reader.
-
-Online-only figures must be mentioned explicitly by number and appear
-in correct numerical order in the body of the text. At least one figure
-in a series must be displayed as an example figure for the print edition.
-The caption should carry a message indicating that
-more figures are available in the electronic edition---for instance,
-``Plots for all sources are available in the electronic edition of the journal.''
-Enough information must be included in the figure caption for readers of the
-print edition to determine what is contained in the online-only figures.
-
-\subsubsection{Animations}
-
-Currently, only animations in the MPEG format are accepted by the AAS journals.
-Authors must supply a still frame from the animation in EPS format marked
-up like a regular figure that will serve as an example for the reader.
-They should include text in the caption for the
-still frame indicating that an animation is
-available electronically. For instance,
-``This figure is also available as an mpeg
-animation in the electronic edition of the {\it Astrophysical Journal}.''
-As with online-only figures, authors must include enough information in the
-figure caption for readers of the print edition to determine what the
-animation illustrates.
-
-\subsection{Miscellaneous}
-
-\subsubsection{Celestial Objects and Data Sets}
-
-Authors who wish to have the most important objects in their paper
-linked to a data center in the electronic edition may do so using the
-\begin{quote}
-\begin{verbatim}
-\objectname[<catalog ID>]{<text>}
-\end{verbatim}
-\end{quote}
-macro, or its alias |\object|.
-The text contained in the required argument
-will be printed in the paper and will serve as a link anchor
-in the electronic edition. The catalog ID
-given as an optional argument will be carried through as the identification
-key in the link to a data center. Note that links will only
-be activated if the name provided in the argument is recognized by a
-participating data center. It is the author's responsibility to use the
-correct identifier.
-
-Similar markup is available for linking to data sets hosted
-at participating data centers.
-\begin{quote}
-\begin{verbatim}
-\dataset[<catalog ID>]{<text>}
-\end{verbatim}
-\end{quote}
-In the paper, the text in the required argument will be
-printed while the the catalog ID value will be passed through to form
-links to data centers.
-
-When an article contains |\object| or |\dataset| commands, the
-publisher will be able to use the markup to
-pass along a list of objects and data sets used in the
-paper to database personnel. Software can then be used to construct links to
-those databases.
-Please check with each journal's Web site for instructions on how to
-determine the object and data set identifiers, the location of
-verifications tools, and information on where in the paper these
-macros can best be used.
-
-\subsubsection{Ionic Species and Chemical Bonds}
-
-When discussing atomic species, ionization levels can be indicated
-with the following command.
-\begin{quote}
-\begin{verbatim}
-\ion{<element>}{<level>}
-\end{verbatim}
-\end{quote}
-The ionization state is specified as the second argument
-and should be given as a numeral.
-For example, ``\ion{Ca}{3}'' would be marked up as \verb"\ion{Ca}{3}".
-
-For single, double, and triple chemical bonds, use the following macros.
-\begin{quote}
-\begin{verbatim}
-\sbond
-\dbond
-\tbond
-\end{verbatim}
-\end{quote}
-
-\subsubsection{Fractions}
-
-\aastex\ contains commands that permit authors to specify alternate
-forms for fractions.
-\LaTeX\ will set fractions in displayed math as built-up fractions;
-however, it is sometimes desirable to use case fractions in
-displayed equations.
-In such instances, one should use \verb"\case"\
-rather than \verb"\frac". Note, however, that authors submitting
-manuscripts electronically to AAS journals
-should generally find it unnecessary to use any markup other than the
-standard \LaTeX\ \verb"\frac".
-
-\begin{center}
-\renewcommand{\arraystretch}{1.4}
-\begin{tabular}{@{}llc@{}}
-Built-up & \verb"\frac{1}{2}" & $\displaystyle\frac{1}{2}$ \\
-Case & \verb"\case{1}{2}" & $\case{1}{2}$ \\
-Shilled & \verb"1/2" & $1/2$ \\
-\end{tabular}
-\end{center}
-
-\subsubsection{Astronomical Symbols}
-
-As mentioned earlier, the \aastex\ package
-contains a collection of assorted macros
-for symbols and abbreviations specific to an astronomical context.
-These are commonly useful and also somewhat difficult for authors
-to produce themselves because fussy kerning is required.
-See the symbols pages provided with the package distribution.
-Most of these commands can be used in both running text and math. However,
-\verb"\lesssim"\ and \verb"\gtrsim"\ can only be used in math mode.
-
-\subsubsection{Hypertext Constructs}
-
-The \verb"\anchor"\ \label{cmd-anchor} command is a general-purpose
-hypertext link tag, associating \verb"<text>" in the manuscript with
-the specified resource (\verb"<href>").
-\begin{quote}
-\begin{verbatim}
-\anchor{<href>}{<text>}
-\end{verbatim}
-\end{quote}
-\verb"<href>"\ should be specified as a \emph{full} URI, including the
-\verb"scheme:"\ designator (|http:|, |ftp:|, etc.).
-
-The \verb"\url" command supports the special case where an author
-wishes to express a URL in the text.
-\begin{quote}
-\begin{verbatim}
-\url{<text>}
-\end{verbatim}
-\end{quote}
-
-The \verb"\email"\ command is used to identify e-mail addresses
-anywhere in the manuscript.
-The text of the argument is the e-mail address.
-Please do \emph{not} prepend the \verb|mailto:| part.
-\begin{quote}
-\begin{verbatim}
-\email{<address>}
-\end{verbatim}
-\end{quote}
-This command should be used to indicate authors' e-mail addresses
-in author lists at the beginning of manuscripts.
-
-\subsection{Concluding the File}
-
-The last command in the electronic manuscript file should be the
-\begin{quote}
-\begin{verbatim}
-\end{document}
-\end{verbatim}
-\end{quote}
-command, which must appear after all the material in the paper.
-This command directs the formatter to finish processing the manuscript.
-
-\section{Style Options} \label{styles}
-
-\subsection{Manuscript Style}
-
-The default style option is the |manuscript| style. This style will
-produce double-spaced pages printed in a single column at the width
-of the page.
-
-\subsection{Preprints}
-
-Two preprint styles are available.
-The \texttt{preprint} style is similar to the |manuscript| style,
-but it is single-spaced and fully justified.
-The \texttt{preprint2} style produces a two-column preprint.
-
-\subsubsection{Single-column Preprint}
-
-A single-column preprint format may be specified with the
-\texttt{preprint} style option.
-\begin{quote}
-\begin{verbatim}
-\documentclass[preprint]{aastex}
-\end{verbatim}
-\end{quote}
-The size of the typeface used is under author control by way of
-\LaTeX's \m{nn}\texttt{pt} class options
-(where \m{nn} is 10, 11, or 12).
-Use of 10 point type is not recommended with the
-\texttt{preprint} style.
-
-\subsubsection{Two-column Preprint}
-
-The
-\texttt{preprint2} style
-has the principle function of providing two-column formatting.
-\begin{quote}
-\begin{verbatim}
-\documentclass[preprint2]{aastex}
-\end{verbatim}
-\end{quote}
-It is important to remember
-that text lines are considerably shorter when two columns are typeset
-side by side on a page. Long equations, wide tables and figures, and
-the like, may not typeset in this format without some adjustments.
-The expenditure of great effort to adapt copy and markup for
-two-column pages is counterproductive.
-Remember that the main
-goal of this package is to produce draft-, or referee-, format pages.
-It is the responsibility of the editors and publishers to
-produce publication-format papers for the journals.
-
-The \texttt{preprint2} style
-sets the article's front matter---the title, author, abstract,
-and keyword material---on a separate page at full text width.
-The body of the article is set in a two-column page grid,
-the appendices in a one-column page grid,
-and the bibliography in a two-column page grid.
-(This manual was prepared using the \texttt{preprint2} style.)
-
-The author may supply \LaTeX's \verb"\twocolumn"\ or |\onecolumn|
-commands whenever desired.
-Be aware, however, that using explicit column-switching commands can
-cause formatting problems.
-
-
-
-\subsection{The {\tt eqsecnum} Style}
-
-The \texttt{eqsecnum} style file can be used to modify the way equations
-are numbered.
-\begin{quote}
-\begin{verbatim}
-\documentclass[eqsecnum]{aastex}
-\end{verbatim}
-\end{quote}
-Normally, equations are numbered sequentially through the
-entire paper, starting over at ``(A1)'' if there is an appendix.
-If \texttt{eqsecnum} appears in the \texttt{documentclass} command,
-equation num\-bers will be sequential through each section and will be
-formatted ``({\it sec-eqn}),'' where ``{\it sec}'' is the current section number and
-``{\it eqn}'' is the number of the equation within that section.
-
-\subsection{The {\tt flushrt} Style }
-
-A \verb"flushrt"\ style option is available for authors that prefer to
-have their margins left and right justified.
-\begin{quote}
-\begin{verbatim}
-\documentclass[eqsecnum,flushrt]{aastex}
-\end{verbatim}
-\end{quote}
-Note the \texttt{preprint} and \texttt{preprint2} styles
-are already flush right by default.
-
-
-\section{Additional Documentation} \label{docs}
-
-The preceding explanation of the markup commands in the
-\aastex\ package has merit for defining syntax, but many
-authors will prefer to examine the sample papers that are
-included with the style files.
-The files of interest are described below.
-
-A comprehensive example employing nearly all of the capabilities
-of the package (in terms of markup as well as formatting)
-is in \verb"sample.tex".
-This file is annotated with comments that describe
-the purpose of most of the markup.
-\verb"sample.tex"\ includes three tables: two marked up using the
-\texttt{deluxetable} environment
-and another table using the \LaTeX\ \texttt{table}
-environment.
-
-In \verb"table.tex", a complex but short example of the
-\texttt{deluxetable} environment
-demonstrates some of the techniques
-that can be used to generate complex column headings and to align
-variable-width columns.
-Here the \LaTeX\ \verb"\multicolumn" command is used to span a heading
-over several columns. When \verb"\multicolumn" is used along with the
-\verb"\cutinhead" command, the \verb"\tablecolumns" command must be used to specify
-the number of columns in the table---otherwise the \verb"\cutinhead" command
-will not work properly.
-This table also makes use of the \verb"\phn" command to better align some of the
-columns.
-
-This user guide (\verb"aasguide.tex")
-is also marked up with the \aastex\ package,
-although it is not exemplary as a scientific paper.
-
-Many of the markup commands described in the preceding
-sections are standard \LaTeX\ commands. The reader who is
-unfamiliar with their syntax is referred to the \LaTeX\
-references works cited in the bibliography, in particular
-\citet{Kopka99} and \citet{Lamport}.
-
-Authors who wish to know the ins and outs of \TeX\ itself
-should read the \emph{\TeX book} \citep{Knuth}.
-This resource contains a good deal of information about
-typography in general. Many details of mathematical typography are
-discussed in \emph{Mathematics into Type} by \citet{Swanson}.
-
-\section{Acknowledgments}
-
-\aastex\ was designed and written by Chris Biemesderfer in 1988.
-Substantial revisions were made by Lee Brotzman and Pierre
-Landau when the package was updated to v4.0.
-\aastex\ was rewritten as a \LaTeXe\ class by Arthur Ogawa
-for the v5.0 release. It was updated to v5.2 by
-SR Nova Private Ltd.
-The documentation has benefited from revisions by
-Jeannette Barnes, Sara Zimmerman, and Greg Schwartz.
-
-\begin{thebibliography}{}
-
-\bibitem[Abt(1990)]{Abt90}
- Abt, H. 1990, \apj, 357, 1 (editorial)
-
-\bibitem[Adobe(1999)]{PLRM}
- Adobe Systems, Inc. 1999,
- \anchor{http://www.adobe.com/prodindex/postscript/}
- {PostScript Language Reference Manual} (Reading, MA: Addison-Wesley)
-
-\bibitem[Daly(1998)]{Daly98}
- Daly, P. 1998, \emph{Natural Sciences Citations and References}
- (\texttt{natbib} package documentation)
-
-\bibitem[Goossens, Mittelbach, and Samarin(1994)]{Goossens94}
- Goossens, M., Mittelbach, F., and Samarin, A. 1994,
- \emph{The \LaTeX\ Companion} (Reading, MA: Addison-Wesley)
-
-\bibitem[Hahn(1993)]{Hahn93}
- Hahn, J. 1993, \emph{\LaTeX\ for Everyone}
- (Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Prentice-Hall)
-
-\bibitem[Knuth(1984)]{Knuth}
- Knuth, D. 1984, \emph{The \TeX book} (Reading, MA: Addison-Wesley).
- \newblock Revised to cover \TeX3, 1991.
-
-\bibitem[Kopka and Daly(1999)]{Kopka99}
- Kopka, H. and Daly, P. 1999, \emph{A Guide to \LaTeX},
- 3rd edition, (Reading, MA: Addison-Wesley)
-
-\bibitem[Lamport(1994)]{Lamport}
- Lamport, L. 1994, \emph{\LaTeX: A Document Preparation System\/},
- 2nd edition, (Reading, MA: Addison-Wesley)
-
-\bibitem[Swanson(1979)]{Swanson}
- Swanson, E. 1979, \emph{Mathematics into Type}
- (Providence, RI: American Mathematical Society)
-
-\end{thebibliography}
-\end{document}
-%
-%</guide>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% Symbols module
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*symbols>
-\documentclass[preprint2]{aastex}
-
-\newcommand\aastex{AAS\TeX}%
-
-\pagestyle{myheadings}
-\markright{\aastex, AMS math, and \LaTeX\ symbols}%
-
-\begin{document}
-
-\begin{table}
-\caption{Additional \aastex\ symbols}
-\begin{center}
-\tabcolsep5pt
-\begin{tabular}{@{}ll@{\hspace*{1em}}ll@{}}
-$\lesssim$ & \verb"\lesssim", \verb"\la" &
-$\gtrsim$ & \verb"\gtrsim", \verb"\ga" \\
-\micron & \verb"\micron" &
-\sbond & \verb"\sbond" \\
-\dbond & \verb"\dbond" &
-\tbond & \verb"\tbond" \\
-$\sun$ & \verb"\sun" &
-$\earth$ & \verb"\earth" \\
-\diameter & \verb"\diameter" &
-\\
-\arcdeg & \verb"\arcdeg", \verb"\degr" &
-\sq & \verb"\sq" \\
-\arcmin & \verb"\arcmin" &
-\arcsec & \verb"\arcsec" \\
-\fd & \verb"\fd" &
-\fh & \verb"\fh" \\
-\fm & \verb"\fm" &
-\fs & \verb"\fs" \\
-\fdg & \verb"\fdg" &
-\farcm & \verb"\farcm" \\
-\farcs & \verb"\farcs" &
-\fp & \verb"\fp" \\
-\onehalf & \verb"\onehalf" &
-\ubvr & \verb"\ubvr" \\
-\onethird & \verb"\onethird" &
-\ub & \verb"\ub" \\
-\twothirds & \verb"\twothirds" &
-\bv & \verb"\bv" \\
-\onequarter & \verb"\onequarter" &
-\vr & \verb"\vr" \\
-\threequarters & \verb"\threequarters" &
-\ur & \verb"\ur" \\
-\end{tabular}
-\end{center}
-\end{table}
-
-\begin{table}
-\caption{Text-mode accents}
-\begin{center}
-\begin{tabular}{*{2}{ll@{\hspace{4em}}}ll}
-\`{o} & \verb"\`{o}" & \={o} & \verb"\={o}" & \t{oo} & \verb"\t{oo}" \\
-\'{o} & \verb"\'{o}" & \.{o} & \verb"\.{o}" & \c{o} & \verb"\c{o}" \\
-\^{o} & \verb"\^{o}" & \u{o} & \verb"\u{o}" & \d{o} & \verb"\d{o}" \\
-\"{o} & \verb#\"{o}# & \v{o} & \verb"\v{o}" & \b{o} & \verb"\b{o}" \\
-\~{o} & \verb"\~{o}" & \H{o} & \verb"\H{o}" & & \\
-\end{tabular}
-\end{center}
-\end{table}
-
-\begin{table}
-\caption{National symbols}
-\begin{center}
-\begin{tabular}{*{2}{ll@{\hspace{4em}}}ll}
-\oe & \verb"\oe" & \aa & \verb"\aa" & \l & \verb"\l" \\
-\OE & \verb"\OE" & \AA & \verb"\AA" & \L & \verb"\L" \\
-\ae & \verb"\ae" & \o & \verb"\o" & \ss & \verb"\ss" \\
-\AE & \verb"\AE" & \O & \verb"\O" & & \\
-\end{tabular}
-\end{center}
-\end{table}
-
-\begin{table}
-\caption{Math-mode accents}
-\begin{center}
-\begin{tabular}{ll@{\hspace{4em}}ll}
-$\hat{a}$ & \verb"\hat{a}" & $\dot{a}$ & \verb"\dot{a}" \\
-$\check{a}$ & \verb"\check{a}" & $\ddot{a}$ & \verb"\ddot{a}" \\
-$\tilde{a}$ & \verb"\tilde{a}" & $\breve{a}$ & \verb"\breve{a}" \\
-$\acute{a}$ & \verb"\acute{a}" & $\bar{a}$ & \verb"\bar{a}" \\
-$\grave{a}$ & \verb"\grave{a}" & $\vec{a}$ & \verb"\vec{a}" \\
-\end{tabular}
-\end{center}
-\end{table}
-
-\begin{table}
-\caption{Greek and Hebrew letters (math mode)}
-\begin{center}
-\begin{tabular}{cl@{\hspace{3em}}cl}
-$\alpha$ & \verb"\alpha" & $\nu$ & \verb"\nu" \\
-$\beta$ & \verb"\beta" & $\xi$ & \verb"\xi" \\
-$\gamma$ & \verb"\gamma" & $o$ & \verb"o" \\
-$\delta$ & \verb"\delta" & $\pi$ & \verb"\pi" \\
-$\epsilon$ & \verb"\epsilon" & $\rho$ & \verb"\rho" \\
-$\zeta$ & \verb"\zeta" & $\sigma$ & \verb"\sigma" \\
-$\eta$ & \verb"\eta" & $\tau$ & \verb"\tau" \\
-$\theta$ & \verb"\theta" & $\upsilon$ & \verb"\upsilon" \\
-$\iota$ & \verb"\iota" & $\phi$ & \verb"\phi" \\
-$\kappa$ & \verb"\kappa" & $\chi$ & \verb"\chi" \\
-$\lambda$ & \verb"\lambda" & $\psi$ & \verb"\psi" \\
-$\mu$ & \verb"\mu" & $\omega$ & \verb"\omega" \\
-
-$\digamma$ & \verb"\digamma" &
-$\varkappa$ & \verb"\varkappa" \\
-$\varepsilon$ & \verb"\varepsilon" & $\varsigma$ & \verb"\varsigma" \\
-$\vartheta$ & \verb"\vartheta" & $\varphi$ & \verb"\varphi" \\
-$\varrho$ & \verb"\varrho" & & \\
-
-$\Gamma$ & \verb"\Gamma" & $\Sigma$ & \verb"\Sigma" \\
-$\Delta$ & \verb"\Delta" & $\Upsilon$ & \verb"\Upsilon" \\
-$\Theta$ & \verb"\Theta" & $\Phi$ & \verb"\Phi" \\
-$\Lambda$ & \verb"\Lambda" & $\Psi$ & \verb"\Psi" \\
-$\Xi$ & \verb"\Xi" & $\Omega$ & \verb"\Omega" \\
-$\Pi$ & \verb"\Pi" & & \\
-
-$\aleph$ & \verb"\aleph" &
-$\beth$ & \verb"\beth" \\
-$\gimel$ & \verb"\gimel" &
-$\daleth$ & \verb"\daleth" \\
-\end{tabular}
-\end{center}
-\end{table}
-
-\begin{table}
-\caption{Binary operators (math mode)}
-\begin{center}
-\begin{tabular}{cl@{\hspace{3em}}cl}
-$\pm$ & \verb"\pm" & $\cap$ & \verb"\cap" \\
-$\mp$ & \verb"\mp" & $\cup$ & \verb"\cup" \\
-$\setminus$ & \verb"\setminus" & $\uplus$ & \verb"\uplus" \\
-$\cdot$ & \verb"\cdot" & $\sqcap$ & \verb"\sqcap" \\
-$\times$ & \verb"\times" & $\sqcup$ & \verb"\sqcup" \\
-$\ast$ & \verb"\ast" & $\triangleleft$ & \verb"\triangleleft" \\
-$\star$ & \verb"\star" & $\triangleright$ & \verb"\triangleright" \\
-$\diamond$ & \verb"\diamond" & $\wr$ & \verb"\wr" \\
-$\circ$ & \verb"\circ" & $\bigcirc$ & \verb"\bigcirc" \\
-$\bullet$ & \verb"\bullet" & $\bigtriangleup$ & \verb"\bigtriangleup" \\
-$\div$ & \verb"\div" & $\bigtriangledown$ & \verb"\bigtriangledown" \\
-$\lhd$ & \verb"\lhd" & $\rhd$ & \verb"\rhd" \\%FIXME
-$\vee$ & \verb"\vee" & $\odot$ & \verb"\odot" \\
-$\wedge$ & \verb"\wedge" & $\dagger$ & \verb"\dagger" \\
-$\oplus$ & \verb"\oplus" & $\ddagger$ & \verb"\ddagger" \\
-$\ominus$ & \verb"\ominus" & $\amalg$ & \verb"\amalg" \\
-$\otimes$ & \verb"\otimes" & $\unlhd$ & \verb"\unlhd" \\
-$\oslash$ & \verb"\oslash" & $\unrhd$ & \verb"\unrhd"
-\end{tabular}
-\end{center}
-\end{table}
-
-\clearpage
-
-\begin{table}
-\caption{AMS binary operators (math mode)}
-\begin{center}
-\begin{tabular}{ll@{\hspace{2em}}ll}
-$\dotplus$ & \verb"\dotplus" &
-$\ltimes$ & \verb"\ltimes" \\
-$\smallsetminus$ & \verb"\smallsetminus" &
-$\rtimes$ & \verb"\rtimes" \\
-$\Cap$ & \verb"\Cap", \verb"\doublecap" &
-$\leftthreetimes$ & \verb"\leftthreetimes" \\
-$\Cup$ & \verb"\Cup", \verb"\doublecup" &
-$\rightthreetimes$ & \verb"\rightthreetimes" \\
-$\barwedge$ & \verb"\barwedge" &
-$\curlywedge$ & \verb"\curlywedge" \\
-$\veebar$ & \verb"\veebar" &
-$\curlyvee$ & \verb"\curlyvee" \\
-$\doublebarwedge$ & \verb"\doublebarwedge" &
-\\
-$\boxminus$ & \verb"\boxminus" &
-$\circleddash$ & \verb"\circleddash" \\
-$\boxtimes$ & \verb"\boxtimes" &
-$\circledast$ & \verb"\circledast" \\
-$\boxdot$ & \verb"\boxdot" &
-$\circledcirc$ & \verb"\circledcirc" \\
-$\boxplus$ & \verb"\boxplus" &
-$\centerdot$ & \verb"\centerdot" \\
-$\divideontimes$ & \verb"\divideontimes" &
-$\intercal$ & \verb"\intercal" \\
-\end{tabular}
-\end{center}
-\end{table}
-
-\begin{table}
-\caption{Miscellaneous symbols}
-\begin{center}
-\begin{tabular}{ll@{\hspace{4em}}ll}
-\dag & \verb"\dag" & \S & \verb"\S" \\
-\copyright & \verb"\copyright"& \ddag & \verb"\ddag"\\
- \P & \verb"\P" & \pounds & \verb"\pounds" \\
-\# & \verb"\#" & \$ & \verb"\$"\\
- \% & \verb"\%" & \& & \verb"\&" \\
- \_ & \verb"\_" & \{ & \verb"\{" \\
- \} & \verb"\}" & & \\
-\end{tabular}
-\end{center}
-\end{table}
-
-\begin{table}
-\caption{Miscellaneous symbols (math mode)}
-\begin{center}
-\begin{tabular}{cl@{\hspace{3em}}cl}
-$\aleph$ & \verb"\aleph" & $\prime$ & \verb"\prime" \\
-$\hbar$ & \verb"\hbar" & $\emptyset$ & \verb"\emptyset" \\
-$\imath$ & \verb"\imath" & $\nabla$ & \verb"\nabla" \\
-$\jmath$ & \verb"\jmath" & $\surd$ & \verb"\surd" \\
-$\ell$ & \verb"\ell" & $\top$ & \verb"\top" \\
-$\wp$ & \verb"\wp" & $\bot$ & \verb"\bot" \\
-$\Re$ & \verb"\Re" & $\|$ & \verb"\|" \\
-$\Im$ & \verb"\Im" & $\angle$ & \verb"\angle" \\
-$\partial$ & \verb"\partial" & $\triangle$ & \verb"\triangle" \\
-$\infty$ & \verb"\infty" & $\backslash$ & \verb"\backslash" \\
-$\Box$ & \verb"\Box" & $\Diamond$ & \verb"\Diamond" \\
-$\forall$ & \verb"\forall" & $\sharp$ & \verb"\sharp" \\
-$\exists$ & \verb"\exists" & $\clubsuit$ & \verb"\clubsuit" \\
-$\neg$ & \verb"\neg" & $\diamondsuit$ & \verb"\diamondsuit" \\
-$\flat$ & \verb"\flat" & $\heartsuit$ & \verb"\heartsuit" \\
-$\natural$ & \verb"\natural" & $\spadesuit$ & \verb"\spadesuit" \\
-$\mho$ & \verb"\mho" & &
-\end{tabular}
-\end{center}
-\end{table}
-
-\begin{table}
-\caption{AMS miscellaneous symbols (math mode)}
-\begin{center}
-\begin{tabular}{ll@{\hspace{2em}}ll}
-$\hbar$ & \verb"\hbar" &
-$\backprime$ & \verb"\backprime" \\
-$\hslash$ & \verb"\hslash" &
-$\varnothing$ & \verb"\varnothing" \\
-$\vartriangle$ & \verb"\vartriangle" &
-$\blacktriangle$ & \verb"\blacktriangle" \\
-$\triangledown$ & \verb"\triangledown" &
-$\blacktriangledown$ & \verb"\blacktriangledown" \\
-$\square$ & \verb"\square" &
-$\blacksquare$ & \verb"\blacksquare" \\
-$\lozenge$ & \verb"\lozenge" &
-$\blacklozenge$ & \verb"\blacklozenge" \\
-$\circledS$ & \verb"\circledS" &
-$\bigstar$ & \verb"\bigstar" \\
-$\angle$ & \verb"\angle" &
-$\sphericalangle$ & \verb"\sphericalangle" \\
-$\measuredangle$ & \verb"\measuredangle" &
-\\
-$\nexists$ & \verb"\nexists" &
-$\complement$ & \verb"\complement" \\
-$\mho$ & \verb"\mho" &
-$\eth$ & \verb"\eth" \\
-$\Finv$ & \verb"\Finv" &
-$\diagup$ & \verb"\diagup" \\
-$\Game$ & \verb"\Game" &
-$\diagdown$ & \verb"\diagdown" \\
-$\Bbbk$ & \verb"\Bbbk" &
-$\restriction$ & \verb"\restriction" \\
-\end{tabular}
-\end{center}
-\end{table}
-
-\begin{table}
-\tabcolsep1pt
-\caption{Arrows (math mode)}
-\begin{center}
-\begin{tabular}{clcl}
-$\leftarrow$ & \verb"\leftarrow" &
-$\longleftarrow$ & \verb"\longleftarrow" \\
-$\Leftarrow$ & \verb"\Leftarrow" &
-$\Longleftarrow$ & \verb"\Longleftarrow" \\
-$\rightarrow$ & \verb"\rightarrow" &
-$\longrightarrow$ & \verb"\longrightarrow" \\
-$\Rightarrow$ & \verb"\Rightarrow" &
-$\Longrightarrow$ & \verb"\Longrightarrow" \\
-$\leftrightarrow$ & \verb"\leftrightarrow" &
-$\longleftrightarrow$ & \verb"\longleftrightarrow" \\
-$\Leftrightarrow$ & \verb"\Leftrightarrow" &
-$\Longleftrightarrow$ & \verb"\Longleftrightarrow" \\
-$\mapsto$ & \verb"\mapsto" &
-$\longmapsto$ & \verb"\longmapsto" \\
-$\hookleftarrow$ & \verb"\hookleftarrow" &
-$\hookrightarrow$ & \verb"\hookrightarrow" \\
-$\leftharpoonup$ & \verb"\leftharpoonup" &
-$\rightharpoonup$ & \verb"\rightharpoonup" \\
-$\leftharpoondown$ & \verb"\leftharpoondown" &
-$\rightharpoondown$ & \verb"\rightharpoondown" \\
-$\rightleftharpoons$ & \verb"\rightleftharpoons" &
-$\leadsto$ & \verb"\leadsto" \\
-$\uparrow$ & \verb"\uparrow" &
-$\Updownarrow$ & \verb"\Updownarrow" \\
-$\Uparrow$ & \verb"\Uparrow" &
-$\nearrow$ & \verb"\nearrow" \\
-$\downarrow$ & \verb"\downarrow" &
-$\searrow$ & \verb"\searrow" \\
-$\Downarrow$ & \verb"\Downarrow" &
-$\swarrow$ & \verb"\swarrow" \\
-$\updownarrow$ & \verb"\updownarrow" &
-$\nwarrow$ & \verb"\nwarrow"
-\end{tabular}
-\end{center}
-\end{table}
-
-\begin{table}
-\tabcolsep1pt
-\caption{AMS arrows (math mode)}
-\begin{center}
-\begin{tabular}{llll}
-$\dashleftarrow$ & \verb"\dashleftarrow" &
-$\dashrightarrow$ & \verb"\dashrightarrow" \\
-$\leftleftarrows$ & \verb"\leftleftarrows" &
-$\rightrightarrows$ & \verb"\rightrightarrows" \\
-$\leftrightarrows$ & \verb"\leftrightarrows" &
-$\rightleftarrows$ & \verb"\rightleftarrows" \\
-$\Lleftarrow$ & \verb"\Lleftarrow" &
-$\Rrightarrow$ & \verb"\Rrightarrow" \\
-$\twoheadleftarrow$ & \verb"\twoheadleftarrow" &
-$\twoheadrightarrow$ & \verb"\twoheadrightarrow" \\
-$\leftarrowtail$ & \verb"\leftarrowtail" &
-$\rightarrowtail$ & \verb"\rightarrowtail" \\
-$\looparrowleft$ & \verb"\looparrowleft" &
-$\looparrowright$ & \verb"\looparrowright" \\
-$\leftrightharpoons$ & \verb"\leftrightharpoons" &
-$\rightleftharpoons$ & \verb"\rightleftharpoons" \\
-$\curvearrowleft$ & \verb"\curvearrowleft" &
-$\curvearrowright$ & \verb"\curvearrowright" \\
-$\circlearrowleft$ & \verb"\circlearrowleft" &
-$\circlearrowright$ & \verb"\circlearrowright" \\
-$\Lsh$ & \verb"\Lsh" &
-$\Rsh$ & \verb"\Rsh" \\
-$\upuparrows$ & \verb"\upuparrows" &
-$\downdownarrows$ & \verb"\downdownarrows" \\
-$\upharpoonleft$ & \verb"\upharpoonleft" &
-$\upharpoonright$ & \verb"\upharpoonright" \\
-$\downharpoonleft$ & \verb"\downharpoonleft" &
-$\downharpoonright$ & \verb"\downharpoonright" \\
-$\multimap$ & \verb"\multimap" &
-$\rightsquigarrow$ & \verb"\rightsquigarrow" \\
-$\leftrightsquigarrow$ & \verb"\leftrightsquigarrow" &
-\\
-$\nleftarrow$ & \verb"\nleftarrow" &
-$\nrightarrow$ & \verb"\nrightarrow" \\
-$\nLeftarrow$ & \verb"\nLeftarrow" &
-$\nRightarrow$ & \verb"\nRightarrow" \\
-$\nleftrightarrow$ & \verb"\nleftrightarrow" &
-$\nLeftrightarrow$ & \verb"\nLeftrightarrow" \\
-\end{tabular}
-\end{center}
-\end{table}
-
-\begin{table}
-\caption{Relations (math mode)}
-\begin{center}
-\begin{tabular}{cl@{\hspace{4em}}cl}
-
-$\leq$ & \verb"\leq" & $\geq$ & \verb"\geq" \\
-$\prec$ & \verb"\prec" & $\succ$ & \verb"\succ" \\
-$\preceq$ & \verb"\preceq" & $\succeq$ & \verb"\succeq" \\
-$\ll$ & \verb"\ll" & $\gg$ & \verb"\gg" \\
-$\subset$ & \verb"\subset" & $\supset$ & \verb"\supset" \\
-$\subseteq$ & \verb"\subseteq" & $\supseteq$ & \verb"\supseteq" \\
-$\sqsubset$ & \verb"\sqsubset" & $\sqsupset$ & \verb"\sqsupset" \\
-$\sqsubseteq$ & \verb"\sqsubseteq" & $\sqsupseteq$ & \verb"\sqsupseteq" \\
-$\in$ & \verb"\in" & $\ni$ & \verb"\ni" \\
-$\vdash$ & \verb"\vdash" & $\dashv$ & \verb"\dashv" \\
-$\smile$ & \verb"\smile" & $\mid$ & \verb"\mid" \\
-$\frown$ & \verb"\frown" & $\parallel$ & \verb"\parallel" \\
-$\neq$ & \verb"\neq" & $\perp$ & \verb"\perp" \\
-$\equiv$ & \verb"\equiv" & $\cong$ & \verb"\cong" \\
-$\sim$ & \verb"\sim" & $\bowtie$ & \verb"\bowtie" \\
-$\simeq$ & \verb"\simeq" & $\propto$ & \verb"\propto" \\
-$\asymp$ & \verb"\asymp" & $\models$ & \verb"\models" \\
-$\approx$ & \verb"\approx" & $\doteq$ & \verb"\doteq" \\
- & & $\Join$ & \verb"\Join"
-\end{tabular}
-\end{center}
-\end{table}
-
-\begin{table}
-\tabcolsep1pt
-\caption{AMS binary relations (math mode)}
-\begin{center}
-\begin{tabular}{ll@{\hspace{1em}}ll}
-$\leqq$ & \verb"\leqq" &
-$\geqq$ & \verb"\geqq" \\
-$\leqslant$ & \verb"\leqslant" &
-$\geqslant$ & \verb"\geqslant" \\
-$\eqslantless$ & \verb"\eqslantless" &
-$\eqslantgtr$ & \verb"\eqslantgtr" \\
-$\lesssim$ & \verb"\lesssim" &
-$\gtrsim$ & \verb"\gtrsim" \\
-$\lessapprox$ & \verb"\lessapprox" &
-$\gtrapprox$ & \verb"\gtrapprox" \\
-$\approxeq$ & \verb"\approxeq" &
-$\eqsim$ & \verb"\eqsim" \\
-$\lessdot$ & \verb"\lessdot" &
-$\gtrdot$ & \verb"\gtrdot" \\
-$\lll$ & \verb"\lll", \verb"\llless" &
-$\ggg$ & \verb"\ggg", \verb"\gggtr" \\
-$\lessgtr$ & \verb"\lessgtr" &
-$\gtrless$ & \verb"\gtrless" \\
-$\lesseqgtr$ & \verb"\lesseqgtr" &
-$\gtreqless$ & \verb"\gtreqless" \\
-$\lesseqqgtr$ & \verb"\lesseqqgtr" &
-$\gtreqqless$ & \verb"\gtreqqless" \\
-$\doteqdot$ & \verb"\doteqdot", \verb"\Doteq" &
-$\eqcirc$ & \verb"\eqcirc" \\
-$\risingdotseq$ & \verb"\risingdotseq" &
-$\circeq$ & \verb"\circeq" \\
-$\fallingdotseq$ & \verb"\fallingdotseq" &
-$\triangleq$ & \verb"\triangleq" \\
-$\backsim$ & \verb"\backsim" &
-$\thicksim$ & \verb"\thicksim" \\
-$\backsimeq$ & \verb"\backsimeq" &
-$\thickapprox$ & \verb"\thickapprox" \\
-$\subseteqq$ & \verb"\subseteqq" &
-$\supseteqq$ & \verb"\supseteqq" \\
-$\Subset$ & \verb"\Subset" &
-$\Supset$ & \verb"\Supset" \\
-$\sqsubset$ & \verb"\sqsubset" &
-$\sqsupset$ & \verb"\sqsupset" \\
-$\preccurlyeq$ & \verb"\preccurlyeq" &
-$\succcurlyeq$ & \verb"\succcurlyeq" \\
-$\curlyeqprec$ & \verb"\curlyeqprec" &
-$\curlyeqsucc$ & \verb"\curlyeqsucc" \\
-$\precsim$ & \verb"\precsim" &
-$\succsim$ & \verb"\succsim" \\
-$\precapprox$ & \verb"\precapprox" &
-$\succapprox$ & \verb"\succapprox" \\
-$\vartriangleleft$ & \verb"\vartriangleleft" &
-$\vartriangleright$ & \verb"\vartriangleright" \\
-$\trianglelefteq$ & \verb"\trianglelefteq" &
-$\trianglerighteq$ & \verb"\trianglerighteq" \\
-$\vDash$ & \verb"\vDash" &
-$\Vdash$ & \verb"\Vdash" \\
-$\Vvdash$ & \verb"\Vvdash" &
-\\
-$\smallsmile$ & \verb"\smallsmile" &
-$\shortmid$ & \verb"\shortmid" \\
-$\smallfrown$ & \verb"\smallfrown" &
-$\shortparallel$ & \verb"\shortparallel" \\
-$\bumpeq$ & \verb"\bumpeq" &
-$\between$ & \verb"\between" \\
-$\Bumpeq$ & \verb"\Bumpeq" &
-$\pitchfork$ & \verb"\pitchfork" \\
-$\varpropto$ & \verb"\varpropto" &
-$\backepsilon$ & \verb"\backepsilon" \\
-$\blacktriangleleft$ & \verb"\blacktriangleleft" &
-$\blacktriangleright$ & \verb"\blacktriangleright" \\
-$\therefore$ & \verb"\therefore" &
-$\because$ & \verb"\because" \\
-\end{tabular}
-\end{center}
-\end{table}
-
-\begin{table}
-\caption{AMS negated relations (math mode)}
-\begin{center}
-\begin{tabular}{ll@{\hspace{2em}}ll}
-$\nless$ & \verb"\nless" &
-$\ngtr$ & \verb"\ngtr" \\
-$\nleq$ & \verb"\nleq" &
-$\ngeq$ & \verb"\ngeq" \\
-$\nleqslant$ & \verb"\nleqslant" &
-$\ngeqslant$ & \verb"\ngeqslant" \\
-$\nleqq$ & \verb"\nleqq" &
-$\ngeqq$ & \verb"\ngeqq" \\
-$\lneq$ & \verb"\lneq" &
-$\gneq$ & \verb"\gneq" \\
-$\lneqq$ & \verb"\lneqq" &
-$\gneqq$ & \verb"\gneqq" \\
-$\lvertneqq$ & \verb"\lvertneqq" &
-$\gvertneqq$ & \verb"\gvertneqq" \\
-$\lnsim$ & \verb"\lnsim" &
-$\gnsim$ & \verb"\gnsim" \\
-$\lnapprox$ & \verb"\lnapprox" &
-$\gnapprox$ & \verb"\gnapprox" \\
-$\nprec$ & \verb"\nprec" &
-$\nsucc$ & \verb"\nsucc" \\
-$\npreceq$ & \verb"\npreceq" &
-$\nsucceq$ & \verb"\nsucceq" \\
-$\precneqq$ & \verb"\precneqq" &
-$\succneqq$ & \verb"\succneqq" \\
-$\precnsim$ & \verb"\precnsim" &
-$\succnsim$ & \verb"\succnsim" \\
-$\precnapprox$ & \verb"\precnapprox" &
-$\succnapprox$ & \verb"\succnapprox" \\
-$\nsim$ & \verb"\nsim" &
-$\ncong$ & \verb"\ncong" \\
-$\nshortmid$ & \verb"\nshortmid" &
-$\nshortparallel$ & \verb"\nshortparallel" \\
-$\nmid$ & \verb"\nmid" &
-$\nparallel$ & \verb"\nparallel" \\
-$\nvdash$ & \verb"\nvdash" &
-$\nvDash$ & \verb"\nvDash" \\
-$\nVdash$ & \verb"\nVdash" &
-$\nVDash$ & \verb"\nVDash" \\
-$\ntriangleleft$ & \verb"\ntriangleleft" &
-$\ntriangleright$ & \verb"\ntriangleright" \\
-$\ntrianglelefteq$ & \verb"\ntrianglelefteq" &
-$\ntrianglerighteq$ & \verb"\ntrianglerighteq" \\
-$\nsubseteq$ & \verb"\nsubseteq" &
-$\nsupseteq$ & \verb"\nsupseteq" \\
-$\nsubseteqq$ & \verb"\nsubseteqq" &
-$\nsupseteqq$ & \verb"\nsupseteqq" \\
-$\subsetneq$ & \verb"\subsetneq" &
-$\supsetneq$ & \verb"\supsetneq" \\
-$\varsubsetneq$ & \verb"\varsubsetneq" &
-$\varsupsetneq$ & \verb"\varsupsetneq" \\
-$\subsetneqq$ & \verb"\subsetneqq" &
-$\supsetneqq$ & \verb"\supsetneqq" \\
-$\varsubsetneqq$ & \verb"\varsubsetneqq" &
-$\varsupsetneqq$ & \verb"\varsupsetneqq" \\
-\end{tabular}
-\end{center}
-\end{table}
-
-\begin{table}
-\caption{Variable-sized symbols (math mode)}
-\begin{center}
-\begin{displaymath}
-\begin{array}{ccl@{\hspace{2em}}ccl}
-\sum & \displaystyle \sum & \hbox{\verb"\sum"} &
-\bigcap & \displaystyle \bigcap & \hbox{\verb"\bigcap"} \\
-\prod & \displaystyle \prod & \hbox{\verb"\prod"} &
-\bigcup & \displaystyle \bigcup & \hbox{\verb"\bigcup"} \\
-\coprod & \displaystyle \coprod & \hbox{\verb"\coprod"} &
-\bigsqcup & \displaystyle \bigsqcup & \hbox{\verb"\bigsqcup"} \\
-\int & \displaystyle \int & \hbox{\verb"\int"} &
-\bigvee & \displaystyle \bigvee & \hbox{\verb"\bigvee"} \\
-\oint & \displaystyle \oint & \hbox{\verb"\oint"} &
-\bigwedge & \displaystyle \bigwedge & \hbox{\verb"\bigwedge"} \\
-\bigodot & \displaystyle \bigodot & \hbox{\verb"\bigodot"} &
-\bigotimes & \displaystyle \bigotimes & \hbox{\verb"\bigotimes"} \\
-\bigoplus & \displaystyle \bigoplus & \hbox{\verb"\bigoplus"} &
-\biguplus & \displaystyle \biguplus & \hbox{\verb"\biguplus"} \\
-\end{array}
-\end{displaymath}
-\end{center}
-\end{table}
-
-\begin{table}
-\caption{Delimiters (math mode)}
-\begin{center}
-\begin{tabular}{lc@{\hspace{2em}}lc}
-$($ & \verb"(" & $)$ & \verb")" \\
-$[$ & \verb"[" & $]$ & \verb"]" \\
-$\{$ & \verb"\{" & $\}$ & \verb"\}" \\
-$\lfloor$ & \verb"\lfloor" & $\rfloor$ & \verb"\rfloor" \\
-$\lceil$ & \verb"\lceil" & $\rceil$ & \verb"\rceil" \\
-$\langle$ & \verb"\langle" & $\rangle$ & \verb"\rangle" \\
-$/$ & \verb"/" & $\backslash$ & \verb"\backslash" \\
-$\vert$ & \verb"\vert" & $\Vert$ & \verb"\Vert" \\
-$\uparrow$ & \verb"\uparrow" & $\Uparrow$ & \verb"\Uparrow" \\
-$\downarrow$ & \verb"\downarrow" & $\Downarrow$ & \verb"\Downarrow" \\
-$\updownarrow$ & \verb"\updownarrow" &
-$\Updownarrow$ & \verb"\Updownarrow" \\
-$\ulcorner$ & \verb"\ulcorner" &
-$\urcorner$ & \verb"\urcorner" \\
-$\llcorner$ & \verb"\llcorner" &
-$\lrcorner$ & \verb"\lrcorner" \\
-\end{tabular}
-\end{center}
-\end{table}
-
-\begin{table}
-\caption{Function names (math mode)}
-\begin{verbatim}
- \arccos \csc \ker \min
- \arcsin \deg \lg \Pr
- \arctan \det \lim \sec
- \arg \dim \liminf \sin
- \cos \exp \limsup \sinh
- \cosh \gcd \ln \sup
- \cot \hom \log \tan
- \coth \inf \max \tanh
-\end{verbatim}
-\end{table}
-\end{document}
-%</symbols>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% Sample document modules
-%
-% Here begins the module `sample`.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*sample>
-%%
-%% Beginning of file 'sample.tex'
-%%
-%% Modified 2005 June 21
-%%
-%% This is a sample manuscript marked up using the
-%% AASTeX v5.x LaTeX 2e macros.
-
-%% The first piece of markup in an AASTeX v5.x document
-%% is the \documentclass command. LaTeX will ignore
-%% any data that comes before this command.
-
-%% The command below calls the preprint style
-%% which will produce a one-column, single-spaced document.
-%% Examples of commands for other substyles follow. Use
-%% whichever is most appropriate for your purposes.
-%%
-%%\documentclass[12pt,preprint]{aastex}
-
-%% manuscript produces a one-column, double-spaced document:
-
-\documentclass[manuscript]{aastex}
-
-%% preprint2 produces a double-column, single-spaced document:
-
-%% \documentclass[preprint2]{aastex}
-
-%% Sometimes a paper's abstract is too long to fit on the
-%% title page in preprint2 mode. When that is the case,
-%% use the longabstract style option.
-
-%% \documentclass[preprint2,longabstract]{aastex}
-
-%% If you want to create your own macros, you can do so
-%% using \newcommand. Your macros should appear before
-%% the \begin{document} command.
-%%
-%% If you are submitting to a journal that translates manuscripts
-%% into SGML, you need to follow certain guidelines when preparing
-%% your macros. See the AASTeX v5.x Author Guide
-%% for information.
-
-\newcommand{\vdag}{(v)^\dagger}
-\newcommand{\myemail}{skywalker@galaxy.far.far.away}
-
-%% You can insert a short comment on the title page using the command below.
-
-\slugcomment{Not to appear in Nonlearned J., 45.}
-
-%% If you wish, you may supply running head information, although
-%% this information may be modified by the editorial offices.
-%% The left head contains a list of authors,
-%% usually a maximum of three (otherwise use et al.). The right
-%% head is a modified title of up to roughly 44 characters.
-%% Running heads will not print in the manuscript style.
-
-\shorttitle{Collapsed Cores in Globular Clusters}
-\shortauthors{Djorgovski et al.}
-
-%% This is the end of the preamble. Indicate the beginning of the
-%% paper itself with \begin{document}.
-
-\begin{document}
-
-%% LaTeX will automatically break titles if they run longer than
-%% one line. However, you may use \\ to force a line break if
-%% you desire.
-
-\title{Collapsed Cores in Globular Clusters, \\
- Gauge-Boson Couplings, and AAS\TeX\ Examples}
-
-%% Use \author, \affil, and the \and command to format
-%% author and affiliation information.
-%% Note that \email has replaced the old \authoremail command
-%% from AASTeX v4.0. You can use \email to mark an email address
-%% anywhere in the paper, not just in the front matter.
-%% As in the title, use \\ to force line breaks.
-
-\author{S. Djorgovski\altaffilmark{1,2,3} and Ivan R. King\altaffilmark{1}}
-\affil{Astronomy Department, University of California,
- Berkeley, CA 94720}
-
-\author{C. D. Biemesderfer\altaffilmark{4,5}}
-\affil{National Optical Astronomy Observatories, Tucson, AZ 85719}
-\email{aastex-help@aas.org}
-
-\and
-
-\author{R. J. Hanisch\altaffilmark{5}}
-\affil{Space Telescope Science Institute, Baltimore, MD 21218}
-
-%% Notice that each of these authors has alternate affiliations, which
-%% are identified by the \altaffilmark after each name. Specify alternate
-%% affiliation information with \altaffiltext, with one command per each
-%% affiliation.
-
-\altaffiltext{1}{Visiting Astronomer, Cerro Tololo Inter-American Observatory.
-CTIO is operated by AURA, Inc.\ under contract to the National Science
-Foundation.}
-\altaffiltext{2}{Society of Fellows, Harvard University.}
-\altaffiltext{3}{present address: Center for Astrophysics,
- 60 Garden Street, Cambridge, MA 02138}
-\altaffiltext{4}{Visiting Programmer, Space Telescope Science Institute}
-\altaffiltext{5}{Patron, Alonso's Bar and Grill}
-
-%% Mark off your abstract in the ``abstract'' environment. In the manuscript
-%% style, abstract will output a Received/Accepted line after the
-%% title and affiliation information. No date will appear since the author
-%% does not have this information. The dates will be filled in by the
-%% editorial office after submission.
-
-\begin{abstract}
-This is a preliminary report on surface photometry of the major
-fraction of known globular clusters, to see which of them show the signs
-of a collapsed core.
-We also explore some diversionary mathematics and recreational tables.
-\end{abstract}
-
-%% Keywords should appear after the \end{abstract} command. The uncommented
-%% example has been keyed in ApJ style. See the instructions to authors
-%% for the journal to which you are submitting your paper to determine
-%% what keyword punctuation is appropriate.
-
-\keywords{globular clusters: general --- globular clusters: individual(NGC 6397,
-NGC 6624, NGC 7078, Terzan 8}
-
-%% From the front matter, we move on to the body of the paper.
-%% In the first two sections, notice the use of the natbib \citep
-%% and \citet commands to identify citations. The citations are
-%% tied to the reference list via symbolic KEYs. The KEY corresponds
-%% to the KEY in the \bibitem in the reference list below. We have
-%% chosen the first three characters of the first author's name plus
-%% the last two numeral of the year of publication as our KEY for
-%% each reference.
-
-
-%% Authors who wish to have the most important objects in their paper
-%% linked in the electronic edition to a data center may do so by tagging
-%% their objects with \objectname{} or \object{}. Each macro takes the
-%% object name as its required argument. The optional, square-bracket
-%% argument should be used in cases where the data center identification
-%% differs from what is to be printed in the paper. The text appearing
-%% in curly braces is what will appear in print in the published paper.
-%% If the object name is recognized by the data centers, it will be linked
-%% in the electronic edition to the object data available at the data centers
-
-\section{Introduction}
-
-A focal problem today in the dynamics of globular clusters is core collapse.
-It has been predicted by theory for decades \citep{hen61,lyn68,spi85}, but
-observation has been less alert to the phenomenon. For many years the
-central brightness peak in M15 \citep{kin75,new78} seemed a unique anomaly.
-Then \citet{aur82} suggested a central peak in \object{NGC 6397}, and a
-limited photographic survey of ours \citep[Paper I]{djo84} found three more
-cases, \objectname{NGC 6624}, \objectname[M 15]{NGC 7078}, and
-\object[Cl 1938-341]{Terzan 8}), whose sharp center had often been
-remarked on \citep{can78}.
-
-\section{Observations}
-
-%% In a manner similar to \objectname authors can provide links to dataset
-%% hosted at participating data centers via the \dataset{} command. The
-%% second curly bracket argument is printed in the text while the first
-%% parentheses argument serves as the valid data set identifier. Large
-%% lists of data set are best provided in a table (see Table 3 for an example).
-%% Valid data set identifiers should be obtained from the data center that
-%% is currently hosting the data.
-
-All our observations were short direct exposures with CCD's. We also have
- a random {\it Chandra} data set \dataset{ADS/Sa.ASCA\#X/86008020} and a
-neat \dataset[ADS/Sa.HST#Y0Q70101T]{HST FOS spectrum} that readers can access
-via the links in the electronic edition. Unfortunately this has nothing
-whatsoever to do with this research. At Lick Observatory we used a TI 500$\times$500
-chip and a GEC 575$\times$385, on the 1-m Nickel reflector. The only
-filter available at Lick was red. At CTIO we used a GEC 575$\times$385, with
-$B, V,$ and $R$ filters, and an RCA 512$\times$320, with $U, B, V, R,$ and $I$
-filters, on the 1.5-m reflector. In the CTIO observations we tried to
-concentrate on the shortest practicable wavelengths; but faintness, reddening,
-and poor short-wavelength sensitivity often kept us from observing in $U$ or
-even in $B$. All four cameras had scales of the order of 0.4 arcsec/pixel, and
-our field sizes were around 3 arcmin.
-
-The CCD images are unfortunately not always suitable, for very poor
-clusters or for clusters with large cores. Since the latter are easily
-studied by other means, we augmented our own CCD profiles by collecting
-from the literature a number of star-count profiles
-\citep{kin68,pet76,har84,ort85}, as well as photoelectric profiles
-\citep{kin66,kin75} and electronographic profiles \citep{kro84}.
-In a few cases we judged normality by eye estimates on one of the Sky
-Surveys.
-
-%% In this section, we use the \subsection command to set off
-%% a subsection. \footnote is used to insert a footnote to the text.
-
-%% Observe the use of the LaTeX \label
-%% command after the \subsection to give a symbolic KEY to the
-%% subsection for cross-referencing in a \ref command.
-%% You can use LaTeX's \ref and \label commands to keep track of
-%% cross-references to sections, equations, tables, and figures.
-%% That way, if you change the order of any elements, LaTeX will
-%% automatically renumber them.
-
-%% This section also includes several of the displayed math environments
-%% mentioned in the Author Guide.
-
-\section{Helicity Amplitudes}
-
-It has been realized that helicity amplitudes provide a convenient means
-for Feynman diagram\footnote{Footnotes can be inserted like this.}
-evaluations. These amplitude-level techniques
-are particularly convenient for calculations involving many Feynman
-diagrams, where the usual trace techniques for the amplitude
-squared becomes unwieldy. Our calculations use the helicity techniques
-developed by other authors \cite[]{hag86}; we briefly summarize below.
-
-\subsection{Formalism} \label{bozomath}
-
-%% The equation environment wil produce a numbered display equation.
-
-A tree-level amplitude in $e^+e^-$ collisions can be expressed in
-terms of fermion strings of the form
-\begin{equation}
-\bar v(p_2,\sigma_2)P_{-\tau}\hat a_1\hat a_2\cdots
-\hat a_nu(p_1,\sigma_1) ,
-\end{equation}
-where $p$ and $\sigma$ label the initial $e^{\pm}$ four-momenta
-and helicities $(\sigma = \pm 1)$, $\hat a_i=a^\mu_i\gamma_\nu$
-and $P_\tau=\frac{1}{2}(1+\tau\gamma_5)$ is a chirality projection
-operator $(\tau = \pm1)$. The $a^\mu_i$ may be formed from particle
-four-momenta, gauge-boson polarization vectors or fermion strings with
-an uncontracted Lorentz index associated with final-state fermions.
-
-%% The \notetoeditor{TEXT} command allows the author to communicate
-%% information to the copy editor. This information will appear as a
-%% footnote on the printed copy for the manuscript style file. Nothing will
-%% appear on the printed copy if the preprint or
-%% preprint2 style files are used.
-
-%% The eqnarray environment produces multi-line display math. The end of
-%% each line is marked with a \\. Lines will be numbered unless the \\
-%% is preceded by a \nonumber command.
-%% Alignment points are marked by ampersands (&). There should be two
-%% ampersands (&) per line.
-
-In the chiral \notetoeditor{Figures 1 and 2 should appear side-by-side in
-print} representation the $\gamma$ matrices are expressed
-in terms of $2\times 2$ Pauli matrices $\sigma$ and the unit matrix 1 as
-\begin{eqnarray}
-\gamma^\mu & = &
- \left(
-\begin{array}{cc}
-0 & \sigma^\mu_+ \\
-\sigma^\mu_- & 0
-\end{array} \right) ,
- \gamma^5= \left(
-\begin{array}{cc}
--1 & 0\\
-0 & 1
-\end{array} \right) , \nonumber \\
-\sigma^\mu_{\pm} & = & ({\bf 1} ,\pm \sigma) , \nonumber
-\end{eqnarray}
-giving
-\begin{equation}
-\hat a= \left(
-\begin{array}{cc}
-0 & (\hat a)_+\\
-(\hat a)_- & 0
-\end{array}\right), (\hat a)_\pm=a_\mu\sigma^\mu_\pm ,
-\end{equation}
-The spinors are expressed in terms of two-component Weyl spinors as
-\begin{equation}
-u=\left(
-\begin{array}{c}
-(u)_-\\
-(u)_+
-\end{array}\right), v={\bf (}\vdag_+{\bf ,} \vdag_-{\bf )} .
-\end{equation}
-
-%% Putting eqnarrays or equations inside the mathletters environment groups
-%% the enclosed equations by letter. For instance, the eqnarray below, instead
-%% of being numbered, say, (4) and (5), would be numbered (4a) and (4b).
-%% LaTeX the paper and look at the output to see the results.
-
-The Weyl spinors are given in terms of helicity eigenstates
-$\chi_\lambda(p)$ with $\lambda=\pm1$ by
-\begin{mathletters}
-\begin{eqnarray}
-u(p,\lambda)_\pm & = & (E\pm\lambda|{\bf p}|)^{1/2}\chi_\lambda(p) , \\
-v(p,\lambda)_\pm & = & \pm\lambda(E\mp\lambda|{\bf p}|)^{1/2}\chi
-_{-\lambda}(p)
-\end{eqnarray}
-\end{mathletters}
-
-%% This section contains more display math examples, including unnumbered
-%% equations (displaymath environment). The last paragraph includes some
-%% examples of in-line math featuring a couple of the AASTeX symbol macros.
-
-\section{Floating material and so forth}
-
-%% The displaymath environment will produce the same sort of equation as
-%% the equation environment, except that the equation will not be numbered
-%% by LaTeX.
-
-Consider a task that computes profile parameters for a modified
-Lorentzian of the form
-\begin{equation}
-I = \frac{1}{1 + d_{1}^{P (1 + d_{2} )}}
-\end{equation}
-where
-\begin{displaymath}
-d_{1} = \sqrt{ \left( \begin{array}{c} \frac{x_{1}}{R_{maj}}
-\end{array} \right) ^{2} +
-\left( \begin{array}{c} \frac{y_{1}}{R_{min}} \end{array} \right) ^{2} }
-\end{displaymath}
-\begin{displaymath}
-d_{2} = \sqrt{ \left( \begin{array}{c} \frac{x_{1}}{P R_{maj}}
-\end{array} \right) ^{2} +
-\left( \begin{array}{c} \case{y_{1}}{P R_{min}} \end{array} \right) ^{2} }
-\end{displaymath}
-\begin{displaymath}
-x_{1} = (x - x_{0}) \cos \Theta + (y - y_{0}) \sin \Theta
-\end{displaymath}
-\begin{displaymath}
-y_{1} = -(x - x_{0}) \sin \Theta + (y - y_{0}) \cos \Theta
-\end{displaymath}
-
-In these expressions $x_{0}$,$y_{0}$ is the star center, and $\Theta$ is the
-angle with the $x$ axis. Results of this task are shown in table~\ref{tbl-1}.
-It is not clear how these sorts of analyses may affect determination of
- $M_{\sun}$, but the assumption is that the alternate results
-should be less than 90\degr\ out of phase with previous values.
-We have no observations of \ion{Ca}{2}.
-Roughly \slantfrac{4}{5} of the electronically submitted abstracts
-for AAS meetings are error-free.
-
-%% If you wish to include an acknowledgments section in your paper,
-%% separate it off from the body of the text using the \acknowledgments
-%% command.
-
-%% Included in this acknowledgments section are examples of the
-%% AASTeX hypertext markup commands. Use \url without the optional [HREF]
-%% argument when you want to print the url directly in the text. Otherwise,
-%% use either \url or \anchor, with the HREF as the first argument and the
-%% text to be printed in the second.
-
-\acknowledgments
-
-We are grateful to V. Barger, T. Han, and R. J. N. Phillips for
-doing the math in section~\ref{bozomath}.
-More information on the AASTeX macros package is available \\ at
-\url{http://www.aas.org/publications/aastex}.
-For technical support, please write to
-\email{aastex-help@aas.org}.
-
-%% To help institutions obtain information on the effectiveness of their
-%% telescopes, the AAS Journals has created a group of keywords for telescope
-%% facilities. A common set of keywords will make these types of searches
-%% significantly easier and more accurate. In addition, they will also be
-%% useful in linking papers together which utilize the same telescopes
-%% within the framework of the National Virtual Observatory.
-%% See the AASTeX Web site at http://www.journals.uchicago.edu/AAS/AASTeX
-%% for information on obtaining the facility keywords.
-
-%% After the acknowledgments section, use the following syntax and the
-%% \facility{} macro to list the keywords of facilities used in the research
-%% for the paper. Each keyword will be checked against the master list during
-%% copy editing. Individual instruments or configurations can be provided
-%% in parentheses, after the keyword, but they will not be verified.
-
-{\it Facilities:} \facility{Nickel}, \facility{HST (STIS)}, \facility{CXO (ASIS)}.
-
-%% Appendix material should be preceded with a single \appendix command.
-%% There should be a \section command for each appendix. Mark appendix
-%% subsections with the same markup you use in the main body of the paper.
-
-%% Each Appendix (indicated with \section) will be lettered A, B, C, etc.
-%% The equation counter will reset when it encounters the \appendix
-%% command and will number appendix equations (A1), (A2), etc.
-
-\appendix
-
-\section{Appendix material}
-
-Consider once again a task that computes profile parameters for a modified
-Lorentzian of the form
-\begin{equation}
-I = \frac{1}{1 + d_{1}^{P (1 + d_{2} )}}
-\end{equation}
-where
-\begin{mathletters}
-\begin{displaymath}
-d_{1} = \frac{3}{4} \sqrt{ \left( \begin{array}{c} \frac{x_{1}}{R_{maj}}
-\end{array} \right) ^{2} +
-\left( \begin{array}{c} \frac{y_{1}}{R_{min}} \end{array} \right) ^{2} }
-\end{displaymath}
-\begin{equation}
-d_{2} = \case{3}{4} \sqrt{ \left( \begin{array}{c} \frac{x_{1}}{P R_{maj}}
-\end{array} \right) ^{2} +
-\left( \begin{array}{c} \case{y_{1}}{P R_{min}} \end{array} \right) ^{2} }
-\end{equation}
-\begin{eqnarray}
-x_{1} & = & (x - x_{0}) \cos \Theta + (y - y_{0}) \sin \Theta \\
-y_{1} & = & -(x - x_{0}) \sin \Theta + (y - y_{0}) \cos \Theta
-\end{eqnarray}
-\end{mathletters}
-
-For completeness, here is one last equation.
-\begin{equation}
-e = mc^2
-\end{equation}
-
-%% The reference list follows the main body and any appendices.
-%% Use LaTeX's thebibliography environment to mark up your reference list.
-%% Note \begin{thebibliography} is followed by an empty set of
-%% curly braces. If you forget this, LaTeX will generate the error
-%% "Perhaps a missing \item?".
-%%
-%% thebibliography produces citations in the text using \bibitem-\cite
-%% cross-referencing. Each reference is preceded by a
-%% \bibitem command that defines in curly braces the KEY that corresponds
-%% to the KEY in the \cite commands (see the first section above).
-%% Make sure that you provide a unique KEY for every \bibitem or else the
-%% paper will not LaTeX. The square brackets should contain
-%% the citation text that LaTeX will insert in
-%% place of the \cite commands.
-
-%% We have used macros to produce journal name abbreviations.
-%% AASTeX provides a number of these for the more frequently-cited journals.
-%% See the Author Guide for a list of them.
-
-%% Note that the style of the \bibitem labels (in []) is slightly
-%% different from previous examples. The natbib system solves a host
-%% of citation expression problems, but it is necessary to clearly
-%% delimit the year from the author name used in the citation.
-%% See the natbib documentation for more details and options.
-
-\begin{thebibliography}{}
-\bibitem[Auri\`ere(1982)]{aur82} Auri\`ere, M. 1982, \aap,
- 109, 301
-\bibitem[Canizares et al.(1978)]{can78} Canizares, C. R.,
- Grindlay, J. E., Hiltner, W. A., Liller, W., \&
- McClintock, J. E. 1978, \apj, 224, 39
-\bibitem[Djorgovski \& King(1984)]{djo84} Djorgovski, S.,
- \& King, I. R. 1984, \apjl, 277, L49
-\bibitem[Hagiwara \& Zeppenfeld(1986)]{hag86} Hagiwara, K., \&
- Zeppenfeld, D. 1986, Nucl.Phys., 274, 1
-\bibitem[Harris \& van den Bergh(1984)]{har84} Harris, W. E.,
- \& van den Bergh, S. 1984, \aj, 89, 1816
-\bibitem[H\`enon(1961)]{hen61} H\'enon, M. 1961, Ann.d'Ap., 24, 369
-\bibitem[Heiles \& Troland(2003)]{heiles03} Heiles, C. \& Troland, T. H., 2003, \apjs, preprint doi:10.1086/381753
-\bibitem[Kim, Ostricker, \& Stone(2003)]{kim03} Kim, W.-T., Ostriker, E., \& Stone, J. M., 2003, \apj, 599, 1157
-\bibitem[King(1966)]{kin66} King, I. R. 1966, \aj, 71, 276
-\bibitem[King(1975)]{kin75} King, I. R. 1975, Dynamics of
- Stellar Systems, A. Hayli, Dordrecht: Reidel, 1975, 99
-\bibitem[King et al.(1968)]{kin68} King, I. R., Hedemann, E.,
- Hodge, S. M., \& White, R. E. 1968, \aj, 73, 456
-\bibitem[Kron et al.(1984)]{kro84} Kron, G. E., Hewitt, A. V.,
- \& Wasserman, L. H. 1984, \pasp, 96, 198
-\bibitem[Lynden-Bell \& Wood(1968)]{lyn68} Lynden-Bell, D.,
- \& Wood, R. 1968, \mnras, 138, 495
-\bibitem[Newell \& O'Neil(1978)]{new78} Newell, E. B.,
- \& O'Neil, E. J. 1978, \apjs, 37, 27
-\bibitem[Ortolani et al.(1985)]{ort85} Ortolani, S., Rosino, L.,
- \& Sandage, A. 1985, \aj, 90, 473
-\bibitem[Peterson(1976)]{pet76} Peterson, C. J. 1976, \aj, 81, 617
-\bibitem[Rudnick et al.(2003)]{rudnick03} Rudnick, G. et al., 2003, \apj, 599, 847
-\bibitem[Spitzer(1985)]{spi85} Spitzer, L. 1985, Dynamics of
- Star Clusters, J. Goodman \& P. Hut, Dordrecht: Reidel, 109
-\bibitem[Treu et al.(2003)]{treu03} Treu, T. et al., 2003, \apj, 591, 53
-\end{thebibliography}
-
-\clearpage
-
-%% Use the figure environment and \plotone or \plottwo to include
-%% figures and captions in your electronic submission.
-%% To embed the sample graphics in
-%% the file, uncomment the \plotone, \plottwo, and
-%% \includegraphics commands
-%%
-%% If you need a layout that cannot be achieved with \plotone or
-%% \plottwo, you can invoke the graphicx package directly with the
-%% \includegraphics command or use \plotfiddle. For more information,
-%% please see the tutorial on "Using Electronic Art with AASTeX" in the
-%% documentation section at the AASTeX Web site,
-%% http://www.journals.uchicago.edu/AAS/AASTeX.
-%%
-%% The examples below also include sample markup for submission of
-%% supplemental electronic materials. As always, be sure to check
-%% the instructions to authors for the journal you are submitting to
-%% for specific submissions guidelines as they vary from
-%% journal to journal.
-
-%% This example uses \plotone to include an EPS file scaled to
-%% 80% of its natural size with \epsscale. Its caption
-%% has been written to indicate that additional figure parts will be
-%% available in the electronic journal.
-
-\begin{figure}
-\epsscale{.80}
-\plotone{f1.eps}
-\caption{Derived spectra for 3C138 \citep[see][]{heiles03}. Plots for all sources are available
-in the electronic edition of {\it The Astrophysical Journal}.\label{fig1}}
-\end{figure}
-
-\clearpage
-
-%% Here we use \plottwo to present two versions of the same figure,
-%% one in black and white for print the other in RGB color
-%% for online presentation. Note that the caption indicates
-%% that a color version of the figure will be available online.
-%%
-
-\begin{figure}
-\plottwo{f2.eps}{f2_color.eps}
-\caption{A panel taken from Figure 2 of \citet{rudnick03}.
-See the electronic edition of the Journal for a color version
-of this figure.\label{fig2}}
-\end{figure}
-
-%% This figure uses \includegraphics to scale and rotate the still frame
-%% for an mpeg animation.
-
-\begin{figure}
-\includegraphics[angle=90,scale=.50]{f3.eps}
-\caption{Animation still frame taken from \citet{kim03}.
-This figure is also available as an mpeg
-animation in the electronic edition of the
-{\it Astrophysical Journal}.}
-\end{figure}
-
-%% If you are not including electonic art with your submission, you may
-%% mark up your captions using the \figcaption command. See the
-%% User Guide for details.
-%%
-%% No more than seven \figcaption commands are allowed per page,
-%% so if you have more than seven captions, insert a \clearpage
-%% after every seventh one.
-
-%% Tables should be submitted one per page, so put a \clearpage before
-%% each one.
-
-%% Two options are available to the author for producing tables: the
-%% deluxetable environment provided by the AASTeX package or the LaTeX
-%% table environment. Use of deluxetable is preferred.
-%%
-
-%% Three table samples follow, two marked up in the deluxetable environment,
-%% one marked up as a LaTeX table.
-
-%% In this first example, note that the \tabletypesize{}
-%% command has been used to reduce the font size of the table.
-%% We also use the \rotate command to rotate the table to
-%% landscape orientation since it is very wide even at the
-%% reduced font size.
-%%
-%% Note also that the \label command needs to be placed
-%% inside the \tablecaption.
-
-%% This table also includes a table comment indicating that the full
-%% version will be available in machine-readable format in the electronic
-%% edition.
-
-\clearpage
-
-\begin{deluxetable}{ccrrrrrrrrcrl}
-\tabletypesize{\scriptsize}
-\rotate
-\tablecaption{Sample table taken from \citet{treu03}\label{tbl-1}}
-\tablewidth{0pt}
-\tablehead{
-\colhead{POS} & \colhead{chip} & \colhead{ID} & \colhead{X} & \colhead{Y} &
-\colhead{RA} & \colhead{DEC} & \colhead{IAU$\pm$ $\delta$ IAU} &
-\colhead{IAP1$\pm$ $\delta$ IAP1} & \colhead{IAP2 $\pm$ $\delta$ IAP2} &
-\colhead{star} & \colhead{E} & \colhead{Comment}
-}
-\startdata
-0 & 2 & 1 & 1370.99 & 57.35 & 6.651120 & 17.131149 & 21.344$\pm$0.006 & 2
-4.385$\pm$0.016 & 23.528$\pm$0.013 & 0.0 & 9 & - \\
-0 & 2 & 2 & 1476.62 & 8.03 & 6.651480 & 17.129572 & 21.641$\pm$0.005 & 2
-3.141$\pm$0.007 & 22.007$\pm$0.004 & 0.0 & 9 & - \\
-0 & 2 & 3 & 1079.62 & 28.92 & 6.652430 & 17.135000 & 23.953$\pm$0.030 & 2
-4.890$\pm$0.023 & 24.240$\pm$0.023 & 0.0 & - & - \\
-0 & 2 & 4 & 114.58 & 21.22 & 6.655560 & 17.148020 & 23.801$\pm$0.025 & 2
-5.039$\pm$0.026 & 24.112$\pm$0.021 & 0.0 & - & - \\
-0 & 2 & 5 & 46.78 & 19.46 & 6.655800 & 17.148932 & 23.012$\pm$0.012 & 2
-3.924$\pm$0.012 & 23.282$\pm$0.011 & 0.0 & - & - \\
-0 & 2 & 6 & 1441.84 & 16.16 & 6.651480 & 17.130072 & 24.393$\pm$0.045 & 2
-6.099$\pm$0.062 & 25.119$\pm$0.049 & 0.0 & - & - \\
-0 & 2 & 7 & 205.43 & 3.96 & 6.655520 & 17.146742 & 24.424$\pm$0.032 & 2
-5.028$\pm$0.025 & 24.597$\pm$0.027 & 0.0 & - & - \\
-0 & 2 & 8 & 1321.63 & 9.76 & 6.651950 & 17.131672 & 22.189$\pm$0.011 & 2
-4.743$\pm$0.021 & 23.298$\pm$0.011 & 0.0 & 4 & edge \\
-\enddata
-%% Text for table notes should follow after the \enddata but before
-%% the \end{deluxetable}. Make sure there is at least one \tablenotemark
-%% in the table for each \tablenotetext.
-\tablecomments{Table \ref{tbl-1} is published in its entirety in the
-electronic edition of the {\it Astrophysical Journal}. A portion is
-shown here for guidance regarding its form and content.}
-\tablenotetext{a}{Sample footnote for table~\ref{tbl-1} that was generated
-with the deluxetable environment}
-\tablenotetext{b}{Another sample footnote for table~\ref{tbl-1}}
-\end{deluxetable}
-
-%% If you use the table environment, please indicate horizontal rules using
-%% \tableline, not \hline.
-%% Do not put multiple tabular environments within a single table.
-%% The optional \label should appear inside the \caption command.
-
-\clearpage
-
-\begin{table}
-\begin{center}
-\caption{More terribly relevant tabular information.\label{tbl-2}}
-\begin{tabular}{crrrrrrrrrrr}
-\tableline\tableline
-Star & Height & $d_{x}$ & $d_{y}$ & $n$ & $\chi^2$ & $R_{maj}$ & $R_{min}$ &
-\multicolumn{1}{c}{$P$\tablenotemark{a}} & $P R_{maj}$ & $P R_{min}$ &
-\multicolumn{1}{c}{$\Theta$\tablenotemark{b}} \\
-\tableline
-1 &33472.5 &-0.1 &0.4 &53 &27.4 &2.065 &1.940 &3.900 &68.3 &116.2 &-27.639\\
-2 &27802.4 &-0.3 &-0.2 &60 &3.7 &1.628 &1.510 &2.156 &6.8 &7.5 &-26.764\\
-3 &29210.6 &0.9 &0.3 &60 &3.4 &1.622 &1.551 &2.159 &6.7 &7.3 &-40.272\\
-4 &32733.8 &-1.2\tablenotemark{c} &-0.5 &41 &54.8 &2.282 &2.156 &4.313 &117.4 &78.2 &-35.847\\
-5 & 9607.4 &-0.4 &-0.4 &60 &1.4 &1.669\tablenotemark{c} &1.574 &2.343 &8.0 &8.9 &-33.417\\
-6 &31638.6 &1.6 &0.1 &39 &315.2 & 3.433 &3.075 &7.488 &92.1 &25.3 &-12.052\\
-\tableline
-\end{tabular}
-%% Any table notes must follow the \end{tabular} command.
-\tablenotetext{a}{Sample footnote for table~\ref{tbl-2} that was
-generated with the \LaTeX\ table environment}
-\tablenotetext{b}{Yet another sample footnote for table~\ref{tbl-2}}
-\tablenotetext{c}{Another sample footnote for table~\ref{tbl-2}}
-\tablecomments{We can also attach a long-ish paragraph of explanatory
-material to a table.}
-\end{center}
-\end{table}
-
-%% If the table is more than one page long, the width of the table can vary
-%% from page to page when the default \tablewidth is used, as below. The
-%% individual table widths for each page will be written to the log file; a
-%% maximum tablewidth for the table can be computed from these values.
-%% The \tablewidth argument can then be reset and the file reprocessed, so
-%% that the table is of uniform width throughout. Try getting the widths
-%% from the log file and changing the \tablewidth parameter to see how
-%% adjusting this value affects table formatting.
-
-%% The \dataset{} macro has also been applied to a few of the objects to
-%% show how many observations can be tagged in a table.
-
-\clearpage
-
-\begin{deluxetable}{lrrrrcrrrrr}
-\tablewidth{0pt}
-\tablecaption{Literature Data for Program Stars}
-\tablehead{
-\colhead{Star} & \colhead{V} &
-\colhead{b$-$y} & \colhead{m$_1$} &
-\colhead{c$_1$} & \colhead{ref} &
-\colhead{T$_{\rm eff}$} & \colhead{log g} &
-\colhead{v$_{\rm turb}$} & \colhead{[Fe/H]} &
-\colhead{ref}}
-\startdata
-HD 97 & 9.7& 0.51& 0.15& 0.35& 2 & \nodata & \nodata & \nodata & $-1.50$ & 2 \\
-& & & & & & 5015 & \nodata & \nodata & $-1.50$ & 10 \\
-\dataset[ADS/Sa.HST#O6H04VAXQ]{HD 2665} & 7.7& 0.54& 0.09& 0.34& 2 & \nodata & \nodata & \nodata & $-2.30$ & 2 \\
-& & & & & & 5000 & 2.50 & 2.4 & $-1.99$ & 5 \\
-& & & & & & 5120 & 3.00 & 2.0 & $-1.69$ & 7 \\
-& & & & & & 4980 & \nodata & \nodata & $-2.05$ & 10 \\
-HD 4306 & 9.0& 0.52& 0.05& 0.35& 20, 2& \nodata & \nodata & \nodata & $-2.70$ & 2 \\
-& & & & & & 5000 & 1.75 & 2.0 & $-2.70$ & 13 \\
-& & & & & & 5000 & 1.50 & 1.8 & $-2.65$ & 14 \\
-& & & & & & 4950 & 2.10 & 2.0 & $-2.92$ & 8 \\
-& & & & & & 5000 & 2.25 & 2.0 & $-2.83$ & 18 \\
-& & & & & & \nodata & \nodata & \nodata & $-2.80$ & 21 \\
-& & & & & & 4930 & \nodata & \nodata & $-2.45$ & 10 \\
-HD 5426 & 9.6& 0.50& 0.08& 0.34& 2 & \nodata & \nodata & \nodata & $-2.30$ & 2 \\
-\dataset[ADS/Sa.HST#O5F654010]{HD 6755} & 7.7& 0.49& 0.12& 0.28& 20, 2& \nodata & \nodata & \nodata & $-1.70$ & 2 \\
-& & & & & & 5200 & 2.50 & 2.4 & $-1.56$ & 5 \\
-& & & & & & 5260 & 3.00 & 2.7 & $-1.67$ & 7 \\
-& & & & & & \nodata & \nodata & \nodata & $-1.58$ & 21 \\
-& & & & & & 5200 & \nodata & \nodata & $-1.80$ & 10 \\
-& & & & & & 4600 & \nodata & \nodata & $-2.75$ & 10 \\
-\dataset[ADS/Sa.HST#O56D06010]{HD 94028} & 8.2& 0.34& 0.08& 0.25& 20 & 5795 & 4.00 & \nodata & $-1.70$ & 22 \\
-& & & & & & 5860 & \nodata & \nodata & $-1.70$ & 4 \\
-& & & & & & 5910 & 3.80 & \nodata & $-1.76$ & 15 \\
-& & & & & & 5800 & \nodata & \nodata & $-1.67$ & 17 \\
-& & & & & & 5902 & \nodata & \nodata & $-1.50$ & 11 \\
-& & & & & & 5900 & \nodata & \nodata & $-1.57$ & 3 \\
-& & & & & & \nodata & \nodata & \nodata & $-1.32$ & 21 \\
-HD 97916 & 9.2& 0.29& 0.10& 0.41& 20 & 6125 & 4.00 & \nodata & $-1.10$ & 22 \\
-& & & & & & 6160 & \nodata & \nodata & $-1.39$ & 3 \\
-& & & & & & 6240 & 3.70 & \nodata & $-1.28$ & 15 \\
-& & & & & & 5950 & \nodata & \nodata & $-1.50$ & 17 \\
-& & & & & & 6204 & \nodata & \nodata & $-1.36$ & 11 \\
-\cutinhead{This is a cut-in head}
-+26\arcdeg2606& 9.7&0.34&0.05&0.28&20,11& 5980 & \nodata & \nodata &$<-2.20$ & 19 \\
-& & & & & & 5950 & \nodata & \nodata & $-2.89$ & 24 \\
-+26\arcdeg3578& 9.4&0.31&0.05&0.37&20,11& 5830 & \nodata & \nodata & $-2.60$ & 4 \\
-& & & & & & 5800 & \nodata & \nodata & $-2.62$ & 17 \\
-& & & & & & 6177 & \nodata & \nodata & $-2.51$ & 11 \\
-& & & & & & 6000 & 3.25 & \nodata & $-2.20$ & 22 \\
-& & & & & & 6140 & 3.50 & \nodata & $-2.57$ & 15 \\
-+30\arcdeg2611& 9.2&0.82&0.33&0.55& 2 & \nodata & \nodata & \nodata & $-1.70$ & 2 \\
-& & & & & & 4400 & 1.80 & \nodata & $-1.70$ & 12 \\
-& & & & & & 4400 & 0.90 & 1.7 & $-1.20$ & 14 \\
-& & & & & & 4260 & \nodata & \nodata & $-1.55$ & 10 \\
-+37\arcdeg1458& 8.9&0.44&0.07&0.22&20,11& 5296 & \nodata & \nodata & $-2.39$ & 11 \\
-& & & & & & 5420 & \nodata & \nodata & $-2.43$ & 3 \\
-+58\arcdeg1218&10.0&0.51&0.03&0.36& 2 & \nodata & \nodata & \nodata & $-2.80$ & 2 \\
-& & & & & & 5000 & 1.10 & 2.2 & $-2.71$ & 14 \\
-& & & & & & 5000 & 2.20 & 1.8 & $-2.46$ & 5 \\
-& & & & & & 4980 & \nodata & \nodata & $-2.55$ & 10 \\
-+72\arcdeg0094&10.2&0.31&0.09&0.26&12 & 6160 & \nodata & \nodata & $-1.80$ & 19 \\
-\sidehead{I'm a side head:}
-G5--36 & 10.8& 0.40& 0.07& 0.28& 20 & \nodata & \nodata & \nodata & $-1.19$ & 21 \\
-G18--54 & 10.7& 0.37& 0.08& 0.28& 20 & \nodata & \nodata & \nodata & $-1.34$ & 21 \\
-G20--08 & 9.9& 0.36& 0.05& 0.25& 20,11& 5849 & \nodata & \nodata & $-2.59$ & 11 \\
-& & & & & & \nodata & \nodata & \nodata & $-2.03$ & 21 \\
-G20--15 & 10.6& 0.45& 0.03& 0.27& 20,11& 5657 & \nodata & \nodata & $-2.00$ & 11 \\
-& & & & & & 6020 & \nodata & \nodata & $-1.56$ & 3 \\
-& & & & & & \nodata & \nodata & \nodata & $-1.58$ & 21 \\
-G21--22 & 10.7& 0.38& 0.07& 0.27& 20,11& \nodata & \nodata & \nodata & $-1.23$ & 21 \\
-G24--03 & 10.5& 0.36& 0.06& 0.27& 20,11& 5866 & \nodata & \nodata & $-1.78$ & 11 \\
-& & & & & & \nodata & \nodata & \nodata & $-1.70$ & 21 \\
-G30--52 & 8.6& 0.50& 0.25& 0.27& 11 & 4757 & \nodata & \nodata & $-2.12$ & 11 \\
-& & & & & & 4880 & \nodata & \nodata & $-2.14$ & 3 \\
-G33--09 & 10.6& 0.41& 0.10& 0.28& 20 & 5575 & \nodata & \nodata & $-1.48$ & 11 \\
-G66--22 & 10.5& 0.46& 0.16& 0.28& 11 & 5060 & \nodata & \nodata & $-1.77$ & 3 \\
-& & & & & & \nodata & \nodata & \nodata & $-1.04$ & 21 \\
-G90--03 & 10.4& 0.37& 0.04& 0.29& 20 & \nodata & \nodata & \nodata & $-2.01$ & 21 \\
-LP 608--62\tablenotemark{a} & 10.5& 0.30& 0.07& 0.35& 11 & 6250 & \nodata &
-\nodata & $-2.70$ & 4 \\
-\enddata
-\tablenotetext{a}{Star LP 608--62 is also known as BD+1\arcdeg 2341p. We will
-make this footnote extra long so that it extends over two lines.}
-%% You can append references to a table using the \tablerefs command.
-\tablerefs{
-(1) Barbuy, Spite, \& Spite 1985; (2) Bond 1980; (3) Carbon et al. 1987;
-(4) Hobbs \& Duncan 1987; (5) Gilroy et al. 1988: (6) Gratton \& Ortolani 1986;
-(7) Gratton \& Sneden 1987; (8) Gratton \& Sneden (1988); (9) Gratton \& Sneden 1991;
-(10) Kraft et al. 1982; (11) LCL, or Laird, 1990; (12) Leep \& Wallerstein 1981;
-(13) Luck \& Bond 1981; (14) Luck \& Bond 1985; (15) Magain 1987;
-(16) Magain 1989; (17) Peterson 1981; (18) Peterson, Kurucz, \& Carney 1990;
-(19) RMB; (20) Schuster \& Nissen 1988; (21) Schuster \& Nissen 1989b;
-(22) Spite et al. 1984; (23) Spite \& Spite 1986; (24) Hobbs \& Thorburn 1991;
-(25) Hobbs et al. 1991; (26) Olsen 1983.}
-\end{deluxetable}
-
-%% Tables may also be prepared as separate files. See the accompanying
-%% sample file table.tex for an example of an external table file.
-%% To include an external file in your main document, use the \input
-%% command. Uncomment the line below to include table.tex in this
-%% sample file. (Note that you will need to comment out the \documentclass,
-%% \begin{document}, and \end{document} commands from table.tex if you want
-%% to include it in this document.)
-
-%% \input{table}
-
-%% The following command ends your manuscript. LaTeX will ignore any text
-%% that appears after it.
-
-\end{document}
-
-%%
-%% End of file `sample.tex'.
-%</sample>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% Here begins the module `table`.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*table>
-%%
-%% Begining of file `table.tex'
-
-%% This complex but short example prepared in the deluxetable environment
-%% demonstrates some of the techniques
-%% that can be used to generate complex column headings and to align
-%% variable-width columns. See the manuscript sample file, sample.tex,
-%% for more table examples.
-
-%% Note this file has its own \documentclass, \begin{document}, and
-%% \end{document} commands. If you want to insert this table in another
-%% LaTeX document using the \input command, comment out these lines.
-
-\documentclass{aastex}
-\begin{document}
-
-%% Note that the table will print double-spaced since we are using the
-%% manuscript style. Change the style to preprint or preprint2 to see
-%% how LaTeX formats the table in those styles.
-
-%% In this example the LaTeX \multicolumn command is used to span a heading
-%% over several columns. When \multicolumn is used along with the
-%% \cutinhead or \sidehead commands, the \tablecolumns command must
-%% be used to specify the number of columns in the table -
-%% otherwise \cutinhead and \sidehead will not work properly.
-
-%% \cline has been used to produce straddle rules below the spanning heads,
-%% \cutinhead to produce a centered head in the body of the table, and
-%% \sidehead to produce a flush-left head in the body.
-
-%% This table also makes use of the \phn command to better align some of the
-%% columns. Also see \phd, \phs, and \phm{} - other commands useful for
-%% column alignment. All of these commands insert a blank space
-%% whose width is equal to that of a number (\phn),
-%% a decimal point (\phd), a minus sign (\phs), or any
-%% character you wish to use (\phm{text}).
-%% Keep in mind that if you are preparing a table for electronic submission
-%% to one of the journals, you need not worry too much about column
-%% alignment. The editors will fix table alignment as appropriate.
-
-%% If a table is more than one page long, the width of the table can vary
-%% from page to page when the default \tablewidth is used, as below. The
-%% individual table widths for each page will be written to the log file; a
-%% maximum tablewidth for the table can be computed from these values.
-%% The \tablewidth argument can then be reset and the file reprocessed, so
-%% that the table is uniform throughout the pages. Try getting the widths
-%% from the log file and changing the \tablewidth parameter to see how
-%% adjusting this value affects table formatting.
-
-%% The * option to the \\ command has been used in the lines after
-%% the \sidehead to keep them together on the same page. Try taking
-%% the *'s out and LaTeXing the manuscript again to see the difference
-%% in the page breaks. You can group together as many lines as
-%% you like using this command.
-
-
-\begin{deluxetable}{rrrrrrrr}
-\tablecolumns{8}
-\tablewidth{0pc}
-\tablecaption{Percentage of Fake Stars Lost}
-\tablehead{
-\colhead{} & \multicolumn{3}{c}{Non-shell Stars} & \colhead{} &
-\multicolumn{3}{c}{Shell Stars} \\
-\cline{2-4} \cline{6-8} \\
-\colhead{Mag} & \colhead{F336W} & \colhead{F555W} & \colhead{F814W} &
-\colhead{} & \colhead{F336W} & \colhead{F555W} & \colhead{F814W}}
-\startdata
-20.25 & 2.2$\pm$7.4\phn & \nodata & \nodata &
-& 0.9$\pm$6.8 & \nodata & 0.0$\pm$44.7 \\
-20.75 & 2.4$\pm$7.8\phn & \nodata & 2.8$\pm$7.4 &
-& 1.7$\pm$6.6 & \nodata & 1.4$\pm$6.7\phn \\
-21.25 & 0.1$\pm$7.7\phn & \nodata & 1.7$\pm$7.6 &
-& 2.6$\pm$6.5 & \nodata & 0.9$\pm$6.6\phn \\
-21.75 & 2.4$\pm$4.5\phn & 2.2$\pm$7.4 & 0.1$\pm$7.6 &
-& 7.1$\pm$4.5 & 0.9$\pm$6.8 & 3.3$\pm$6.5\phn \\
-22.25 & 3.4$\pm$3.1\phn & 1.8$\pm$7.7 & 2.9$\pm$4.4 &
-& 11.8$\pm$3.6 & 0.4$\pm$6.6 & 5.7$\pm$4.4\phn \\
-22.75 & 4.5$\pm$2.9\phn & 1.8$\pm$7.7 & 4.7$\pm$3.1 &
-& 26.2$\pm$3.6 & 3.4$\pm$6.5 & 10.9$\pm$3.6\phn \\
-23.25 & 7.0$\pm$2.4\phn & 3.4$\pm$4.5 & 3.7$\pm$2.9 &
-& 44.2$\pm$3.3 & 10.7$\pm$4.5 & 20.6$\pm$3.5\phn \\
-\cutinhead{More Data}
-23.75 & 12.4$\pm$2.7\phn & 4.1$\pm$3.1 & 6.7$\pm$2.5 &
-& 59.8$\pm$4.0 & 20.1$\pm$3.6 & 32.6$\pm$3.4\phn \\
-24.25 & 30.2$\pm$3.1\phn & 5.3$\pm$2.9 & 10.0$\pm$2.7 &
-& 74.9$\pm$5.1 & 35.8$\pm$3.6 & 43.1$\pm$4.0\phn \\
-24.75 & 66.8$\pm$5.5\phn & 10.4$\pm$2.4 & 16.5$\pm$3.2 &
-& 83.7$\pm$6.1 & 56.3$\pm$3.3 & 57.0$\pm$5.2\phn \\
-25.25 & 87.5$\pm$35.4 & 20.0$\pm$2.7 & 28.0$\pm$5.6 &
-& \nodata & 71.5$\pm$4.0 & 71.8$\pm$6.2\phn \\
-25.75 & \nodata\phn & 55.3$\pm$3.1 & \nodata &
-& \nodata & 81.2$\pm$5.1 & \nodata\phn \\
-26.25 & \nodata\phn & 85.1$\pm$5.5 & \nodata &
-& \nodata & 85.6$\pm$6.1 & \nodata\phn \\
-\sidehead{More Data}
-27.75 & 12.4$\pm$2.7\phn & 4.1$\pm$3.1 & 6.7$\pm$2.5 &
-& 59.8$\pm$4.0 & 20.1$\pm$3.6 & 32.6$\pm$3.4\phn \\
-28.25 & 30.2$\pm$3.1\phn & 5.3$\pm$2.9 & 10.0$\pm$2.7 &
-& 74.9$\pm$5.1 & 35.8$\pm$3.6 & 43.1$\pm$4.0\phn \\
-29.75 & 66.8$\pm$5.5\phn & 10.4$\pm$2.4 & 16.5$\pm$3.2 &
-& 83.7$\pm$6.1 & 56.3$\pm$3.3 & 57.0$\pm$5.2\phn \\
-30.25 & 87.5$\pm$35.4 & 20.0$\pm$2.7 & 28.0$\pm$5.6 &
-& \nodata & 71.5$\pm$4.0 & 71.8$\pm$6.2\phn \\
-31.75 & \nodata\phn & 55.3$\pm$3.1 & \nodata &
-& \nodata & 81.2$\pm$5.1 & \nodata\phn \\
-32.25 & \nodata\phn & 85.1$\pm$5.5 & \nodata &
-& \nodata & 85.6$\pm$6.1 & \nodata\phn \\
-33.75 & 12.4$\pm$2.7\phn & 4.1$\pm$3.1 & 6.7$\pm$2.5 &
-& 59.8$\pm$4.0 & 20.1$\pm$3.6 & 32.6$\pm$3.4\phn \\
-34.25 & 30.2$\pm$3.1\phn & 5.3$\pm$2.9 & 10.0$\pm$2.7 &
-& 74.9$\pm$5.1 & 35.8$\pm$3.6 & 43.1$\pm$4.0\phn \\
-35.75 & 66.8$\pm$5.5\phn & 10.4$\pm$2.4 & 16.5$\pm$3.2 &
-& 83.7$\pm$6.1 & 56.3$\pm$3.3 & 57.0$\pm$5.2\phn \\
-36.25 & 87.5$\pm$35.4 & 20.0$\pm$2.7 & 28.0$\pm$5.6 &
-& \nodata & 71.5$\pm$4.0 & 71.8$\pm$6.2\phn \\
-37.75 & \nodata\phn & 55.3$\pm$3.1 & \nodata &
-& \nodata & 81.2$\pm$5.1 & \nodata\phn \\
-38.25 & \nodata\phn & 85.1$\pm$5.5 & \nodata &
-& \nodata & 85.6$\pm$6.1 & \nodata\phn \\
-\enddata
-\end{deluxetable}
-
- \end{document}
-
-%%
-%% End of file `table.tex'.
-
-
-%</table>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-%
-% docstrip will complete its |\generate| command at the following line:
-\endinput
-
-Textures 2.0.2 (preloaded format=LaTeX R9P0 98.10.16) 20 JAN 1999 12:29
-(aasclass
-LaTeX2e <1998/06/01>
-(aasclass.dtx
-File: aasclass.dtx 1999/01/22 5.0rc2 AAS markup document class
-
-LaTeX Warning: File `ltxdoc.cfg' already exists on the system.
- Not generating it from this source.
-
-(ltxdoc.cls
-Document Class: ltxdoc 1996/01/11 v2.0r Standard LaTeX documentation class
-*************************************
-* Local config file ltxdoc.cfg used
-*************************************
-(ltxdoc.cfg) (article.cls
-Document Class: article 1998/05/05 v1.3y Standard LaTeX document class
-(size10.clo
-File: size10.clo 1998/05/05 v1.3y Standard LaTeX file (size option)
-)
-\c@part=\count79
-\c@section=\count80
-\c@subsection=\count81
-\c@subsubsection=\count82
-\c@paragraph=\count83
-\c@subparagraph=\count84
-\c@figure=\count85
-\c@table=\count86
-\abovecaptionskip=\skip41
-\belowcaptionskip=\skip42
-\bibindent=\dimen102
-) (doc.sty
-Package: doc 1998/05/19 v2.0b Standard LaTeX documentation package (FMi)
-\c@StandardModuleDepth=\count87
-\guard@level=\count88
-\MacrocodeTopsep=\skip43
-\MacroIndent=\dimen103
-\macro@cnt=\count89
-\MacroTopsep=\skip44
-\index@excludelist=\toks14
-(multicol.sty
-Package: multicol 1998/01/19 v1.5q multicolumn formatting (FMi)
-\c@tracingmulticols=\count90
-\mult@box=\box26
-\multicol@leftmargin=\dimen104
-\c@unbalance=\count91
-\c@collectmore=\count92
-\doublecol@number=\count93
-\multicoltolerance=\count94
-\multicolpretolerance=\count95
-\full@width=\dimen105
-\page@free=\dimen106
-\premulticols=\dimen107
-\postmulticols=\dimen108
-\multicolsep=\skip45
-\multicolbaselineskip=\skip46
-\partial@page=\box27
-\last@line=\box28
-\mult@rightbox=\box29
-\mult@grightbox=\box30
-\mult@gfirstbox=\box31
-\mult@firstbox=\box32
-\@tempa=\box33
-\@tempa=\box34
-\@tempa=\box35
-\@tempa=\box36
-\@tempa=\box37
-\@tempa=\box38
-\@tempa=\box39
-\@tempa=\box40
-\@tempa=\box41
-\@tempa=\box42
-\@tempa=\box43
-\@tempa=\box44
-\@tempa=\box45
-\@tempa=\box46
-\@tempa=\box47
-\@tempa=\box48
-\@tempa=\box49
-\c@columnbadness=\count96
-\c@finalcolumnbadness=\count97
-\last@try=\dimen109
-\multicolovershoot=\dimen110
-\multicolundershoot=\dimen111
-\mult@nat@firstbox=\box50
-)
-\IndexMin=\dimen112
-\c@IndexColumns=\count98
-\GlossaryMin=\dimen113
-\c@GlossaryColumns=\count99
-\check@sum=\count100
-\bslash@cnt=\count101
-\wrong@table=\toks15
-\c@CodelineNo=\count102
-))
-\@indexfile=\write3
-Writing index file aasclass.idx
-(shortvrb.sty
-Package: shortvrb 1998/05/19 v2.0b Standard LaTeX documentation package (FMi)
-)
-Package shortvrb Info: Made | a short reference for \verb on input line 321.
-LaTeX Info: Redefining \cs on input line 358.
-
-LaTeX Warning: Writing file `:aasclass.ins'.
-
-
-
-LaTeX Warning: Writing file `:Read.Me'.
-
-
-(aasclass.aux)
-LaTeX Font Info: Checking defaults for OML/cmm/m/it on input line 585.
-LaTeX Font Info: ... okay on input line 585.
-LaTeX Font Info: Checking defaults for T1/cmr/m/n on input line 585.
-LaTeX Font Info: ... okay on input line 585.
-LaTeX Font Info: Checking defaults for OT1/cmr/m/n on input line 585.
-LaTeX Font Info: ... okay on input line 585.
-LaTeX Font Info: Checking defaults for OMS/cmsy/m/n on input line 585.
-LaTeX Font Info: ... okay on input line 585.
-LaTeX Font Info: Checking defaults for OMX/cmex/m/n on input line 585.
-LaTeX Font Info: ... okay on input line 585.
-LaTeX Font Info: Checking defaults for U/cmr/m/n on input line 585.
-LaTeX Font Info: ... okay on input line 585.
-Package shortvrb Info: | already a short reference for \verb on input line 585.
-(aasclass.dtx
-***************************
-* Character table correct *
-***************************
-(Read.Me
-LaTeX Font Info: External font `cmex10' loaded for size
-(Font) <17.28> on input line 16.
-LaTeX Font Info: External font `cmex10' loaded for size
-(Font) <12> on input line 16.
-LaTeX Font Info: External font `cmex10' loaded for size
-(Font) <8> on input line 16.
-LaTeX Font Info: External font `cmex10' loaded for size
-(Font) <6> on input line 16.
-LaTeX Font Info: External font `cmex10' loaded for size
-(Font) <5> on input line 16.
-
-Overfull \hbox (8.91502pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 24--27
-[]\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 The dis-tri-bu-tion point for AAST[]X is \OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 ftp:
-//ftp.aas.org/pubs/aastex50.zip\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 ,|
- []
-
-LaTeX Font Info: External font `cmex10' loaded for size
-(Font) <7> on input line 29.
-(aasclass.toc [1
-
-] [2])
-\tf@toc=\write4
-[3]
-Overfull \hbox (15.35983pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 65--68
-[]\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 Now type-set \OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 aasclass.ins\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 , th
-ereby gen-er-at-ing \OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 aastex.cls \OT1/cmr/m/n/10 and \OT1/cmtt/m/
-n/10 aasguide.tex\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 . |
- []
-
-)
-LaTeX Font Info: Font shape `OT1/cmtt/bx/n' in size <10> not available
-(Font) Font shape `OT1/cmtt/m/n' tried instead on input line 79.
-[4]
-Overfull \hbox (0.5877pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 140--140
- [][]\OT1/cmtt/m/n/9 %<style> \@obsoletefile{aasclass.cls}{aasclass.sty}\LoadCl
-ass{aasclass}% |
- []
-
-[5]
-LaTeX Font Info: Font shape `OT1/cmtt/bx/n' in size <12> not available
-(Font) Font shape `OT1/cmtt/m/n' tried instead on input line 171.
-[6] [7] [8] [9] [10]
-Overfull \hbox (10.0376pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 579--579
- [][] \OT1/cmtt/m/n/9 % For version number and date, search on "\fileversion" i
-n the .dtx file, |
- []
-
-[11] [12]
-Overfull \hbox (5.11002pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 610--613
-[]\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 The macro []\OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 \aas@ptsize \OT1/cmr/m/n/10 works
- very much like the []\OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 \@ptsize \OT1/cmr/m/n/10 macro of \OT1/cm
-tt/m/n/10 classes.dtx\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 ,|
- []
-
-[13] [14]
-Overfull \hbox (47.83716pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 784--784
- [][] \OT1/cmtt/m/n/9 \ifx\undefined\aas@ptsize\expandafter\@firstoftwo\else\exp
-andafter\@secondoftwo\fi |
- []
-
-[15]
-Overfull \hbox (5.31265pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 784--784
- [][] \OT1/cmtt/m/n/9 \expandafter\PassOptionsToClass\expandafter{\expandafter1
-\aas@ptsizept}% |
- []
-
-
-Overfull \hbox (47.83716pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 784--784
- [][] \OT1/cmtt/m/n/9 \ifx\undefined\aas@ptsize\expandafter\@firstoftwo\else\exp
-andafter\@secondoftwo\fi |
- []
-
-
-Overfull \hbox (5.31265pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 784--784
- [][] \OT1/cmtt/m/n/9 \expandafter\PassOptionsToClass\expandafter{\expandafter1
-\aas@ptsizept}% |
- []
-
-
-Overfull \hbox (36.30128pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 792--794
-\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 AAST[]X is a vari-ant of the stan-dard L[]T[]X ar-ti-cle class:
-[]\OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 CTAN://macros/latex/unpacked\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 . |
- []
-
-
-Overfull \hbox (14.63516pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 798--800
-[]\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 We al-ways load the stan-dard L[]T[]X sym-bol pack-age: []\OT1
-/cmtt/m/n/10 CTAN://macros/latex/base\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 . |
- []
-
-
-Overfull \hbox (129.57907pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 804--806
-[]\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 We al-ways load the stan-dard L[]T[]X ex-tended graph-ics pack
--age: []\OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 CTAN://macros/latex/packages/graphics\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 .
-|
- []
-
-
-Overfull \hbox (50.91344pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 810--812
-[]\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 The AMS []\OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 amsmath \OT1/cmr/m/n/10 pack-age re
--places []\OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 amssym\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 : []\OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 CTAN://mac
-ros/latex/packages/amslatex\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 . |
- []
-
-
-Overfull \hbox (67.91158pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 816--818
-[]\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 The con-tributed L[]T[]X []\OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 natbib \OT1/cmr/m/
-n/10 pack-age: []\OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 CTAN://macros/latex/contrib/supported/natbib\O
-T1/cmr/m/n/10 . |
- []
-
-
-Overfull \hbox (48.02657pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 822--825
-\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 code may serve as a model for load-ing other classes: []\OT1/cmt
-t/m/n/10 CTAN://macros/latex/packages/tools\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 . |
- []
-
-LaTeX Font Info: External font `cmex10' loaded for size
-(Font) <14.4> on input line 830.
-[16] [17] [18] [19] [20] [21] [22] [23] [24] [25] [26] [27] [28] [29] [30]
-[31] [32] [33] [34]
-Overfull \hbox (19.66588pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 2107--2110
-\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 The for-mat-ting of the []\OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 \slugcomment \OT1/cmr
-/m/n/10 in-for-ma-tion is con-trolled by the []\OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 \@makeslugcmmnt|
-
- []
-
-[35] [36] [37]
-Overfull \hbox (27.72055pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 2338--2338
-[] \OT1/cmtt/m/n/9 \authoraddr{<author's postal address>}% Deprecated (V5.0)
- in favor of \affil[] |
- []
-
-[38] [39] [40] [41] [42] [43] [44] [45] [46] [47] [48] [49]
-Overfull \hbox (12.01851pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 3200--3202
-[][]\OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 \@makecaption \OT1/cmr/m/n/10 de-ter-mines for-mat-ting for
- fig-ure and ta-ble cap-tions. For manuscripts,|
- []
-
-[50] [51] [52] [53] [54] [55] [56] [57] [58] [59]
-Overfull \hbox (19.48749pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 3895--3895
- [][]\OT1/cmtt/m/n/9 \newcommand\tablebreak{\substitute@command\tablebreak\\}%{\
-cr\ptable@@split}% |
- []
-
-[60] [61] [62] [63] [64] [65] [66] [67]
-Overfull \hbox (10.0376pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 4479--4479
- [][]\OT1/cmtt/m/n/9 %\def\ascnode{\astro{N}}% ascending node (dragon's head), (
-only in cmastro) |
- []
-
-
-Overfull \hbox (19.48749pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 4479--4479
- [][]\OT1/cmtt/m/n/9 %\def\descnode{\astro{D}}% descending node (dragon's tail),
- (only in cmastro) |
- []
-
-[68] [69] [70] [71] [72] [73] [74]
-LaTeX Font Info: Try loading font information for OMS+cmr on input line 4980.
-
-(omscmr.fd
-File: omscmr.fd 1998/03/27 v2.5g Standard LaTeX font definitions
-)
-LaTeX Font Info: Font shape `OMS/cmr/m/n' in size <10> not available
-(Font) Font shape `OMS/cmsy/m/n' tried instead on input line 4980.
-[75] [76]
-Overfull \hbox (10.59657pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 5145--5147
-[]\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 What should hap-pen to a com-pat-i-bil-ity mode doc-u-ment? Wo
-uldn't|
- []
-
-[77]
-Overfull \hbox (24.22153pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 5220--5221
-[]\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 Deprecate []\OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 \nl\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 , []\OT1/cmtt/
-m/n/10 \nextline\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 , []\OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 \tablevspace\OT1/cmr/m/n/10
- , and []\OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 \tablebreak\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 .|
- []
-
-
-Overfull \hbox (83.01173pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 5223--5229
-[]\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 Functionality cov-ered by []\OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 hyperref \OT1/cmr
-/m/n/10 pack-age. Syn-tax: []\OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 \anchor{[]}{[]}\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 .|
- []
-
-
-Overfull \hbox (67.96008pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 5223--5229
-\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 Ref: \OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 url.sty \OT1/cmr/m/n/10 in []\OT1/cmtt/m/n
-/10 /contrib/other/misc\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 . \OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 hyperref.sty \OT1/cmr/
-m/n/10 in []\OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 /contrib/supported/hyperref\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 .|
- []
-
-[78]
-Overfull \hbox (11.78822pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 5275--5279
-[]\OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 \journal{[]}\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 , \OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 \articleID{[]}
-\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 , \OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 \volno{[]}{[]}\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 . |
- []
-
-[79]
-*******************
-* Checksum passed *
-*******************
-) (aasclass.ind
-Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 6--7
-\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1971, 2000, 2055
- []
-
-LaTeX Font Info: External font `cmex10' loaded for size
-(Font) <9> on input line 14.
-
-Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 15--16
-\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1000, 1002--
- []
-
-
-Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 15--16
-\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1006, 1008, 1019
- []
-
-
-Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 26--28
-\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1342, 1347, 1671
- []
-
-
-Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 36--37
-\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1930, 1933,
- []
-
-
-Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 36--37
-\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1937, 1940, 1943
- []
-
-
-Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 58--60
-\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1930, 1933,
- []
-
-
-Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 58--60
-\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1937, 1940, 1943
- []
-
-
-Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 61--62
-\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1417, 1498, 1540
- []
-
-
-Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 63--65
-\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1073, 1088,
- []
-
-
-Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 63--65
-\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1102, 1112, 1549
- []
-
-[80]
-Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 81--82
-\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1107, 1118, $[]$
- []
-
-
-Overfull \hbox (14.06262pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 84--85
-[][]\OT1/cmtt/m/n/9 \@latex@warning@no@line |
- []
-
-
-Overfull \hbox (9.33768pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 90--91
-[][]\OT1/cmtt/m/n/9 \@make@caption@text@aj |
- []
-
-
-Overfull \hbox (14.06262pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 91--92
-[][]\OT1/cmtt/m/n/9 \@make@caption@text@apj |
- []
-
-
-Overfull \hbox (18.78757pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 92--93
-[][]\OT1/cmtt/m/n/9 \@make@caption@text@pptt |
- []
-
-
-Overfull \hbox (18.78757pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 95--96
-[][]\OT1/cmtt/m/n/9 \@makecaption@plano@cont |
- []
-
-
-Overfull \hbox (32.9624pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 96--97
-[][]\OT1/cmtt/m/n/9 \@makecaption@plano@cont@aj |
- []
-
-
-Overfull \hbox (37.68735pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 97--98
-[][]\OT1/cmtt/m/n/9 \@makecaption@plano@cont@apj |
- []
-
-
-Overfull \hbox (42.4123pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 98--99
-[][]\OT1/cmtt/m/n/9 \@makecaption@plano@cont@pptt |
- []
-
-
-Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 102--103
-\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1037, 1970, 2050
- []
-
-
-Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 126--128
-\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1600, 1603,
- []
-
-
-Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 126--128
-\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1606, 1612,
- []
-
-
-Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 126--128
-\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1615, 1618, 1624
- []
-
-
-Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 148--150
-\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1191, 1216,
- []
-
-
-Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 148--150
-\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 2028, 2033, 2037
- []
-
-
-Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 156--157
-\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1332, 1468, 2017
- []
-
-
-Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 167--169
-\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 434, 453--455,
- []
-
-[81]
-Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 173--175
-\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1163, 1166, 1175
- []
-
-
-Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 178--180
-\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1166, 1499, 1703
- []
-
-
-Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 187--189
-\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1930, 1933,
- []
-
-
-Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 187--189
-\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1937, 1940, 1943
- []
-
-
-Overfull \hbox (9.33768pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 212--213
-[][]\OT1/cmtt/m/n/9 \abovedisplayshortskip |
- []
-
-
-Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 224--225
-\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1348, 1564, 1672
- []
-
-
-Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 247--249
-\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1002--1006, 1084
- []
-
-
-Overfull \hbox (4.61273pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 250--251
-[][]\OT1/cmtt/m/n/9 \appendix@figtab@defs |
- []
-
-
-Overfull \hbox (28.23746pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 251--252
-[][]\OT1/cmtt/m/n/9 \appendix@figtab@defs@pptt |
- []
-
-
-Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 252--253
-\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1328, 1641, 1647
- []
-
-
-Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 258--259
-\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1170, 1210, 1211
- []
-
-
-Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 273--275
-\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1869--1871,
- []
-
-
-Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 273--275
-\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1874--1880,
- []
-
-
-Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 273--275
-\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1882--1884,
- []
-
-
-Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 273--275
-\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1886--1891,
- []
-
-
-Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 273--275
-\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1893--1897, $[]$
- []
-
-
-Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 276--278
-\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1135, 1324, 1398
- []
-
-[82]
-Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 293--295
-\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1995, 2043, 2045
- []
-
-
-Overfull \hbox (9.33768pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 302--303
-[][]\OT1/cmtt/m/n/9 \belowdisplayshortskip |
- []
-
-
-Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 332--335
-\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1038, 1043,
- []
-
-
-Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 332--335
-\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1051, 1055,
- []
-
-
-Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 332--335
-\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1066, 1072,
- []
-
-
-Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 332--335
-\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1083, 1422,
- []
-
-
-Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 332--335
-\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1431, 1434,
- []
-
-
-Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 332--335
-\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1439, 1442,
- []
-
-
-Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 332--335
-\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1448, 1451,
- []
-
-
-Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 332--335
-\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1457, 1460, 1511
- []
-
-
-Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 335--336
-\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1688, 1693, 1701
- []
-
-
-Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 336--338
-\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1869--1871,
- []
-
-
-Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 336--338
-\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1874--1880,
- []
-
-
-Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 336--338
-\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1884, 1886--
- []
-
-
-Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 336--338
-\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1891, 1893--1897
- []
-
-
-Overfull \hbox (32.9624pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 348--350
-[][]\OT1/cmtt/m/n/9 \clear@thebibliography@page |
- []
-
-
-Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 348--350
-\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1275, 2012, 2058
- []
-
-
-Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 350--351
-\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1563, 2057, 2058
- []
-
-
-Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 355--357
-\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1056, 1073,
- []
-
-
-Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 355--357
-\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1088, 1102, 1112
- []
-
-
-Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 361--362
-\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1695, 1696, 1698
- []
-
-
-Overfull \hbox (4.61273pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 387--388
-[][]\OT1/cmtt/m/n/9 \DeclareRobustCommand |
- []
-
-
-Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 391--393
-\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1917, 1924,
- []
-
-
-Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 391--393
-\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1925, 1929--
- []
-
-
-Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 391--393
-\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1931, 1933,
- []
-
-
-Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 391--393
-\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1937, 1938,
- []
-
-
-Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 391--393
-\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1940, 1941, 1943
- []
-
-
-Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 393--395
-\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1917, 1924,
- []
-
-
-Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 393--395
-\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1925, 1929--
- []
-
-
-Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 393--395
-\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1931, 1933,
- []
-
-
-Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 393--395
-\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1937, 1938,
- []
-
-
-Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 393--395
-\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1940, 1941, 1943
- []
-
-
-Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 395--397
-\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1925, 1930,
- []
-
-
-Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 395--397
-\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1932, 1933,
- []
-
-
-Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 395--397
-\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1937, 1939,
- []
-
-
-Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 395--397
-\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1940, 1942, 1943
- []
-
-[83]
-Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 417--418
-\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1483, 1562, 2023
- []
-
-
-Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 419--422
-\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1047, 1051,
- []
-
-
-Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 419--422
-\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1058, 1066,
- []
-
-
-Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 419--422
-\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1076, 1083,
- []
-
-
-Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 419--422
-\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1426, 1431,
- []
-
-
-Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 419--422
-\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1434, 1439,
- []
-
-
-Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 419--422
-\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1442, 1448,
- []
-
-
-Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 419--422
-\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1451, 1457,
- []
-
-
-Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 419--422
-\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1460, 1477, 1561
- []
-
-
-Overfull \hbox (4.61273pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 437--438
-[][]\OT1/cmtt/m/n/9 \eqnarray@fleqn@fixed |
- []
-
-
-Overfull \hbox (4.61273pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 475--476
-[][]\OT1/cmtt/m/n/9 \fnum@ptablecont@pptt |
- []
-
-
-Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 476--477
-\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1503, 1565, $[]$
- []
-
-
-Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 485--486
-\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1317, 1322, 2059
- []
-
-
-Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 491--492
-\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1847, 1849--1853
- []
-
-
-Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 516--518
-\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1377, 1381,
- []
-
-
-Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 516--518
-\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1389, 1474,
- []
-
-
-Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 516--518
-\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1517, 1526,
- []
-
-
-Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 516--518
-\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1527, 1575,
- []
-
-
-Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 516--518
-\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1576, 1599,
- []
-
-
-Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 516--518
-\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1605, 1611, 1617
- []
-
-[84]
-Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 541--542
-\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1696, 1698, 1705
- []
-
-
-Overfull \hbox (23.51251pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 544--545
-[][]\OT1/cmtt/m/n/9 \interfootnotelinepenalty |
- []
-
-
-Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 552--554
-\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1094, 1106,
- []
-
-
-Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 552--554
-\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1117, 1192,
- []
-
-
-Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 552--554
-\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1437, 1446, 2038
- []
-
-
-Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 585--587
-\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1044, 1056,
- []
-
-
-Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 585--587
-\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1115, 1457, 1460
- []
-
-
-Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 617--618
-\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1014, $[]$, 1973
- []
-
-
-Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 626--627
-\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1972, 2001, 2056
- []
-
-
-Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 637--638
-\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1150, 1152, 1157
- []
-
-[85]
-Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 646--647
-\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1822--1825, 1831
- []
-
-
-Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 648--650
-\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1818--1827,
- []
-
-
-Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 648--650
-\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1829, 1831,
- []
-
-
-Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 648--650
-\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1832, 1837,
- []
-
-
-Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 648--650
-\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1840, 1846,
- []
-
-
-Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 648--650
-\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1848, 1855--1859
- []
-
-
-Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 663--664
-\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1614, 1623, 1862
- []
-
-
-Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 676--678
-\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1520, 1547,
- []
-
-
-Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 676--678
-\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1575, 1598,
- []
-
-
-Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 676--678
-\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1601, 1604,
- []
-
-
-Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 676--678
-\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1607, 1610,
- []
-
-
-Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 676--678
-\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1613, 1616,
- []
-
-
-Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 676--678
-\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1619, 1622, 1625
- []
-
-
-Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 685--688
-\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1056, 1073,
- []
-
-
-Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 685--688
-\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1181, 1187,
- []
-
-
-Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 685--688
-\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1192, 1210,
- []
-
-
-Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 685--688
-\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1218, 2030,
- []
-
-
-Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 685--688
-\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 2034, 2038, 2059
- []
-
-
-Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 714--716
-\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1629, 1645,
- []
-
-
-Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 714--716
-\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1651, 1656, 1660
- []
-
-
-Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 717--718
-\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1279, 1634, 1990
- []
-
-
-Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 748--749
-\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1149, 1336, 1337
- []
-
-
-Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 751--752
-\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1821, 1827,
- []
-
-
-Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 751--752
-\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1829, 1837, 1842
- []
-
-[86]
-Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 762--763
-\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1515, 1523,
- []
-
-
-Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 762--763
-\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1524, 1557, 1558
- []
-
-
-Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 765--766
-\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1370, 1470, 1567
- []
-
-
-Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 767--768
-\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1386, 1400,
- []
-
-
-Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 767--768
-\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1516, 1517, 1571
- []
-
-
-Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 769--770
-\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1548, 1549, 1568
- []
-
-
-Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 770--772
-\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1371, 1469,
- []
-
-
-Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 770--772
-\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1472, 1567,
- []
-
-
-Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 770--772
-\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1602, 1614, 1623
- []
-
-
-Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 772--774
-\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1410, 1493,
- []
-
-
-Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 772--774
-\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1549, 1586, 1592
- []
-
-
-Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 774--776
-\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1471, 1492,
- []
-
-
-Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 774--776
-\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1560, 1579, 1585
- []
-
-
-Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 779--782
-[]$\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 , 1396,
- []
-
-
-Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 779--782
-\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1402, 1417,
- []
-
-
-Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 779--782
-\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1418, 1487,
- []
-
-
-Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 779--782
-\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1493, 1498,
- []
-
-
-Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 779--782
-\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1499, 1524,
- []
-
-
-Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 779--782
-\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1558, 1580,
- []
-
-
-Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 779--782
-\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1586, 1592,
- []
-
-
-Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 779--782
-\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1629, 1645,
- []
-
-
-Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 779--782
-\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1651, 1656, 1660
- []
-
-
-Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 802--808
-\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1714, 1716,
- []
-
-
-Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 802--808
-\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1718, 1720,
- []
-
-
-Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 802--808
-\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1722, 1724,
- []
-
-
-Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 802--808
-\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1726, 1728,
- []
-
-
-Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 802--808
-\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1730, 1732,
- []
-
-
-Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 802--808
-\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1734, 1736,
- []
-
-
-Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 802--808
-\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1738, 1740,
- []
-
-
-Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 802--808
-\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1742, 1744,
- []
-
-
-Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 802--808
-\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1746, 1748,
- []
-
-
-Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 802--808
-\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1750, 1752,
- []
-
-
-Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 802--808
-\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1754, 1756,
- []
-
-
-Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 802--808
-\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1758, 1760,
- []
-
-
-Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 802--808
-\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1762, 1764,
- []
-
-
-Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 802--808
-\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1766, 1768,
- []
-
-
-Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 802--808
-\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1770, 1772,
- []
-
-
-Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 802--808
-\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1774, 1776,
- []
-
-
-Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 802--808
-\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1778, 1780,
- []
-
-
-Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 802--808
-\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1782, 1784,
- []
-
-
-Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 802--808
-\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1786, 1788,
- []
-
-
-Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 802--808
-\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1790, 1792,
- []
-
-
-Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 802--808
-\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1794, 1796,
- []
-
-
-Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 802--808
-\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1798, 1800, 1802
- []
-
-
-Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 809--810
-\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1982, 2015, 2063
- []
-
-
-Overfull \hbox (9.33768pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 810--811
-[][]\OT1/cmtt/m/n/9 \references@refpar@mss |
- []
-
-
-Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 810--811
-\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1292, 1982, 2063
- []
-
-
-Overfull \hbox (14.06262pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 811--812
-[][]\OT1/cmtt/m/n/9 \references@refpar@pptt |
- []
-
-
-Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 812--813
-\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1280, 1282, 1301
- []
-
-
-Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 821--822
-\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1967, 1986, 2041
- []
-
-
-Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 840--842
-\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1442, 1448,
- []
-
-
-Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 840--842
-\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1451, 1457,
- []
-
-
-Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 840--842
-\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1460, 1656, 1660
- []
-
-
-Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 847--848
-[]$\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 , 1215, 2007
- []
-
-[87]
-Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 873--875
-\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1105, 1113, 1860
- []
-
-
-Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 880--881
-\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1336, 1337, 1475
- []
-
-
-Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 895--896
-\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1249, 1276, 2008
- []
-
-
-Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 897--899
-\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1529, 1595,
- []
-
-
-Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 897--899
-\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1596, 1847, 1958
- []
-
-
-Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 929--930
-\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1328, 1331--
- []
-
-
-Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 929--930
-\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1333, 1641, 1647
- []
-
-
-Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 937--939
-\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1420, 1969, 2049
- []
-
-
-Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 943--945
-\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1233, 1235,
- []
-
-
-Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 943--945
-\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1239, 1243, 1244
- []
-
-
-Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 945--947
-\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1223, 1346,
- []
-
-
-Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 945--947
-\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1347, $[]$, 1677
- []
-
-
-Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 950--951
-\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1671, $[]$, 1679
- []
-
-
-Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 951--953
-\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1189, 1208,
- []
-
-
-Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 951--953
-\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1211, 1223, 1225
- []
-
-
-Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 955--958
-\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1225, 1341,
- []
-
-
-Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 955--958
-\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1342, 1428,
- []
-
-
-Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 955--958
-\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1429, 1437,
- []
-
-
-Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 955--958
-\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1445, 1446,
- []
-
-
-Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 955--958
-\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1454, 1455,
- []
-
-
-Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 955--958
-\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1487, 1492,
- []
-
-
-Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 955--958
-\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1579, 1585,
- []
-
-
-Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 955--958
-\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1591, $[]$, 1678
- []
-
-[88]
-Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 969--970
-\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1066, 1071, 1083
- []
-
-
-Overfull \hbox (18.78757pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 987--988
-[][]\OT1/cmtt/m/n/9 \typeout@deluxetable@mss |
- []
-
-
-Overfull \hbox (18.78757pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 988--989
-[][]\OT1/cmtt/m/n/9 \typeout@deluxetable@ppt |
- []
-
-
-Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 1022--1024
-\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1930, 1933,
- []
-
-
-Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 1022--1024
-\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1937, 1940, 1943
- []
-
-) [89] (aasclass.aux) )
-Here is how much of TeX's memory you used:
- 687 strings out of 3926
- 7187 string characters out of 65536
- 95346 words of memory out of 192512
- 3530 multiletter control sequences out of 10000
- 14 hyphenation exceptions out of 3001
- 31i,7n,21p,286b,1420s stack positions out of 200i,100n,120p,5000b,4000s
-
-Output written on aasclass (89 pages, 323624 bytes).
-elapsed seconds = 124.88
-
-Textures 2.0.2 (preloaded format=plain 96.6.7) 20 JAN 1999 21:48
-(aasclass (docstrip.tex
-\blockLevel=\count26
-\emptyLines=\count27
-\processedLines=\count28
-\commentsRemoved=\count29
-\commentsPassed=\count30
-\codeLinesPassed=\count31
-\TotalprocessedLines=\count32
-\TotalcommentsRemoved=\count33
-\TotalcommentsPassed=\count34
-\TotalcodeLinesPassed=\count35
-\NumberOfFiles=\count36
-\inFile=\read0
-\inputcheck=\read1
-\@tempcnta=\count37
-\off@0=\count38
-\off@1=\count39
-\off@2=\count40
-\off@3=\count41
-\off@4=\count42
-\off@5=\count43
-\off@6=\count44
-\off@7=\count45
-\off@8=\count46
-\off@9=\count47
-\off@10=\count48
-\off@11=\count49
-\off@12=\count50
-\off@13=\count51
-\off@14=\count52
-\off@15=\count53
-\@temptokena=\toks12
-\@maxfiles=\count54
-\@maxoutfiles=\count55
-Utility: `docstrip' 2.5b <1998/04/28>
-English documentation <1998/04/03>
-
-**********************************************************
-* This program converts documented macro-files into fast *
-* loadable files by stripping off (nearly) all comments! *
-**********************************************************
-
-********************************************************
-* No Configuration file found, using default settings. *
-********************************************************
-
-)
-
-Generating file(s) aastex.cls aasclass.tex aasguide.tex aassymbols.tex sample.tex table.tex
-
-Processing file aasclass.dtx (class) -> aastex.cls
- (doc) -> aasclass.tex
- (guide) -> aasguide.tex
- (symbols) -> aassymbols.tex
- (sample) -> sample.tex
- (table) -> table.tex
-File aasclass.dtx ended by \endinput.
-Lines processed: 9686
-Comments removed: 3461
-Comments passed: 42
-Codelines passed: 6142
-
-***********************************************************
-*
-* To finish the installation, please move the following
-* files into a directory searched by TeX:
-*
-* aastex.cls
-*
-* To produce the user documentation, run aasguide.tex through LaTeX.
-*
-* To produce the AMS and AAS symbols crib sheet, run aassymbols.tex through LaTEX.
-*
-* To typeset the aastex sample documents, run sample.tex, sample2.tex, and samp
-tbls.tex through LaTeX.
-*
-* To produce the programmer documentation, run aasclass.dtx through LaTeX.
-*
-* Happy TeXing
-***********************************************************
-No pages of output.
-elapsed seconds = 46.72
-
-Textures 2.0.2 (preloaded format=LaTeX R9P0 98.10.16) 23 JAN 1999 02:30
-(aasguide
-LaTeX2e <1998/06/01>
-(aasguide.tex
-File: aasguide.tex 1999/01/22 5.0rc2 AAS markup document class
-(aastex.cls
-Document Class: aastex 1999/01/22 5.0rc2 AAS markup document class
-Class aastex Info: Original \LaTeX2.09 style by Chris Biemesderfer (chris@ferber
-ts.com). Adapted to \LaTeXe by A. Ogawa (ogawa@teleport.com) on input line 74.
-(article.cls
-Document Class: article 1998/05/05 v1.3y Standard LaTeX document class
-(size10.clo
-File: size10.clo 1998/05/05 v1.3y Standard LaTeX file (size option)
-)
-\c@part=\count79
-\c@section=\count80
-\c@subsection=\count81
-\c@subsubsection=\count82
-\c@paragraph=\count83
-\c@subparagraph=\count84
-\c@figure=\count85
-\c@table=\count86
-\abovecaptionskip=\skip41
-\belowcaptionskip=\skip42
-\bibindent=\dimen102
-) (latexsym.sty
-Package: latexsym 1996/11/20 v2.2d Standard LaTeX package (lasy symbols)
-\symlasy=\mathgroup4
-LaTeX Font Info: Overwriting symbol font `lasy' in version `bold'
-(Font) U/lasy/m/n --> U/lasy/b/n on input line 85.
-) (graphicx.sty
-Package: graphicx 1997/06/09 v1.0d Enhanced LaTeX Graphics (DPC,SPQR)
-(keyval.sty
-Package: keyval 1998/06/05 v1.11 key=value parser (DPC)
-\KV@toks@=\toks14
-) (graphics.sty
-Package: graphics 1998/05/27 v1.0h Standard LaTeX Graphics (DPC,SPQR)
-(trig.sty
-Package: trig 1994/10/16 v1.08 sin cos tan (DPC)
-) (graphics.cfg)
-Package graphics Info: Driver file: textures.def on input line 85.
-(textures.def
-File: textures.def 1997/5/28 v0.4 Graphics extensions for Textures 1.7 and later
- (Arthur Ogawa/ogawa@teleport.com)
-))
-\Gin@req@height=\dimen103
-\Gin@req@width=\dimen104
-) (amssymb.sty
-Package: amssymb 1996/11/03 v2.2b
-(amsfonts.sty
-Package: amsfonts 1997/09/17 v2.2e
-\@emptytoks=\toks15
-\symAMSa=\mathgroup5
-\symAMSb=\mathgroup6
-LaTeX Font Info: Overwriting math alphabet `\mathfrak' in version `bold'
-(Font) U/euf/m/n --> U/euf/b/n on input line 133.
-)) (natbib.sty
-Package: natbib 1998/07/14 6.8c (PWD)
-\bibhang=\skip43
-\bibsep=\skip44
-LaTeX Info: Redefining \cite on input line 467.
-\c@NAT@ctr=\count87
-) (verbatim.sty
-Package: verbatim 1997/04/30 v1.5k LaTeX2e package for verbatim enhancements
-\every@verbatim=\toks16
-\verbatim@line=\toks17
-\verbatim@in@stream=\read1
-)
-\@slugcmmntwidth=\dimen105
-\abstract@box=\box26
-\c@editornote=\count88
-\c@cureqno=\count89
-\pt@box=\box27
-\pt@width=\dimen106
-\pt@line=\count90
-\pt@column=\count91
-\pt@nlines=\count92
-\pt@ncol=\count93
-\pt@page=\count94
-\pt@tmpcapwidth=\dimen107
-\c@plate=\count95
-)
-\@indexfile=\write3
-Writing index file aasguide.idx
-(shortvrb.sty
-Package: shortvrb 1998/05/19 v2.0b Standard LaTeX documentation package (FMi)
-)
-Package shortvrb Info: Made | a short reference for \verb on input line 102.
-(aasguide.aux)
-LaTeX Font Info: Checking defaults for OML/cmm/m/it on input line 170.
-LaTeX Font Info: ... okay on input line 170.
-LaTeX Font Info: Checking defaults for T1/cmr/m/n on input line 170.
-LaTeX Font Info: ... okay on input line 170.
-LaTeX Font Info: Checking defaults for OT1/cmr/m/n on input line 170.
-LaTeX Font Info: ... okay on input line 170.
-LaTeX Font Info: Checking defaults for OMS/cmsy/m/n on input line 170.
-LaTeX Font Info: ... okay on input line 170.
-LaTeX Font Info: Checking defaults for OMX/cmex/m/n on input line 170.
-LaTeX Font Info: ... okay on input line 170.
-LaTeX Font Info: Checking defaults for U/cmr/m/n on input line 170.
-LaTeX Font Info: ... okay on input line 170.
-AAS 2-column preprint substyle, v5.0 <25 Sep 98>.
-LaTeX Font Info: Try loading font information for U+lasy on input line 172.
-(ulasy.fd
-File: ulasy.fd 1996/11/20 v2.2dLaTeX symbol font definitions
-)
-LaTeX Font Info: Font shape `U/lasy/b/n' in size <7> not available
-(Font) Font shape `U/lasy/m/n' tried instead on input line 172.
-LaTeX Font Info: Try loading font information for U+msa on input line 172.
-(umsa.fd
-File: umsa.fd 1995/01/05 v2.2e AMS font definitions
-)
-LaTeX Font Info: Try loading font information for U+msb on input line 172.
-(umsb.fd
-File: umsb.fd 1995/01/05 v2.2e AMS font definitions
-) (aasguide.toc
-Underfull \hbox (badness 1675) in paragraph at lines 33--33
- [][] []\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 Abbreviations for Jour-nal
- []
-
-
-Overfull \hbox (0.41202pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 42--42
- [][] []\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 Using the \OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 \twocolumn \OT1/cmr/m/n/10 Co
-m-
- []
-
-[1
-
-
-])
-\tf@toc=\write4
-
-Underfull \hbox (badness 3179) in paragraph at lines 204--209
-[]\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 Information about ac-quir-ing the AAST[]X
- []
-
-
-Underfull \hbox (badness 1796) in paragraph at lines 204--209
-\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 pack-age will be mailed to you elec-tron-i-cally
- []
-
-
-Underfull \hbox (badness 1297) in paragraph at lines 204--209
-\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 if you send an empty e-mail mes-sage (some
- []
-
-
-Overfull \hbox (57.47958pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 229--235
-[][]
- []
-
-
-Overfull \hbox (1.29999pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 237--243
-[]\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 The AAS pro-vides user sup-port for the AAST[]X
- []
-
-
-Overfull \hbox (17.18939pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 237--243
-\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 tron-i-cally by send-ing e-mail to \OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 aastex-help@
-aas.org\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 .[][]
- []
-
-
-Underfull \hbox (badness 3536) in paragraph at lines 255--255
-[]\OT1/cmr/bx/n/10 Command De-scrip-tions for Jour-nal
- []
-
-[2]
-Overfull \hbox (11.4403pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 306--309
-[]\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 The re-main-der of this sec-tion refers to manuscripts
- []
-
-
-Overfull \hbox (34.9874pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 318--318
- [] \OT1/cmtt/m/n/9 \lower 0.5ex\hbox{${}\buildrel\lt\over\sim{}$}%[]
- []
-
-
-Overfull \hbox (6.35497pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 338--361
-[]\OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 \lower[]\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 , []\OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 \rlap[]\OT1/cmr/
-m/n/10 , []\OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 \kern[]\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 , []\OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 \lineski
-p[]\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 , []\OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 \baselineskip[]\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 ,
- []
-
-[3]
-Overfull \hbox (25.97986pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 399--406
-[][]
- []
-
-
-LaTeX Warning: Characters dropped after `\end{verbatim}' on input line 487.
-
-[4]
-Overfull \hbox (18.55078pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 557--563
-\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 It is up to the au-thor to make sure that []\OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 \al
-taffilmark[]
- []
-
-[5]
-Underfull \hbox (badness 1019) in paragraph at lines 644--664
-\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 the proper el-e-ments for as-sist-ing the ed-i-tors.
- []
-
-
-Underfull \hbox (badness 1127) in paragraph at lines 644--664
-\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 en-vi-ron-ment (see Sec-tions 3.15[] and 5[]); in a
- []
-
-[6]
-Overfull \hbox (2.85645pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 824--828
-[]\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 Authors should be aware that in the \OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 manuscrip
-t[]
- []
-
-
-Overfull \hbox (7.1341pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 831--838
-[]\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 This sec-tion de-scribes the use of the \OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 delux
-etable
- []
-
-
-Underfull \hbox (badness 1142) in paragraph at lines 839--847
-[]\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 The \OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 deluxetable[] \OT1/cmr/m/n/10 en-vi-ron-m
-ent is de-lim-ited
- []
-
-
-Overfull \hbox (16.66133pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 882--891
-\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 (11pt), the []\OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 \footnotesize[] \OT1/cmr/m/n/10 (
-10pt) or the []\OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 \scriptsize[]
- []
-
-
-Underfull \hbox (badness 1394) in paragraph at lines 897--909
-[]\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 The width of a delux-etable is de-fined by
- []
-
-
-Underfull \hbox (badness 3612) in paragraph at lines 910--921
-\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 num-ber-ing within the \OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 deluxetable \OT1/cmr/m/n
-/10 en-vi-ron-
- []
-
-[7]
-Overfull \hbox (3.66202pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 949--970
-[]\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 Column head-ings are spec-i-fied with []\OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 \tabl
-ehead[]\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 .
- []
-
-
-Overfull \hbox (1.81458pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 971--982
-\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 pro-duced by []\OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 \tablehead[] \OT1/cmr/m/n/10 or
-other L[]T[]Xcommands
- []
-
-
-Overfull \hbox (64.80882pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 1040--1049
-[][]
- []
-
-[8]
-Underfull \hbox (badness 2165) in paragraph at lines 1158--1160
-[]\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 Tabular in-for-ma-tion is type-set within the
- []
-
-[9]
-Underfull \hbox (badness 1005) in paragraph at lines 1202--1213
-\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 to []\OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 \tablenum[] \OT1/cmr/m/n/10 is used as the
- ta-ble iden-ti-fier.
- []
-
-
-Underfull \hbox (badness 1418) in paragraph at lines 1269--1272
-[]\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 Two op-tions are avail-able for sym-bol-i-cally
- []
-
-
-Underfull \hbox (badness 1072) in paragraph at lines 1269--1272
-\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 dard L[]T[]X method and the []\OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 natbib \OT1/cmr/m
-/n/10 pack-age
- []
-
-
-Underfull \hbox (badness 2753) in paragraph at lines 1336--1348
-[]\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 Clusters of galax-ies dis-play X-ray
- []
-
-[10]
-Underfull \hbox (badness 2376) in paragraph at lines 1428--1436
-\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 mul-ti-ple ci-ta-tion keys, e.g., []\OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 \citep[]{sa
-ra86,
- []
-
-
-Underfull \hbox (badness 1314) in paragraph at lines 1428--1436
-[]\OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 odea97,[]maoz95} \OT1/cmr/m/n/10 will pro-duce ``(Sarazin 198
-6;
- []
-
-
-Overfull \hbox (17.03613pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 1439--1443
-[]\OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 \citet[]*[[]][[]]{[]}
- []
-
-
-Overfull \hbox (17.03613pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 1439--1443
-\OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 \citep[]*[[]][[]]{[]}
- []
-
-
-Underfull \hbox (badness 1565) in paragraph at lines 1467--1480
-\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 mech-a-nism as-so-ciates ci-ta-tions and ref-er-ences
- []
-
-[11]
-Underfull \hbox (badness 1019) in paragraph at lines 1516--1525
-[]\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 The AAST[]X class uses the []\OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 natbib \OT1/cmr/
-m/n/10 pack-
- []
-
-
-Overfull \hbox (30.9122pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 1570--1613
- []
- []
-
-
-Overfull \hbox (1.94704pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 1626--1626
- []\OT1/cmtt/m/n/9 \figcaption[[]]{[]\label{[]}}[]
- []
-
-
-Underfull \hbox (badness 3128) in paragraph at lines 1643--1649
-\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 manuscript is be-ing sub-mit-ted elec-tron-i-cally.
- []
-
-[12] [13]
-Underfull \hbox (badness 1394) in paragraph at lines 1750--1790
-\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 bols avail-able in AAST[]X. If you wish to
- []
-
-
-Underfull \hbox (badness 1728) in paragraph at lines 1750--1790
-\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 use any of these sym-bols, you must ob-tain
- []
-
-
-Underfull \hbox (badness 4144) in paragraph at lines 1750--1790
-\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 avail-able from CTAN: ftp://ctan.tug.org/tex-
- []
-
-[14]
-Underfull \hbox (badness 1314) in paragraph at lines 1890--1904
-\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 tures, OzT[]X, and CMacT[]X for Mac-in-tosh,
- []
-
-
-Underfull \hbox (badness 1742) in paragraph at lines 1890--1904
-\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 Win-dows, and, on UNIX com-put-ers, \OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 dvips\OT1/c
-mr/m/n/10 .
- []
-
-
-Overfull \hbox (22.93831pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 1890--1904
-\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 T[]XLive CD, see []\OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 http://www.tug.org/texlive.h
-tml\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 .
- []
-
-
-Overfull \hbox (8.66833pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 1916--1916
- [] \OT1/cmtt/m/n/9 {[]}{[]}{[]}{[]}{[]}[]
- []
-
-[15]
-Overfull \hbox (11.05083pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 1942--1948
-[]\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 For the ad-ven-ture-some, there is also []\OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 \pl
-otfiddle[]\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 ,
- []
-
-
-Underfull \hbox (badness 1142) in paragraph at lines 2006--2014
-[]\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 A []\OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 flushrt.sty \OT1/cmr/m/n/10 file op-tion
-is avail-able for
- []
-
-
-Underfull \hbox (badness 1609) in paragraph at lines 2045--2047
-[]\OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 \singlespace[] \OT1/cmr/m/n/10 sets the ver-ti-cal spac-ing t
-o a
- []
-
-[16]
-Underfull \hbox (badness 1838) in paragraph at lines 2095--2099
-[]\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 The pre-ced-ing de-tailed ex-pla-na-tion of the
- []
-
-
-Overfull \hbox (0.93925pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 2105--2114
-[]\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 A more com-pre-hen-sive ex-am-ple re-quir-ing nearly
- []
-
-
-Underfull \hbox (badness 1325) in paragraph at lines 2105--2114
-\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 has three ta-bles: two marked up us-ing the
- []
-
-
-Underfull \hbox (badness 1014) in paragraph at lines 2115--2120
-\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 ta-bles are con-tained in the files []\OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 table1.te
-x\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 ,
- []
-
-
-Underfull \hbox (badness 1490) in paragraph at lines 2115--2120
-[]\OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 table2.tex\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 , []\OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 table3.tex\OT1
-/cmr/m/n/10 , and []\OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 complext.tex\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 .
- []
-
-[17]
-Underfull \hbox (badness 1558) in paragraph at lines 2171--2173
-\OT1/cmr/m/it/10 Com-mand Sum-mary \OT1/cmr/m/n/10 (Prov-i-dence, RI: T[]X
- []
-
-LaTeX Font Info: Try loading font information for OMS+cmr on input line 2215.
-
-(omscmr.fd
-File: omscmr.fd 1998/03/27 v2.5g Standard LaTeX font definitions
-)
-LaTeX Font Info: Font shape `OMS/cmr/m/n' in size <10> not available
-(Font) Font shape `OMS/cmsy/m/n' tried instead on input line 2215.
-
-Underfull \hbox (badness 1087) in paragraph at lines 2219--2224
-\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 takes care of hy-phen-ation au-to-mat-i-cally.
- []
-
-! Extra }, or forgotten \endgroup.
-l.2242 ...\verb`\}`---end group}
- .
-?
-
-Underfull \hbox (badness 1394) in paragraph at lines 2259--2268
-\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 the equa-tion be-tween []\OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 \[[] \OT1/cmr/m/n/10 a
-nd []\OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 \][] \OT1/cmr/m/n/10 com-mands,
- []
-
-[18]
-Underfull \hbox (badness 1990) in paragraph at lines 2301--2312
-[]\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 The \OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 deluxetable[] \OT1/cmr/m/n/10 en-vi-ron-m
-ent is in-tended
- []
-
-
-Overfull \hbox (27.21739pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 2313--2317
-[]\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 Notes in ta-bles should be marked by []\OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 \table
-notemark[]\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 ;
- []
-
-
-Overfull \hbox (19.93968pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 2313--2317
-\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 cor-re-spond-ing text should ap-pear in a []\OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 \ta
-blenotetext[]
- []
-
-
-Overfull \hbox (20.81256pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 2334--2334
- []\OT1/cmtt/m/n/9 \tablecaption{This is a caption.\label{tab1}}[]
- []
-
-
-Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 2361--2369
-\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 type-set-ting []\OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 CTAN://[]macros/[]latex/[]packa
-ges/
- []
-
-
-Overfull \hbox (2.5793pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 2388--2393
-\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 manuscripts that will be sub-mit-ted electronically---
- []
-
-[19]
-LaTeX Font Info: Try loading font information for OML+cmr on input line 2410.
-
-(omlcmr.fd
-File: omlcmr.fd 1998/03/27 v2.5g Standard LaTeX font definitions
-)
-LaTeX Font Info: Font shape `OML/cmr/m/n' in size <10> not available
-(Font) Font shape `OML/cmm/m/it' tried instead on input line 2410.
-
-Overfull \hbox (15.18954pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 2409--2416
- []
- []
-
-! Missing { inserted.
-<inserted text>
- {
-l.2441 ...erb`\}`---end group} &
- &
-?
-
-Overfull \hbox (85.96729pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 2432--2444
- []
- []
-
-
-Overfull \hbox (5.38377pt too wide) detected at line 2629
-[]
- []
-
-
-Overfull \hbox (54.88292pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 2672--2737
- []
- []
-
-
-Underfull \hbox (badness 1210) in paragraph at lines 2794--2798
-\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 mented in Sec-tion E.3[]), ex-cept that you do
- []
-
-[20]
-Overfull \hbox (3.27318pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 2808--2809
-\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 style op-tion, if used, with the []\OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 preprint2
- []
-
-[21] [22]
-Underfull \hbox (badness 2680) in paragraph at lines 2826--2828
-[]\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 Replace any []\OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 \lefthead[] \OT1/cmr/m/n/10 com
--mand with
- []
-
-
-Overfull \hbox (7.85611pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 2835--2836
-[][]\OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 \markcite[]{[]}\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 (Headroom
- []
-
-
-Overfull \hbox (2.7778pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 2843--2844
-[][]\OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 \reference[]{[]}\OT1/cmr/m/it/10 reference
- []
-
-
-Overfull \hbox (51.45876pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 2847--2848
-[][]\OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 \bibitem[][[]]{[]}\OT1/cmr/m/it/10 reference
- []
-
-
-Underfull \hbox (badness 1783) in paragraph at lines 2865--2868
-\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 means that V5.0 can-not be run un-der
- []
-
-
-Underfull \hbox (badness 2351) in paragraph at lines 2909--2912
-\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 land-scape ori-en-ta-tion by us-ing the
- []
-
-
-Underfull \hbox (badness 5563) in paragraph at lines 2913--2918
-[]\OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 \\[]\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 , the com-mands []\OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 \table
-vspace[]\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 ,
- []
-
-[23]
-Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 2924--2926
-[]\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 Hypertext-oriented com-mands []\OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 \anchor[]\OT1/
-cmr/m/n/10 ,
- []
-
-
-Underfull \hbox (badness 3482) in paragraph at lines 2929--2931
-[]\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 The data com-mands []\OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 \shorttitle[] \OT1/cmr/m
-/n/10 and
- []
-
-
-Underfull \hbox (badness 6032) in paragraph at lines 2929--2931
-[]\OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 \shortauthors[] \OT1/cmr/m/n/10 re-place []\OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 \
-lefthead[] \OT1/cmr/m/n/10 and
- []
-
-
-Underfull \hbox (badness 3849) in paragraph at lines 2939--2944
-\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 com-mands []\OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 \tablevspace[]\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 , []\
-OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 \tablebreak[]\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 ,
- []
-
-
-Underfull \hbox (badness 3482) in paragraph at lines 2945--2948
-[]\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 The data com-mands []\OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 \shorttitle[] \OT1/cmr/m
-/n/10 and
- []
-
-
-Underfull \hbox (badness 6032) in paragraph at lines 2945--2948
-[]\OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 \shortauthors[] \OT1/cmr/m/n/10 re-place []\OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 \
-lefthead[] \OT1/cmr/m/n/10 and
- []
-
-
-Underfull \hbox (badness 1142) in paragraph at lines 2962--2964
-[]\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 The com-mand []\OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 \markcite[] \OT1/cmr/m/n/10 is
- dep-re-cated.
- []
-
-
-Underfull \hbox (badness 1142) in paragraph at lines 2966--2968
-[]\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 The com-mand []\OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 \SGMLcite[] \OT1/cmr/m/n/10 is
- dep-re-cated.
- []
-
-
-Underfull \hbox (badness 1275) in paragraph at lines 2975--2976
-[]\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 Replace your []\OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 \documentstyle[] \OT1/cmr/m/n/
-10 state-ment
- []
-
-
-Overfull \hbox (3.27318pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 2984--2986
-\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 style op-tion, if used, with the []\OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 preprint2
- []
-
-
-Underfull \hbox (badness 2680) in paragraph at lines 3004--3006
-[]\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 Replace any []\OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 \lefthead[] \OT1/cmr/m/n/10 com
--mand with
- []
-
-[24]
-Overfull \hbox (7.85611pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 3027--3028
-[][]\OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 \markcite[]{[]}\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 (Headroom
- []
-
-
-Overfull \hbox (2.7778pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 3035--3036
-[][]\OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 \reference[]{[]}\OT1/cmr/m/it/10 reference
- []
-
-
-Overfull \hbox (51.45876pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 3039--3040
-[][]\OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 \bibitem[][[]]{[]}\OT1/cmr/m/it/10 reference
- []
-
-(aasguide.ind [25]
-! Undefined control sequence.
-l.95 ...X\ Archive Network, \see
- CTAN{2}
-?
- [26
-
-] [27] [28] [29] [30]) (aasguide.aux)
-
- *File List*
- aastex.cls 1999/01/22 5.0rc2 AAS markup document class
- article.cls 1998/05/05 v1.3y Standard LaTeX document class
- size10.clo 1998/05/05 v1.3y Standard LaTeX file (size option)
-latexsym.sty 1996/11/20 v2.2d Standard LaTeX package (lasy symbols)
-graphicx.sty 1997/06/09 v1.0d Enhanced LaTeX Graphics (DPC,SPQR)
- keyval.sty 1998/06/05 v1.11 key=value parser (DPC)
-graphics.sty 1998/05/27 v1.0h Standard LaTeX Graphics (DPC,SPQR)
- trig.sty 1994/10/16 v1.08 sin cos tan (DPC)
-graphics.cfg
-textures.def 1997/5/28 v0.4 Graphics extensions for Textures 1.7 and later (A
-rthur Ogawa/ogawa@teleport.com)
- amssymb.sty 1996/11/03 v2.2b
-amsfonts.sty 1997/09/17 v2.2e
- natbib.sty 1998/07/14 6.8c (PWD)
-verbatim.sty 1997/04/30 v1.5k LaTeX2e package for verbatim enhancements
-shortvrb.sty 1998/05/19 v2.0b Standard LaTeX documentation package (FMi)
- ulasy.fd 1996/11/20 v2.2dLaTeX symbol font definitions
- umsa.fd 1995/01/05 v2.2e AMS font definitions
- umsb.fd 1995/01/05 v2.2e AMS font definitions
- omscmr.fd 1998/03/27 v2.5g Standard LaTeX font definitions
- omlcmr.fd 1998/03/27 v2.5g Standard LaTeX font definitions
-aasguide.ind
- ***********
-
- )
-Here is how much of TeX's memory you used:
- 1876 strings out of 3926
- 18884 string characters out of 65536
- 95730 words of memory out of 200704
- 4653 multiletter control sequences out of 10000
- 15 hyphenation exceptions out of 3001
- 33i,15n,26p,322b,419s stack positions out of 200i,100n,120p,5000b,4000s
-
-Output written on aasguide (30 pages, 146198 bytes).
-elapsed seconds = 62.18
-
-Textures 2.0.2 (preloaded format=LaTeX R9P0 98.10.16) 20 JAN 1999 23:13
-(sample1
-LaTeX2e <1998/06/01>
-(sample.tex
-File: sample.tex 1999/01/22 5.0rc2 AAS markup document class
-(aastex.cls
-Document Class: aastex 1999/01/22 5.0rc2 AAS markup document class
-Class aastex Info: Original \LaTeX2.09 style by Chris Biemesderfer (chris@ferber
-ts.com). Adapted to \LaTeXe by A. Ogawa (ogawa@teleport.com) on input line 68.
-(article.cls
-Document Class: article 1998/05/05 v1.3y Standard LaTeX document class
-(size12.clo
-File: size12.clo 1998/05/05 v1.3y Standard LaTeX file (size option)
-)
-\c@part=\count79
-\c@section=\count80
-\c@subsection=\count81
-\c@subsubsection=\count82
-\c@paragraph=\count83
-\c@subparagraph=\count84
-\c@figure=\count85
-\c@table=\count86
-\abovecaptionskip=\skip41
-\belowcaptionskip=\skip42
-\bibindent=\dimen102
-) (latexsym.sty
-Package: latexsym 1996/11/20 v2.2d Standard LaTeX package (lasy symbols)
-\symlasy=\mathgroup4
-LaTeX Font Info: Overwriting symbol font `lasy' in version `bold'
-(Font) U/lasy/m/n --> U/lasy/b/n on input line 85.
-) (graphicx.sty
-Package: graphicx 1997/06/09 v1.0d Enhanced LaTeX Graphics (DPC,SPQR)
-(keyval.sty
-Package: keyval 1998/06/05 v1.11 key=value parser (DPC)
-\KV@toks@=\toks14
-) (graphics.sty
-Package: graphics 1998/05/27 v1.0h Standard LaTeX Graphics (DPC,SPQR)
-(trig.sty
-Package: trig 1994/10/16 v1.08 sin cos tan (DPC)
-) (graphics.cfg)
-Package graphics Info: Driver file: textures.def on input line 85.
-(textures.def
-File: textures.def 1997/5/28 v0.4 Graphics extensions for Textures 1.7 and later
- (Arthur Ogawa/ogawa@teleport.com)
-))
-\Gin@req@height=\dimen103
-\Gin@req@width=\dimen104
-) (amsmath.sty
-Package: amsmath 1997/03/20 v1.2d AMS math features
-\@mathmargin=\skip43
-(amstext.sty
-Package: amstext 1996/10/28 v1.2b
-(amsgen.sty
-File: amsgen 1996/10/29 v1.2b
-\@emptytoks=\toks15
-\ex@=\dimen105
-)) (amsbsy.sty
-Package: amsbsy 1996/10/28 v1.2b
-\pmbraise@=\dimen106
-) (amsopn.sty
-Package: amsopn 1996/10/28 v1.2b operator names
-)
-LaTeX Info: Redefining \frac on input line 188.
-\uproot@=\count87
-\leftroot@=\count88
-\classnum@=\count89
-\DOTSCASE@=\count90
-LaTeX Info: Redefining \dots on input line 335.
-LaTeX Info: Redefining \ldots on input line 418.
-LaTeX Info: Redefining \cdots on input line 422.
-\Mathstrutbox@=\box26
-\strutbox@=\box27
-\big@size=\dimen107
-LaTeX Font Info: Redeclaring font encoding OML on input line 500.
-LaTeX Font Info: Redeclaring font encoding OMS on input line 501.
-\skewcharcount@=\count91
-\familycount@=\count92
-\pointcount@=\count93
-\accentdimen@=\dimen108
-\accentmu@=\count94
-\minaw@=\dimen109
-\c@MaxMatrixCols=\count95
-\dotsspace@=\muskip10
-\c@parentequation=\count96
-\dspbrk@lvl=\count97
-\tag@help=\toks16
-\row@=\count98
-\column@=\count99
-\maxfields@=\count100
-\andhelp@=\toks17
-\eqnshift@=\dimen110
-\alignsep@=\dimen111
-\tagshift@=\dimen112
-\tagwidth@=\dimen113
-\totwidth@=\dimen114
-\lineht@=\dimen115
-\@envbody=\toks18
-\multlinegap=\skip44
-\multlinetaggap=\skip45
-) (natbib.sty
-Package: natbib 1998/07/14 6.8c (PWD)
-\bibhang=\skip46
-\bibsep=\skip47
-LaTeX Info: Redefining \cite on input line 467.
-\c@NAT@ctr=\count101
-) (verbatim.sty
-Package: verbatim 1997/04/30 v1.5k LaTeX2e package for verbatim enhancements
-\every@verbatim=\toks19
-\verbatim@line=\toks20
-\verbatim@in@stream=\read1
-)
-\@slugcmmntwidth=\dimen116
-\abstract@box=\box28
-\c@editornote=\count102
-\c@cureqno=\count103
-\pt@box=\box29
-\pt@width=\dimen117
-\pt@line=\count104
-\pt@column=\count105
-\pt@nlines=\count106
-\pt@ncol=\count107
-\pt@page=\count108
-\pt@tmpcapwidth=\dimen118
-\c@plate=\count109
-) (sample1.aux)
-LaTeX Font Info: Checking defaults for OML/cmm/m/it on input line 65.
-LaTeX Font Info: ... okay on input line 65.
-LaTeX Font Info: Checking defaults for T1/cmr/m/n on input line 65.
-LaTeX Font Info: ... okay on input line 65.
-LaTeX Font Info: Checking defaults for OT1/cmr/m/n on input line 65.
-LaTeX Font Info: ... okay on input line 65.
-LaTeX Font Info: Checking defaults for OMS/cmsy/m/n on input line 65.
-LaTeX Font Info: ... okay on input line 65.
-LaTeX Font Info: Checking defaults for OMX/cmex/m/n on input line 65.
-LaTeX Font Info: ... okay on input line 65.
-LaTeX Font Info: Checking defaults for U/cmr/m/n on input line 65.
-LaTeX Font Info: ... okay on input line 65.
-AAS manuscript substyle, v5.0 <25 Sep 98>.
-
-Class aastex Warning: Command \authoremail is deprecated in aastex V 5.0. Using
-\email instead (please fix your document). on input line 70.
-
-[1
-
-]
-LaTeX Font Info: Try loading font information for U+lasy on input line 97.
-(ulasy.fd
-File: ulasy.fd 1996/11/20 v2.2dLaTeX symbol font definitions
-) [2
-
-] [3] [4
-
-] (sample1.aux)
-
- *File List*
- aastex.cls 1999/01/22 5.0rc2 AAS markup document class
- article.cls 1998/05/05 v1.3y Standard LaTeX document class
- size12.clo 1998/05/05 v1.3y Standard LaTeX file (size option)
-latexsym.sty 1996/11/20 v2.2d Standard LaTeX package (lasy symbols)
-graphicx.sty 1997/06/09 v1.0d Enhanced LaTeX Graphics (DPC,SPQR)
- keyval.sty 1998/06/05 v1.11 key=value parser (DPC)
-graphics.sty 1998/05/27 v1.0h Standard LaTeX Graphics (DPC,SPQR)
- trig.sty 1994/10/16 v1.08 sin cos tan (DPC)
-graphics.cfg
-textures.def 1997/5/28 v0.4 Graphics extensions for Textures 1.7 and later (A
-rthur Ogawa/ogawa@teleport.com)
- amsmath.sty 1997/03/20 v1.2d AMS math features
- amstext.sty 1996/10/28 v1.2b
- amsgen.sty
- amsbsy.sty 1996/10/28 v1.2b
- amsopn.sty 1996/10/28 v1.2b operator names
- natbib.sty 1998/07/14 6.8c (PWD)
-verbatim.sty 1997/04/30 v1.5k LaTeX2e package for verbatim enhancements
- ulasy.fd 1996/11/20 v2.2dLaTeX symbol font definitions
- ***********
-
- )
-Here is how much of TeX's memory you used:
- 1909 strings out of 3926
- 19413 string characters out of 65536
- 72809 words of memory out of 169984
- 4744 multiletter control sequences out of 10000
- 14 hyphenation exceptions out of 3001
- 35i,8n,23p,263b,265s stack positions out of 200i,100n,120p,5000b,4000s
-
-Output written on sample1 (4 pages, 3183 bytes).
-elapsed seconds = 13.10
-
-Textures 2.0.2 (preloaded format=LaTeX R9P0 98.10.16) 20 JAN 1999 23:15
-(sample2
-LaTeX2e <1998/06/01>
-(sample2.tex
-File: sample2.tex 1999/01/22 5.0rc2 AAS markup document class
-(aastex.cls
-Document Class: aastex 1999/01/22 5.0rc2 AAS markup document class
-Class aastex Info: Original \LaTeX2.09 style by Chris Biemesderfer (chris@ferber
-ts.com). Adapted to \LaTeXe by A. Ogawa (ogawa@teleport.com) on input line 68.
-(article.cls
-Document Class: article 1998/05/05 v1.3y Standard LaTeX document class
-(size12.clo
-File: size12.clo 1998/05/05 v1.3y Standard LaTeX file (size option)
-)
-\c@part=\count79
-\c@section=\count80
-\c@subsection=\count81
-\c@subsubsection=\count82
-\c@paragraph=\count83
-\c@subparagraph=\count84
-\c@figure=\count85
-\c@table=\count86
-\abovecaptionskip=\skip41
-\belowcaptionskip=\skip42
-\bibindent=\dimen102
-) (latexsym.sty
-Package: latexsym 1996/11/20 v2.2d Standard LaTeX package (lasy symbols)
-\symlasy=\mathgroup4
-LaTeX Font Info: Overwriting symbol font `lasy' in version `bold'
-(Font) U/lasy/m/n --> U/lasy/b/n on input line 85.
-) (graphicx.sty
-Package: graphicx 1997/06/09 v1.0d Enhanced LaTeX Graphics (DPC,SPQR)
-(keyval.sty
-Package: keyval 1998/06/05 v1.11 key=value parser (DPC)
-\KV@toks@=\toks14
-) (graphics.sty
-Package: graphics 1998/05/27 v1.0h Standard LaTeX Graphics (DPC,SPQR)
-(trig.sty
-Package: trig 1994/10/16 v1.08 sin cos tan (DPC)
-) (graphics.cfg)
-Package graphics Info: Driver file: textures.def on input line 85.
-(textures.def
-File: textures.def 1997/5/28 v0.4 Graphics extensions for Textures 1.7 and later
- (Arthur Ogawa/ogawa@teleport.com)
-))
-\Gin@req@height=\dimen103
-\Gin@req@width=\dimen104
-) (amsmath.sty
-Package: amsmath 1997/03/20 v1.2d AMS math features
-\@mathmargin=\skip43
-(amstext.sty
-Package: amstext 1996/10/28 v1.2b
-(amsgen.sty
-File: amsgen 1996/10/29 v1.2b
-\@emptytoks=\toks15
-\ex@=\dimen105
-)) (amsbsy.sty
-Package: amsbsy 1996/10/28 v1.2b
-\pmbraise@=\dimen106
-) (amsopn.sty
-Package: amsopn 1996/10/28 v1.2b operator names
-)
-LaTeX Info: Redefining \frac on input line 188.
-\uproot@=\count87
-\leftroot@=\count88
-\classnum@=\count89
-\DOTSCASE@=\count90
-LaTeX Info: Redefining \dots on input line 335.
-LaTeX Info: Redefining \ldots on input line 418.
-LaTeX Info: Redefining \cdots on input line 422.
-\Mathstrutbox@=\box26
-\strutbox@=\box27
-\big@size=\dimen107
-LaTeX Font Info: Redeclaring font encoding OML on input line 500.
-LaTeX Font Info: Redeclaring font encoding OMS on input line 501.
-\skewcharcount@=\count91
-\familycount@=\count92
-\pointcount@=\count93
-\accentdimen@=\dimen108
-\accentmu@=\count94
-\minaw@=\dimen109
-\c@MaxMatrixCols=\count95
-\dotsspace@=\muskip10
-\c@parentequation=\count96
-\dspbrk@lvl=\count97
-\tag@help=\toks16
-\row@=\count98
-\column@=\count99
-\maxfields@=\count100
-\andhelp@=\toks17
-\eqnshift@=\dimen110
-\alignsep@=\dimen111
-\tagshift@=\dimen112
-\tagwidth@=\dimen113
-\totwidth@=\dimen114
-\lineht@=\dimen115
-\@envbody=\toks18
-\multlinegap=\skip44
-\multlinetaggap=\skip45
-) (natbib.sty
-Package: natbib 1998/07/14 6.8c (PWD)
-\bibhang=\skip46
-\bibsep=\skip47
-LaTeX Info: Redefining \cite on input line 467.
-\c@NAT@ctr=\count101
-) (verbatim.sty
-Package: verbatim 1997/04/30 v1.5k LaTeX2e package for verbatim enhancements
-\every@verbatim=\toks19
-\verbatim@line=\toks20
-\verbatim@in@stream=\read1
-)
-\@slugcmmntwidth=\dimen116
-\abstract@box=\box28
-\c@editornote=\count102
-\c@cureqno=\count103
-\pt@box=\box29
-\pt@width=\dimen117
-\pt@line=\count104
-\pt@column=\count105
-\pt@nlines=\count106
-\pt@ncol=\count107
-\pt@page=\count108
-\pt@tmpcapwidth=\dimen118
-\c@plate=\count109
-) (sample2.aux)
-LaTeX Font Info: Checking defaults for OML/cmm/m/it on input line 145.
-LaTeX Font Info: ... okay on input line 145.
-LaTeX Font Info: Checking defaults for T1/cmr/m/n on input line 145.
-LaTeX Font Info: ... okay on input line 145.
-LaTeX Font Info: Checking defaults for OT1/cmr/m/n on input line 145.
-LaTeX Font Info: ... okay on input line 145.
-LaTeX Font Info: Checking defaults for OMS/cmsy/m/n on input line 145.
-LaTeX Font Info: ... okay on input line 145.
-LaTeX Font Info: Checking defaults for OMX/cmex/m/n on input line 145.
-LaTeX Font Info: ... okay on input line 145.
-LaTeX Font Info: Checking defaults for U/cmr/m/n on input line 145.
-LaTeX Font Info: ... okay on input line 145.
-AAS manuscript substyle, v5.0 <25 Sep 98>.
-LaTeX Font Info: Try loading font information for U+lasy on input line 150.
-(ulasy.fd
-File: ulasy.fd 1996/11/20 v2.2dLaTeX symbol font definitions
-) [1
-
-] [2
-
-] [3] [4] [5] [6]
-Overfull \hbox (29.01564pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 436--445
- [][]
- []
-
-
-Overfull \hbox (29.01564pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 457--457
- []$[]$
- []
-
-
-Overfull \hbox (29.01564pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 457--457
- []$[]$
- []
-
-
-Overfull \hbox (29.01564pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 457--457
- []$[]$
- []
-
-
-Overfull \hbox (29.01564pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 457--457
- []$[]$
- []
-
-
-Overfull \hbox (29.01564pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 457--457
- []$[]$
- []
-
-Table 1 has been set to width 498.77063pt
-[7]
-Page 1 of table 2 has been set to width 424.88113pt with 23 lines per page
-[8] [9]
-Page 2 of table 2 has been set to width 438.58932pt with 23 lines per page
-[10]
-Page 3 of table 2 has been set to width 427.9186pt with 23 lines per page
-[11]
-Page 4 of table 2 has been set to width 426.20332pt with 23 lines per page
-[12]
-Page 5 of table 2 has been set to width 421.53383pt with 23 lines per page
-[13]
-Table 2 has been set to width 438.2089pt
-[14] [15
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-] [16
-
-] (sample2.aux)
-
- *File List*
- aastex.cls 1999/01/22 5.0rc2 AAS markup document class
- article.cls 1998/05/05 v1.3y Standard LaTeX document class
- size12.clo 1998/05/05 v1.3y Standard LaTeX file (size option)
-latexsym.sty 1996/11/20 v2.2d Standard LaTeX package (lasy symbols)
-graphicx.sty 1997/06/09 v1.0d Enhanced LaTeX Graphics (DPC,SPQR)
- keyval.sty 1998/06/05 v1.11 key=value parser (DPC)
-graphics.sty 1998/05/27 v1.0h Standard LaTeX Graphics (DPC,SPQR)
- trig.sty 1994/10/16 v1.08 sin cos tan (DPC)
-graphics.cfg
-textures.def 1997/5/28 v0.4 Graphics extensions for Textures 1.7 and later (A
-rthur Ogawa/ogawa@teleport.com)
- amsmath.sty 1997/03/20 v1.2d AMS math features
- amstext.sty 1996/10/28 v1.2b
- amsgen.sty
- amsbsy.sty 1996/10/28 v1.2b
- amsopn.sty 1996/10/28 v1.2b operator names
- natbib.sty 1998/07/14 6.8c (PWD)
-verbatim.sty 1997/04/30 v1.5k LaTeX2e package for verbatim enhancements
- ulasy.fd 1996/11/20 v2.2dLaTeX symbol font definitions
- ***********
-
- )
-Here is how much of TeX's memory you used:
- 1937 strings out of 3926
- 19626 string characters out of 65536
- 84103 words of memory out of 169984
- 4769 multiletter control sequences out of 10000
- 14 hyphenation exceptions out of 3001
- 35i,18n,24p,422b,491s stack positions out of 200i,100n,120p,5000b,4000s
-
-Output written on sample2 (16 pages, 30435 bytes).
-elapsed seconds = 17.47
-
-Textures 2.0.2 (preloaded format=LaTeX R9P0 98.10.16) 20 JAN 1999 23:17
-(samptbls
-LaTeX2e <1998/06/01>
-(samptbls.tex
-File: samptbls.tex 1999/01/22 5.0rc2 AAS markup document class
-(aastex.cls
-Document Class: aastex 1999/01/22 5.0rc2 AAS markup document class
-Class aastex Info: Original \LaTeX2.09 style by Chris Biemesderfer (chris@ferber
-ts.com). Adapted to \LaTeXe by A. Ogawa (ogawa@teleport.com) on input line 68.
-(article.cls
-Document Class: article 1998/05/05 v1.3y Standard LaTeX document class
-(size12.clo
-File: size12.clo 1998/05/05 v1.3y Standard LaTeX file (size option)
-)
-\c@part=\count79
-\c@section=\count80
-\c@subsection=\count81
-\c@subsubsection=\count82
-\c@paragraph=\count83
-\c@subparagraph=\count84
-\c@figure=\count85
-\c@table=\count86
-\abovecaptionskip=\skip41
-\belowcaptionskip=\skip42
-\bibindent=\dimen102
-) (latexsym.sty
-Package: latexsym 1996/11/20 v2.2d Standard LaTeX package (lasy symbols)
-\symlasy=\mathgroup4
-LaTeX Font Info: Overwriting symbol font `lasy' in version `bold'
-(Font) U/lasy/m/n --> U/lasy/b/n on input line 85.
-) (graphicx.sty
-Package: graphicx 1997/06/09 v1.0d Enhanced LaTeX Graphics (DPC,SPQR)
-(keyval.sty
-Package: keyval 1998/06/05 v1.11 key=value parser (DPC)
-\KV@toks@=\toks14
-) (graphics.sty
-Package: graphics 1998/05/27 v1.0h Standard LaTeX Graphics (DPC,SPQR)
-(trig.sty
-Package: trig 1994/10/16 v1.08 sin cos tan (DPC)
-) (graphics.cfg)
-Package graphics Info: Driver file: textures.def on input line 85.
-(textures.def
-File: textures.def 1997/5/28 v0.4 Graphics extensions for Textures 1.7 and later
- (Arthur Ogawa/ogawa@teleport.com)
-))
-\Gin@req@height=\dimen103
-\Gin@req@width=\dimen104
-) (amsmath.sty
-Package: amsmath 1997/03/20 v1.2d AMS math features
-\@mathmargin=\skip43
-(amstext.sty
-Package: amstext 1996/10/28 v1.2b
-(amsgen.sty
-File: amsgen 1996/10/29 v1.2b
-\@emptytoks=\toks15
-\ex@=\dimen105
-)) (amsbsy.sty
-Package: amsbsy 1996/10/28 v1.2b
-\pmbraise@=\dimen106
-) (amsopn.sty
-Package: amsopn 1996/10/28 v1.2b operator names
-)
-LaTeX Info: Redefining \frac on input line 188.
-\uproot@=\count87
-\leftroot@=\count88
-\classnum@=\count89
-\DOTSCASE@=\count90
-LaTeX Info: Redefining \dots on input line 335.
-LaTeX Info: Redefining \ldots on input line 418.
-LaTeX Info: Redefining \cdots on input line 422.
-\Mathstrutbox@=\box26
-\strutbox@=\box27
-\big@size=\dimen107
-LaTeX Font Info: Redeclaring font encoding OML on input line 500.
-LaTeX Font Info: Redeclaring font encoding OMS on input line 501.
-\skewcharcount@=\count91
-\familycount@=\count92
-\pointcount@=\count93
-\accentdimen@=\dimen108
-\accentmu@=\count94
-\minaw@=\dimen109
-\c@MaxMatrixCols=\count95
-\dotsspace@=\muskip10
-\c@parentequation=\count96
-\dspbrk@lvl=\count97
-\tag@help=\toks16
-\row@=\count98
-\column@=\count99
-\maxfields@=\count100
-\andhelp@=\toks17
-\eqnshift@=\dimen110
-\alignsep@=\dimen111
-\tagshift@=\dimen112
-\tagwidth@=\dimen113
-\totwidth@=\dimen114
-\lineht@=\dimen115
-\@envbody=\toks18
-\multlinegap=\skip44
-\multlinetaggap=\skip45
-) (natbib.sty
-Package: natbib 1998/07/14 6.8c (PWD)
-\bibhang=\skip46
-\bibsep=\skip47
-LaTeX Info: Redefining \cite on input line 467.
-\c@NAT@ctr=\count101
-) (verbatim.sty
-Package: verbatim 1997/04/30 v1.5k LaTeX2e package for verbatim enhancements
-\every@verbatim=\toks19
-\verbatim@line=\toks20
-\verbatim@in@stream=\read1
-)
-\@slugcmmntwidth=\dimen116
-\abstract@box=\box28
-\c@editornote=\count102
-\c@cureqno=\count103
-\pt@box=\box29
-\pt@width=\dimen117
-\pt@line=\count104
-\pt@column=\count105
-\pt@nlines=\count106
-\pt@ncol=\count107
-\pt@page=\count108
-\pt@tmpcapwidth=\dimen118
-\c@plate=\count109
-) (samptbls.aux (table1.aux) (table2.aux) (table3.aux) (complext.aux))
-LaTeX Font Info: Checking defaults for OML/cmm/m/it on input line 70.
-LaTeX Font Info: ... okay on input line 70.
-LaTeX Font Info: Checking defaults for T1/cmr/m/n on input line 70.
-LaTeX Font Info: ... okay on input line 70.
-LaTeX Font Info: Checking defaults for OT1/cmr/m/n on input line 70.
-LaTeX Font Info: ... okay on input line 70.
-LaTeX Font Info: Checking defaults for OMS/cmsy/m/n on input line 70.
-LaTeX Font Info: ... okay on input line 70.
-LaTeX Font Info: Checking defaults for OMX/cmex/m/n on input line 70.
-LaTeX Font Info: ... okay on input line 70.
-LaTeX Font Info: Checking defaults for U/cmr/m/n on input line 70.
-LaTeX Font Info: ... okay on input line 70.
-AAS manuscript substyle, v5.0 <25 Sep 98>.
-(table1.tex
-File: table1.tex 1999/01/22 5.0rc2 AAS markup document class
-LaTeX Font Info: Try loading font information for U+lasy on input line 73.
-(ulasy.fd
-File: ulasy.fd 1996/11/20 v2.2dLaTeX symbol font definitions
-)
-Overfull \hbox (28.88113pt too wide) in alignment at lines 73--94
-[][][][][][][][][][][]
- []
-
-Page 1 of table 1 has been set to width 396.0pt with 23 lines per page
-[1]
-Overfull \hbox (42.58932pt too wide) in alignment at lines 94--114
-[][][][][][][][][][][]
- []
-
-Page 2 of table 1 has been set to width 396.0pt with 23 lines per page
-[2]
-
-Class aastex Warning: Command \tablebreak is deprecated in aastex V 5.0. Using \
-\ instead (please fix your document). on input line 133.
-
-
-Overfull \hbox (28.54768pt too wide) in alignment at lines 114--134
-[][][][][][][][][][][]
- []
-
-Page 3 of table 1 has been set to width 396.0pt with 23 lines per page
-[3]
-Overfull \hbox (22.67274pt too wide) in alignment at lines 134--154
-[][][][][][][][][][][]
- []
-
-Page 4 of table 1 has been set to width 396.0pt with 23 lines per page
-[4]
-Overfull \hbox (32.13792pt too wide) in alignment at lines 154--174
-[][][][][][][][][][][]
- []
-
-Page 5 of table 1 has been set to width 396.0pt with 23 lines per page
-[5]
-Overfull \hbox (22.67274pt too wide) in alignment at lines 174--194
-[][][][][][][][][][][]
- []
-
-Page 6 of table 1 has been set to width 396.0pt with 23 lines per page
-[6]
-Overfull \hbox (22.67274pt too wide) in alignment at lines 194--214
-[][][][][][][][][][][]
- []
-
-Page 7 of table 1 has been set to width 396.0pt with 23 lines per page
-[7]
-Overfull \hbox (47.96555pt too wide) in alignment at lines 214--234
-[][][][][][][][][][][]
- []
-
-Page 8 of table 1 has been set to width 396.0pt with 23 lines per page
-[8]
-Overfull \hbox (26.39375pt too wide) in alignment at lines 234--254
-[][][][][][][][][][][]
- []
-
-Page 9 of table 1 has been set to width 396.0pt with 23 lines per page
-[9]
-
-Class aastex Warning: Command \tablebreak is deprecated in aastex V 5.0. Using \
-\ instead (please fix your document). on input line 255.
-
-
-Overfull \hbox (30.20332pt too wide) in alignment at lines 254--274
-[][][][][][][][][][][]
- []
-
-Page 10 of table 1 has been set to width 396.0pt with 23 lines per page
-[10]
-Overfull \hbox (35.85893pt too wide) in alignment at lines 274--294
-[][][][][][][][][][][]
- []
-
-Page 11 of table 1 has been set to width 396.0pt with 23 lines per page
-[11]
-Overfull \hbox (30.20332pt too wide) in alignment at lines 294--314
-[][][][][][][][][][][]
- []
-
-Page 12 of table 1 has been set to width 396.0pt with 23 lines per page
-[12]
-Overfull \hbox (51.67407pt too wide) in alignment at lines 314--345
-[][][][][][][][][][][]
- []
-
-Table 1 has been set to width 396.0pt
-) [13] (table2.tex
-File: table2.tex 1999/01/20 5.0rc2 AAS markup document class
-Page 1 of table 2 has been set to width 358.29579pt with 23 lines per page
-[14]
-Page 2 of table 2 has been set to width 358.29579pt with 23 lines per page
-[15]
-Page 3 of table 2 has been set to width 366.29016pt with 23 lines per page
-[16]
-Page 4 of table 2 has been set to width 350.48625pt with 23 lines per page
-[17]
-Table 2 has been set to width 355.84999pt
-) [18] (table3.tex
-File: table3.tex 1999/01/20 5.0rc2 AAS markup document class
-
-Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in alignment at lines 71--92
-[][][][][]
- []
-
-Page 1 of table 3 has been set to width 324.0pt with 23 lines per page
-[19]
-Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in alignment at lines 92--112
-[][][][][]
- []
-
-Page 2 of table 3 has been set to width 324.0pt with 23 lines per page
-[20]
-Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in alignment at lines 112--132
-[][][][][]
- []
-
-Page 3 of table 3 has been set to width 324.0pt with 23 lines per page
-[21]
-Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in alignment at lines 132--152
-[][][][][]
- []
-
-Page 4 of table 3 has been set to width 324.0pt with 23 lines per page
-[22]
-Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in alignment at lines 152--166
-[][][][][]
- []
-
-Table 3 has been set to width 324.0pt
-) [23] (complext.tex
-File: complext.tex 1999/01/20 5.0rc2 AAS markup document class
-Table 4 has been set to width 405.92818pt
-) [24] (samptbls.aux (table1.aux) (table2.aux) (table3.aux) (complext.aux))
-
- *File List*
- aastex.cls 1999/01/20 5.0rc2 AAS markup document class
- article.cls 1998/05/05 v1.3y Standard LaTeX document class
- size12.clo 1998/05/05 v1.3y Standard LaTeX file (size option)
-latexsym.sty 1996/11/20 v2.2d Standard LaTeX package (lasy symbols)
-graphicx.sty 1997/06/09 v1.0d Enhanced LaTeX Graphics (DPC,SPQR)
- keyval.sty 1998/06/05 v1.11 key=value parser (DPC)
-graphics.sty 1998/05/27 v1.0h Standard LaTeX Graphics (DPC,SPQR)
- trig.sty 1994/10/16 v1.08 sin cos tan (DPC)
-graphics.cfg
-textures.def 1997/5/28 v0.4 Graphics extensions for Textures 1.7 and later (A
-rthur Ogawa/ogawa@teleport.com)
- amsmath.sty 1997/03/20 v1.2d AMS math features
- amstext.sty 1996/10/28 v1.2b
- amsgen.sty
- amsbsy.sty 1996/10/28 v1.2b
- amsopn.sty 1996/10/28 v1.2b operator names
- natbib.sty 1998/07/14 6.8c (PWD)
-verbatim.sty 1997/04/30 v1.5k LaTeX2e package for verbatim enhancements
- table1.tex 1999/01/20 5.0rc2 AAS markup document class
- ulasy.fd 1996/11/20 v2.2dLaTeX symbol font definitions
- table2.tex 1999/01/20 5.0rc2 AAS markup document class
- table3.tex 1999/01/20 5.0rc2 AAS markup document class
-complext.tex 1999/01/20 5.0rc2 AAS markup document class
- ***********
-
- )
-Here is how much of TeX's memory you used:
- 1977 strings out of 3926
- 19844 string characters out of 65536
- 80327 words of memory out of 169984
- 4746 multiletter control sequences out of 10000
- 14 hyphenation exceptions out of 3001
- 35i,12n,24p,264b,455s stack positions out of 200i,100n,120p,5000b,4000s
-
-Output written on samptbls (24 pages, 52470 bytes).
-elapsed seconds = 27.12
-\par
-}